Fusion4 MSCL Installation

Fusion4 MSC-L
Installation & Operation Manual

Fusion4 MSC-L
For service-related questions, contact:
Technical Assistance Centre
Phone:
+1 800 423 9883 or
+1 215 641 3610
E-mail:
HFS-TAC-SUPPORT@honeywell.com
© 2021 - Honeywell International Inc.

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Functionality Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 Target Audience for this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
CHAPTER 2 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Safety Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.1.2 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.2 Safety Instructions for the MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.2.1.1 EC Declaration of Conformity (for EU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.2.1.2 Control Drawings for FM & CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.2.1.3 Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.1.4 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.1.5 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.2.3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.4 Personal Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.2.4.1.1 Opening the MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.2.5 Commissioning and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.2.5.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.6 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.2.6.1 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.7 Accordance to Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
2.2.7.1 Explosion Safety Limiting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
2.2.7.2 Explosion Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.7.3 Low-Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.7.4 The MSC-L Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
2.3 Safety Instructions for the LAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2.3.1.1 EC declaration of conformity (for EU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2.3.1.2 Control Drawings for FM & CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2.3.2 Explosion Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

Installation & Operation Manual 1
Table of Contents
2.3.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.6 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.7 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.8 The LAD Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.4 Safety Instructions for the IR Controller . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
2.4.2 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.2.1 EC declaration of conformity (for EU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2.4.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.7 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.8 IR Controller Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5 Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.1.1.1 Transactions and Batches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.1.2 Batch principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.1.2.1 Batch Flow Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.1.3 Types of Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.3.1 Straight Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.3.2 Ratio Blending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3.1.3.3 Side Stream Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.3.4 Sequential Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
3.1.4 Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.5 Loading Principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.5.1 Device loading capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3.1.6 Menu-based MSC-L Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2 MID Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.2 MID Approval Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
3.2.3 Component-level Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

2 Installation & Operation Manual
Table of Contents
3.2.4 System-level Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.2.5 The Fusion4 MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
3.3 System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4 FlexConn Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
3.5 Hardware Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.5.1 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
3.5.2 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
3.5.3 Grounding Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
3.6 PCB Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.6.1 PCB Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.6.1.1 CAN-HMI-MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.6.1.1.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
3.6.1.1.2 Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
3.6.1.2 CAN-ARM-MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.6.1.2.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
3.6.1.3 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
3.6.1.3.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
3.6.2 CAN-PSF-MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.6.2.1 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.6.2.2 Power Board Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
3.6.2.3 Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
3.6.2.4 Fuse Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.6.2.4.1 MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.6.3 Device Electrical Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.6.4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.6.5 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
3.7 Available Input/Output Functions of the MSC-L . . . . 3-39
3.8 Input Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
3.8.2 Digital Input DC (DI DC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
3.8.2.1 Functional Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.8.2.2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.8.3 Single Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Table of Contents
3.8.4 Dual-Pulse Input (Quad PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

3.8.5 Analog Input (AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.8.6 Resistance Temperature Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.8.7 Digital Input AC (DI AC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.9 Output Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
3.9.2 Pulse Output (PO DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.9.3 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
3.9.4 Digital Output Electromechanical Relay (AC or DC) . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.9.5 Digital Output Solid State Relay AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.10 Communication Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62
3.10.2 RS-485 Communication (2-wire or 4-wire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62
3.10.2.3 Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
3.10.3 Ethernet Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
3.10.3.3 Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
3.11 Security Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.11.1 Device Security Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Table of Contents
3.11.2 Network and Security Control Recommendations . . . . . . . . .3-66

3.11.3 How to report a security vulnerability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Mounting and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Gland Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4.2.2 Metric Gland Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4.2.3 NPT Cable Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
4.3 Opening the MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4 Closing the MSC Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
4.5 Removing/Replacing the PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.6 Fusing and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.6.1 Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
4.6.1.1 Internal Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.6.1.2 External Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.6.2 Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
4.6.3 Disconnecting/breaker device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.7 Wiring Termination Guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.7.1 Wiring Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
4.7.2 Backplane Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
4.7.2.1 ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.7.2.2 Floorplan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.7.2.3 Connector Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
4.7.2.4 ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.7.2.5 Floorplan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.7.2.6 Connector Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
4.7.3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
4.7.3.1 Wire Sizes and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.7.4 Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.7.5 Wire Crimps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
4.7.6 Internal Wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.7.6.1 AC Cable 1 (Gland 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.7.6.2 AC Cable 2 (Gland 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.7.6.3 DC cable 1 (Gland 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.7.6.4 AC Cable 3 (Gland 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.7.6.5 AC Cable 4 (Gland 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Table of Contents
4.7.6.6 Analog Cable 1 (Gland 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

4.7.6.7 AC Cable 5 (Gland 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.7.6.8 DC Cable 2 (Gland 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.7.6.9 DC Cable 3 (Gland 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.7.6.10 DC Cable 4 (Gland 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.7.6.11 DC Cable 5 (Gland 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.7.6.12 Comms Cable 1 (Gland 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.7.6.13 DC Cable 6 (Gland 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.7.6.14 DC Cable 7 (Gland 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.7.6.15 Comms Cable 2 (Gland 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.7.6.16 DC Cable 8 (Gland 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.7.6.17 DC Cable 9 (Gland 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.7.6.18 AC Cable 6 (Gland 18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.7.6.19 DC Cable 10 (Gland 19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
4.7.6.20 DC Cable 11 (Gland 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
4.7.6.21 AC Cable 7 (Gland 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.7.6.22 AC Cable 8 (Gland 22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.7.6.23 Analog Cable 2 (Gland 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
4.7.6.24 AC Cable 9 (Gland 24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.7.6.25 AC Cable 10 (Gland 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
4.7.6.26 DC Cable 12 (Gland 26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
4.7.7 Connecting MSC-L to NexWatch DR4208S Card Reader . . . 4-49
4.7.8 ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC Terminal Assignment Guide . . . .4-49
4.7.9 ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC Terminal Assignment Guide . . . .4-69
4.8 Display Replacement Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
CHAPTER 5 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Text Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Service Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3.1 Fusion4 IR Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
5.3.2 Fusion4 Local Access Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
5.3.2.2 LAD Application Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
5.3.3 Integrated Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
5.3.4 Navigation with Fusion4 IR Controller and Fusion4 LAD . . . . .5-8

Table of Contents
5.3.4.1 Basic Navigation (Fusion4 IR Controller + Fusion4 LAD) . . . . .5-8

5.3.4.2 LEDs (Fusion4 IR Controller + Fusion4 LAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
5.3.4.3 Special Function Key (Only LAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.4.4 SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
5.3.4.4.1 Product Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3.4.4.2 Directory Structure and File Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
5.3.4.4.3 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
5.3.4.5 Language Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.3.4.5.1 Building a Local Language Pack for the MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
5.3.4.5.2 Configuring a User Display Language for the MSC-L. . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
5.4 Menu and Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
5.4.2 Key benefits of the HMI on the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
5.4.3 Navigation Rules for the Menu-based Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.4.4 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.4.5 Stream Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4.5.1 Product Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4.5.2 Additive Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4.5.3 External Additive Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
5.4.6 Arm Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
5.4.7 Text Input Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.4.8 Numeric Input Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.4.9 Enumeration Input Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
5.4.10 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.5 Device Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.5.1 Security Levels (SL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
5.5.2 Rules of Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
5.6 Device Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.6.1 Using the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.6.2 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.6.2.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.6.2.2 Stream Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.6.2.3 Arm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
5.6.2.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.6.2.5 Info (Device Information). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
5.6.2.6 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.6.2.7 Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
5.6.2.8 LAD Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52

Table of Contents
5.7 Loading Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

5.8 Unloading Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.9 LPG Loading Application Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.10 LNG Loading Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.10.1 About LNG Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61
5.10.2 MSC-L Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.10.3 LNG Loading using MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.10.3.1 Nitrogen purging to truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63
5.10.3.2 Release truck pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.10.3.3 Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64
5.10.3.4 Truck loading process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.10.3.5 Nitrogen purging to open air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.10.4 LNG Loading Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.10.5 LNG Loading Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-77
5.11 Dual Bay Loading Application Overview. . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5.11.1 About Dual Bay Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87
5.11.2 MSC-L Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5.11.3 Dual Bay Loading using MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87
5.11.4 Authorization Modes supported for Dual Bay Loading . . . . . . 5-88
5.11.5 Dual Bay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
5.11.6 Dual Bay Loading Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.12 Weighbridge Loading Application Overview . . . . . 5-102
5.12.1 About Weighbridge Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-102
5.12.2 MSC-L Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-102
5.12.3 MSCL loading using weighbridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-102
5.12.4 Weighbridge configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-103
5.12.5 Weighbridge Loading Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
5.13 Interfacing With External Additive Controller . . . . . .5-117
5.13.1 Connecting External Additive Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
5.13.1.1 Topology and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
5.13.2 Configuring External Additive Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
5.13.2.1 Device Configuration - Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
5.13.2.2 Stream Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-120
5.13.2.3 Stream Configuration - Stream n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-120
5.13.2.3.1 Stream Configuration - Stream n - Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-120
5.13.2.3.2 Stream Configuration - Stream n - I/O Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-121
5.13.2.3.3 Stream Configuration - Stream n - Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .5-121

Table of Contents
5.13.2.3.4 Stream Configuration - Stream n - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-122

5.13.3 Configuring MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-122
5.13.3.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-122
5.13.3.2 External Additive Stream Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-123
5.13.3.3 Arm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-123
5.13.4 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-124
5.13.4.1 Process Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-124
5.13.4.2 Transaction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-126
5.13.4.3 Alarm Handling for External additive streams . . . . . . . . . . . .5-127
5.13.4.3.1 Setting Alarm Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-127
5.13.4.3.2 External Additive Alarms Generated by MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128
5.13.4.3.3 Mapping of Alarms on External Additive Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128
5.14 Sequential Blending Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5.14.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
5.14.2 Load Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131
5.14.3 Inter mini batch behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
5.14.4 Flow Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
5.14.5 Batch record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
5.14.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
5.14.7 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
5.15 Rail Loading Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
5.15.1 About Rail Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-133
5.15.2 MSC-L Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
5.15.3 Rail Loading using MSC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
5.15.4 Rail Loading Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-139
5.15.5 Rail Loading Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-142
5.15.6 Transaction and Batch record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-149
5.16 1010 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
5.16.1 1010BJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
5.16.1.1 License type and constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
5.16.1.2 Assumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
5.16.1.3 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
5.16.2 1010RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-152
5.16.2.1 License type and constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-152
5.16.2.2 Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-152
5.16.2.3 Configurations Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-152
5.16.2.4 Transaction Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-153
5.17 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154

Table of Contents
5.17.1 Device Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-155

5.17.1.1 Device Configuration . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-155
5.17.1.1.1 System Config . General Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-156
5.17.1.1.2 System Config . General . Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-156
5.17.1.1.3 System Config . General . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-158
5.17.1.1.4 System Config . General . Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-162
5.17.1.1.5 System Config . Device . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-162
5.17.1.2 System Config . Device . I/O Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164
5.17.1.2.1 System Config . I/O bindings . Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164
5.17.1.2.2 System Config . I/O bindings . Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164
5.17.1.3 System Config . Device . Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-165
5.17.1.3.1 Serial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-165
5.17.1.3.2 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-168
5.17.1.3.3 IR HHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-169
5.17.1.4 System Config . Device. I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-170
5.17.1.4.1 DI (for both AC# and DC#) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-171
5.17.1.4.2 PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-172
5.17.1.4.3 RTD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-174
5.17.1.4.4 AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-176
5.17.1.4.5 AO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-178
5.17.1.4.6 PO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-179
5.17.1.4.7 EMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-180
5.17.1.5 System Config . Device . Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-180
5.17.1.5.1 System Config . Alarms . Next scheduled service . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-181
5.17.1.5.2 System Config . Alarms . Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-181
5.17.1.5.3 System Config . Alarms . Deadman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-182
5.17.1.5.4 System Config . Alarms . Permissives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-184
5.17.1.5.5 System Config . Alarms . Fixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-185
5.17.1.6 System Config . Device . Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-185
5.17.1.6.1 System Config . Authorization. Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-186
5.17.1.6.2 System Config . Authorization. Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-187
5.17.1.7 Device Configuration . Base Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-189
5.17.1.8 Device Configuration . Workflow Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-190
5.17.1.8.1 System Config . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-191
5.17.1.8.2 System Config . Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-195
5.17.1.9 Device Configuration . RIT Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-196
5.17.2 Bay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-198
5.17.2.1 System Config . bay . Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-198
5.17.2.2 Bay Configuration . I/O Binding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-199
5.17.2.2.1 Bay Configuration . I/O Binding . Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-199
5.17.2.2.2 Device Configuration . I/O Binding . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-199
5.17.2.3 Bay Configuration . Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-200
5.17.2.3.1 System Config . Alarms . Programmable alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-201

Table of Contents
5.17.2.3.2 System Config . Alarms . Weighbridge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-202

5.17.2.4 System Config . Bay . Permissives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-203
5.17.2.5 Bay Configuration . Weighbridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-205
5.18 Stream Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-206
5.18.1 Stream Configuration - Product Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-207
5.18.1.1 Stream Config. . Stream n . Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-207
5.18.1.2 Stream Config . Stream n . I/O Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-208
5.18.1.2.1 The I/O Bindings . Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-209
5.18.1.2.2 The I/O Bindings . Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-211
5.18.1.3 Stream Config. . Stream n . Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .5-212
5.18.1.3.1 Product Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-212
5.18.1.3.2 Valve Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-222
5.18.1.4 Volume Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-224
5.18.1.4.1 Volume Conversion Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-224
5.18.1.4.2 Volume Conversion Calculation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-229
5.18.1.4.3 Stream Config. Stream n . Volume Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-233
5.18.1.5 Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-235
5.18.2 Stream Configuration . Additive streams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-245
5.18.2.1 Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Identification . . . . . . . .5-246
5.18.2.2 Additive Config. Stream n . I/O Bindings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-246
5.18.2.2.1 The I/O Bindings . Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-247
5.18.2.2.2 The I/O Bindings . Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-249
5.18.2.3 Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Control Settings . . . . .5-251
5.18.2.3.1 Additive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-251
5.18.2.3.2 Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-252
5.18.2.4 Additive Stream Config. Stream n . Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-253
5.18.2.4.1 Leaking Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-253
5.18.2.4.2 No Additive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-254
5.18.2.4.3 No Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-254
5.18.2.4.4 Block Valve Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-255
5.18.2.4.5 Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-255
5.18.2.4.6 Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-256
5.18.3 Stream Configuration - External Additive streams . . . . . . . .5-257
5.18.3.1 Stream Config - Ext add n - Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-259
5.18.3.2 Stream Config - Ext add n - Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-260
5.19 Arm Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-264
5.19.1 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-265
5.19.2 Arm Configuration . Arm n . I/O Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-266
5.19.2.1 The I/O Bindings . Input Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-266
5.19.2.2 The I/O Bindings . Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-267
5.19.3 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .5-268

Table of Contents
5.19.3.1 Flow Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-272

5.19.3.2 Preload sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-273
5.19.3.3 Initial flow rate in straight loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-273
5.19.3.4 Auto High Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-273
5.19.4 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Product Streams . . . . . . . . . . . .5-275
5.19.5 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Additive Streams. . . . . . . . . . . .5-277
5.19.6 Arm Configuration . Arm n . External Additive Streams. . . . .5-277
5.19.7 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Recipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-278
5.19.8 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-284
5.19.8.1 Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-286
5.19.8.1.1 Initial Flow . Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-286
5.19.8.1.2 Full Flow . Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-286
5.19.8.1.3 Pre-stop Flow . Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-287
5.19.8.2 Programmable Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-287
5.19.8.3 Block Valve Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-289
5.19.8.4 Preset Overrrun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-289
5.19.8.5 Clean Arm Underrun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-290
5.19.8.6 Stop Switch not covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-290
5.19.8.7 Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-290
5.20 Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-291
5.20.1 Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-292
5.20.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-297
5.20.3 Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-299
5.20.4 Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-299
5.20.5 Load Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-300
5.21 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-302
5.21.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-303
5.21.2 Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-304
5.21.2.0.1 Dashboard I/O Type Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-305
5.21.2.0.2 Digital Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-306
5.21.2.1 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-306
5.21.2.2 Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-306
5.21.2.3 Pulse Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-307
5.21.2.4 Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-307
5.21.3 System Health. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-308
5.21.4 Process Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-310
5.21.5 Storage Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-311
5.21.6 Accumulated Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-311
5.21.7 Comms Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-318

Table of Contents
5.21.8 Device Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-320

5.21.8.1 Reset Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-320
5.21.8.2 Execute Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-321
5.21.8.3 Clear Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-322
5.21.9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-324
5.21.10 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-326
5.22 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-329
5.22.1 Why Calibrate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-329
5.22.2 Calibration Menu Choice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-332
5.22.3 Manual Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-333
5.22.3.1 Product Stream Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-334
5.22.3.2 Additive Stream Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-338
5.22.4 Wizard Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-341
5.22.4.1 Product Stream Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-342
5.22.4.2 Additive Stream Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-349
5.23 Info (Device Information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-354
5.23.1 Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-354
5.23.2 Status Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-357
5.24 Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-358
5.24.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-359
5.24.2 Retrieving Transaction Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-360
5.24.2.1 Transaction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-362
5.24.3 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-365
5.24.4 Events / Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-365
5.24.5 Calibration Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-366
5.24.6 Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-367
5.24.7 Language Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-367
5.25 LAD Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-370
5.25.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-370
5.25.2 Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-371
5.25.2.1 Verify the Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-374
5.25.3 Test LED and LAD Information Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-375
5.25.4 Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-376
5.25.5 LAD Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-377
5.25.6 Format SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-378
5.26 Truck Driver Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-378
5.26.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-378

Table of Contents
5.26.2 Default standalone MSC-L workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-379

5.26.3 STOP Key Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-388
5.26.4 Error Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-391
5.26.4.1 Invalid Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-391
5.26.4.2 Invalid Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-391
5.26.4.3 Batch not Feasible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-392
5.26.4.4 Batch stopped due to an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-392
5.27 Service Technician Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-393
5.27.1 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-393
5.27.2 Configuration Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-394
5.27.3 Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-395
5.27.4 Recipe Transfer using the Fusion4 LAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-396
5.28 Running Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-396
5.28.1 Loading Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-396
5.28.2 Left Arm Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-399
5.29 Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-399
5.30 W&M Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-400
5.30.1 W&M Intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-400
5.30.2 W&M Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-400
5.30.3 Device Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-402
5.30.4 MSC-L W&M compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-402
5.31 Contacting Honeywell TAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-402
CHAPTER 6 ALARM HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1 Alarm Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
6.2.2 Alarm Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
6.2.3 Alarm State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.4 Alarm Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
6.2.5 Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
6.3 Alarm Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.1 Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.2 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
6.3.3 Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
6.4 Alarm Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Table of Contents
6.5 Operations on alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.5.1 Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6.5.2 Clearing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6.5.3 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6.5.4 Acknowledging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6.5.5 Resetting all alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
6.5.6 Acknowledging all alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
6.6 Active Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.7 Alarm Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.8 List of all alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.8.1 Device Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
6.8.2 Bay Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.8.3 Arm Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.8.4 Product Stream Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.8.5 Additive Stream Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.8.6 External Additive Stream Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
6.8.7 Dual Bay Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Table of Contents

General - Product Overview
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
1.1 Product Overview

Fusion4 Multi Stream Controller - Loading (MSC-L) is a Load Computer,
Batch Controller Unit (BCU) or a Preset, which is typically installed on a
loading bay, at a terminal, in the petro chemical industry. The MSC-L is
capable of operating in an explosion hazardous area. The MSC-L is
mainly used for accurately transferring products from the storage area
into another containment vessel. It takes into account the volume
changes necessary for legal measurements. Apart, from loading a
single product, the MSC-L also provides necessary functionality for
blending products, additive injections and for loading the final products
accurately, as required in the global oil storage and distribution industry.
The MSC-L controls the following:
 Loading - Transferring the base or the stock oil, or the petroleum
derivative from a storage tank to a vehicle, for example, road trucks,
rail cars, or barges.
 Additive injection - Improving and differentiating the base or stock oil,
or petroleum derivatives by changing the physical properties and
specifications of the oil product (fuel) during loading/transferring.
 Blending - Combining two or more fluid products to a predetermined
specification during loading.
The MSC-L utilizes Local Access Device (LAD) for interfacing, local
commissioning, configuration, calibration, troubleshooting, and data
exchange, using the Secure Digital (SD) card.

Installation & Operation Manual 1-1
General - Product Overview
FIGURE 1-1 Basic MSC-L principle of operation (example)
NOTE: The MSC-L can control up to six loading arms simultaneously.

1-2 Installation & Operation Manual
General - Functionality Overview
1.2 Functionality Overview
Functionality MSC-L
Global Ex approvals (ATEX, FM, CSA, IECEx) √
Expandable I/O hardware √
Firmware in-situ upgradeable √
Fully configurable I/O binding √
Diagnostics dashboard √
Configuration upload/download √
Transaction and calibration logs upload/download √
Interface to Fusion4 Portal (printing, and so on) √
Multi language display 11
Free programmable language pack 1
Transaction storage 10000
Alarm log records 2000
Calibration log records 1200
Event records 1000
Comms ports 7
Ethernet ports 3
Single pulse inputs 24
Pulse outputs 4
DI-DC 60
DI-AC 12
DO-EMR 40
DO-SSR 40
Analog Inputs 14
Analog Outputs 6
RTD Inputs 6
NOTE: The functionality overview lists the maximum available I/O hardware.
1.3 Target Audience for this Manual

This manual is intended for service technicians, and bay operators (for
example, truck drivers) who are assigned to install, commission,
service, or operate the MSC-L.
This Installation and Operations manual is aligned with Fusion4 MSC-L
software version A2440.

General - Target Audience for this Manual
FIGURE 1-2 Fusion4 Multi Stream Controller - Loading (MSC-L)

Safety - Safety Conventions
CHAPTER 2 SAFETY
2.1 Safety Conventions
2.1.1 Warnings
The following warning symbol used in the manual recommends your
attention to prevent personal injuries or dangerous situations.
Symbol Description Remark
General warning It is always explained by text.
2.1.2 Cautions
The following caution symbol used in the manual recommends your
attention to prevent damages to the equipment.
Symbol Description
General caution sign
ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive device

Safety - Safety Instructions for the MSC-L
2.2 Safety Instructions for the MSC-L
2.2.1 General
WARNING! You must strictly follow all the safety instructions

mentioned in this manual and the safety instructions
shipped with the MSC-L during installation, commis-
sioning, operation, and maintenance for the safe
operation of the MSC-L.
The MSC-L may be located in explosion safety areas as follows:
Rest of the World
USA (FM) and Canada (CSA) Canada (CSA)
(ATEX/IECEx)
Safety Safety Safety
Remarks Remarks Remarks
level level level
Class 1, WARNING! Zone 1 WARNING! Zone 1 WARNING!
Division 1 Do NOT open Do NOT open Do NOT open
when an when an when an
explosive explosive explosive
atmosphere atmosphere atmosphere
may be may be may be
present. present. present.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Seal conduit Seal conduit
in 18 inches. in 18 inches.
Class 1, WARNING! Zone 2 WARNING! Zone 2 WARNING!

Division 2 Do NOT open Do NOT open Do NOT open
when an when an when an
explosive explosive explosive
atmosphere atmosphere atmosphere
may be may be may be
present. present. present.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Seal conduit Seal conduit
in 18 inches. in 18 inches.
Safe Area - Safe - Safe -

Zone Zone
2.2.1.1 EC Declaration of Conformity (for EU)
Refer to the EC declaration of conformity and ATEX certificate(s),

shipped with the MSC-L for EC declarations.
2.2.1.2 Control Drawings for FM & CSA
Refer to the control drawings shipped with the MSC-L for the FM and
CSA certifications.

2- 2 Installation & Operation Manual
2.2.1.3 Users
The mechanical and electrical installation must be performed only by

trained personnels with the knowledge of the requirements for
installation of explosion proof equipment in hazardous areas.
The entire installation procedure for the MSC-L must be implemented in
accordance with national, local, and company regulations.
The entire electrical installation may be performed in accordance with
the national requirements for electrical equipment to be installed in
hazardous areas.
2.2.1.4 Additional Information
For additional information about Honeywell Enraf’s solutions, see the

back cover of this manual to contact Honeywell Enraf or its
representative.
2.2.1.5 Environmental Conditions
The environmental conditions regarding the permissible operating

temperature for the MSC-L is -40 °C to +65 °C (-40 °F to +149 °F).
WARNING! When the MSC-L is used in operating temperatures

above 40 °C the enclosure is hot when it is touched.
2.2.2 Operation
After commissioning, the MSC-L can be used for its flow controller or a
load computer for a multi stream product.
2.2.3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

In the unlikely event of a malfunction, only a qualified service technician,
trained by Honeywell Enraf, and with the knowledge of safety
regulations for working in hazardous areas, must be allowed to service,
maintain, assemble, and dismantle the MSC-L.
WARNING! Any repairs or part replacements must be done by a

Honeywell Enraf trained service technician.
2.2.4 Personal Safety

National, local and company regulations regarding personal safety must
be followed.
Consider the weight of the MSC-L when moving, installing, or

decommisioning.
WARNING! At high ambient temperature, pay attention to the fact

that the accessible parts on the outside of the MSC-L
can be hot.

2.2.4.1 General
2.2.4.1.1 Opening the MSC-L
WARNING! It is forbidden to open the MSC-L in an explosive

hazardous environment, unless otherwise stated on
the safety label.
2.2.5 Commissioning and Maintenance
NOTE: The MSC-L can be mounted on the wall using frame

and bolts. The frame and bolts used must be capable
of holding four times the weight of the MSC-L being
mounted.
WARNING! Treat the flange surfaces of the lid and the housing
with care. Make sure that the flange surface is clean
and undamaged before closing.
This is required to maintain the CSA approval and it

is strongly recommended for all Ex approvals. The O-
ring must be present and undamaged.
1. National, local, and company regulations regarding installation must
be followed.
2. The bolts of the enclosure lid are captive (property class A2-70).
Contact Honeywell Enraf if you need to replace the bolts.
3. Before closing the lid, check that all grounding connections including
the grounding connection to the lid, are properly connected.
4. All wiring entries must be closed such that the approvals are not
invalidated. See section 4.2 - Gland Entries, to make sure that the
correct thread type is selected. For installations using cable glands,
always use compound barrier glands. For installations using
conduits, each conduit must be sealed within 18 inches of the
enclosure.
5. The limiting values of Um must be respected for all non-intrinsically
safe connections. See section 2.2.7.1 - Explosion Safety Limiting
Values, for information regarding the Explosion Safety Limiting
Values.
2.2.5.1 Tools
WARNING! Use non-sparking tools and explosion-proof testers.

Use suitable explosion-proof tools (for example,
testing devices).
2.2.6 Electrical
2.2.6.1 Grounding
WARNING! Make sure that the housing of the MSC-L is properly

bounded to the Protective Earth (PE). See FIGURE
2-1 for external grounding of the MSC-L and FIGURE
2-2 for bonding any AC mains wire.

Also, make sure that the electrical resistance of the

ground connections is below the maximum limit/
value prescribed by national, local, and company
requirements.
3 point grounding
3 point grounding
F4 A1 0-00 02
FIGURE 2-1 External grounding connections of the MSC-L
8 point grounding
FIGURE 2-2 Internal grounding connections of the MSC-L
WARNING! Maintaining the ground bonding of the lid to the local

Protective Earth (PE) using the lid ground wire is
crucial for ensuring intrinsic safety.

2.2.7 Accordance to Regulations
2.2.7.1 Explosion Safety Limiting Values
Explosion safety items Limiting values Type of protection

Power supply (Mains input): 100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz
Maximum allowed power dissipation
90 W
inside the enclosure:
LAD interface circuit (LAD front con- Uo = 15.75 V, Io = 1.49 A, Po = 1.92 Type of protection intrinsic safety Ex
nector): W, Co = 2.69 μF; Lo = 62 μH ia IIB
Thermal protection, limitation of the
160 mA
output current
Um 250 VAC
2.2.7.2 Explosion Safety
Approval Certificate no. Type of protection identification

ATEX DEKRA 12ATEX0101 X II 2 G Ex d [ia] IIB T6 Gb
IECEx DEK 12.0021 X Zone 1 Ex d [ia] IIB T6 Gb
Ta = -40 °C ... +65 °C
FM 3048063 Class I, Division 1 group C, D T4
(-40 °F ... +149 °F)
Class I, Division 1 Group C & D T6
CSA 2673172
Class I, Zone 1 Ex d [ia] IIB T6 Gb
2.2.7.3 Low-Voltage Directive
The MSC-L is suitable for the following categories.

 Pollution degree 2
 Overvoltage category II
 Class I equipment

2.2.7.4 The MSC-L Labels
NOTE: Type plates are exemplary and subject to change.
FIGURE 2-3 Identification labels with the safety note on the MSC-L

Safety - Safety Instructions for the LAD
FIGURE 2-4 W&M approvals type plate for Fusion4 MSC
2.3 Safety Instructions for the LAD
FIGURE 2-5 Local Access Device LAD

operation of the device.

The LAD may be used in hazardous areas as follows:

Rest of the World (ATEX /
IECEx)
level Level level
Class 1, WARNING! Class 1, WARNING! Zone 1 -
Division 1 Substitution of Division 1 Substitution of
components components
may impair resp. may impair
intrinsic safety. intrinsic
Zone 1 safety.
Class 1, WARNING! Class 1, WARNING! Zone 2 -
Division 2 Substitution of Division 2 Substitution of
components components
may impair resp. may impair
intrinsic safety. intrinsic
Zone 2 safety.
Safe - Safe - Safe -
Area Zone Zone

2.3.1 General
The LAD is a hand-held controller used for interfacing with the MSC-L.
WARNING! Only use the instrument for its intended purpose.
2.3.1.1 EC declaration of conformity (for EU)

shipped with the device for EC declarations.
2.3.1.2 Control Drawings for FM & CSA
Refer to the control drawings shipped with the MSC-L for FM and CSA.
2.3.2 Explosion Safety
Approval Certificate no. Type of protection identification

ATEX KEMA 10ATEX0152 II 2 G
Ex ia IIB T4 Gb
IECEx IECEx KEM 10.0070 Zone 1
Ta = -20 °C ... +65 °C
FM 3041202 Class I, Division 1 group C, D T4
(-4 °F ... +149 °F)
Class I, Division 1 group C, D T4
CSA 11.2395571
Zone 1 Ex ia IIB T4
WARNING! This is an intrinsically safe device and may only be

connected to devices with compatible intrinsically
safe parameters, such as the MSC-L.
Connection of non-intrinsically safe signals inval-
idates the approval. The electrical data of the intrin-
sically safe circuits is to be taken from the certificate.
2.3.3 Commissioning
The LAD and the Fusion4 parent devices must be commissioned using
this controller trained by Honeywell Enraf. The service technician must
have knowledge of the national, local and company requirements for
electrical equipment in hazardous areas.
2.3.4 Operation
After connecting to the MSC-L, the LAD can be used for its intended
purpose.

The LAD hardware is non-servicable, in case of damage contact
Honeywell Enraf for replacement.

2.3.6 Additional Information

representative.
2.3.7 Environmental Conditions

The environmental conditions regarding the allowable operating
temperature is -20 °C to +65 °C (-4 °F to +149 °F), relative humidity is
RH 5 to 95%, non-condensing, and operating pressure is atmospheric.

Installation & Operation Manual 2 - 11
2.3.8 The LAD Labels
FIGURE 2-6 Identification labels with safety note on the LAD

Safety - Safety Instructions for the IR Controller
2.4 Safety Instructions for the IR Controller
FIGURE 2-7 The IR Controller

operation of the device.
The IR Controller may be located in explosion safety areas as follows:
IECEx)
level Level level
Class 1, WARNING! Class 1, WARNING! Zone 1 WARNING!
Division 1 Do not open Division 1 Do not open Do not open
battery battery battery
compartment compartment compartment
in a hazardous in a in a hazardous
area. Use only hazardous area. Use only
approved area. Use only approved
batteries, see approved batteries, see
label. batteries, see label.
label.


IECEx)
level Level level
Class 1, WARNING! Class 1, WARNING! Zone 2 WARNING!
Division 2 Do not open Division 2 Do not open Do not open
battery battery battery
compartment compartment compartment
in a hazardous in a in a hazardous
area. Use only hazardous area. Use only
approved area. Use only approved
batteries, see approved batteries, see
label. batteries, see label.
label.
Safe - Safe - Safe -
Area Zone Zone
2.4.1 General
The Fusion4 IR Controller is a hand-held remote controller, which is an
infrared-type control device. The device facilitates programming the
Enraf Fluid Technology IR Controlled Equipment remotely.
The device contains all the necessary program codes installed. Hence,
the user programming is not required.
2.4.2 Precautions
 Clean the device with a damp cloth.
 Use additional protection in areas where damage may occur.
 Do not repair the device without permission to avoid the invalidation
of the certificate.
 Do not leave the device in direct sunlight or place it near a heat
source.
 Handle the device gently. Do not drop the device or subject it to other
types of stress.
 Do not touch any solvent or aggressive substances before touching
the enclosure as it is made of plastic.
 Store the device at room temperature in a clean and dry location.
 To avoid damage to the device or shortening of battery life, use the
correct type of batteries.
 To prevent battery usage when storing the device in an unused
condition for a long time, make sure that the buttons are not pressed.
 To prevent damage caused by leaking batteries, remove the
batteries before storing the device in an unused condition for a long
time.

2.4.2.1 EC declaration of conformity (for EU)

shipped with the device for EC declarations.
2.4.3 Installation
Perform the following steps to install the device.
1. Remove the security screws from the compartment lid.
2. Slide the battery compartment lid from the device.
3. Install the 3 AAA Alkaline batteries ensuring that the plus (+) and the
minus (-) polarity of the batteries are correct.
NOTE: Removing the batteries does not remove the Fusion4

IR Controller memory.
Always replace the batteries with new ones.
Use only batteries approved for use.
WARNING! Do not open the battery compartment or change the

batteries in a hazardous area.
2.4.4 Commissioning
The IR Controller and the Fusion4 parent devices must be
commissioned using this controller by qualified service technician,
trained by Honeywell Enraf. The service technician must have
knowledge of the national, local, and company requirements. for
electrical equipment in hazardous areas.
2.4.5 Operation
After connecting to a Fusion4 parent device (for example, the MSC-L),
the Fusion4 IR Controller can be used for its intended purpose.
Perform the following steps to use the device.
1. Direct the device at the IR port of the equipment to be programmed.
2. Select ATTN on the IR Controller to turn the device and provide the
initial program command to the MSC-L.
REMARK: Refer to the specific equipment’s user’s manual for

defined programmed functions.
The device automatically stops after 30 seconds if an
activity is not performed. This helps in preserving the
battery life.

In the unlikely event of a malfunction, only a qualified service technician,
trained by Honeywell Enraf, and with the knowledge of safety
regulations for working in hazardous areas, must be allowed to repair
the MSC-L.

2.4.7 Additional Information

representative.
2.4.8 IR Controller Labels

Safety - Liability
FIGURE 2-8 Identification labels with Safety note on the Fusion4 IR Controller
2.5 Liability
The information in this installation manual is the copyright property of
Honeywell International Inc. Honeywell International Inc. disclaims any
responsibility for personal injury or damage to the equipment caused by
the following:
 Deviation from any of the prescribed procedures.
 Execution of activities that are not prescribed.
 Neglecting the safety regulations for handling tools and use of
electricity.
The contents, descriptions, and specifications in this manual are subject
to change without notice. Honeywell International Inc. accepts no
responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
WARNING! Only certified technicians are authorized to make

changes to the MSC-L configuration. All modifi-
cations must be in accordance with the guidelines as
set forth by Honeywell International Inc. Modifi-
cations not authorized by Honeywell International
Inc. invalidates the approval certificates.

Safety - Liability
This page is intentionally left blank.

System Description - Introduction
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1 Introduction
3.1.1 General
The main function of the MSC-L is to assist in loading the liquid
products from a storage area to another containment vessel. That is,
the MSC-L helps the smooth movement and accurate measurement of
the liquid product being transferred. The MSC-L is also capable of
creating a new composite product during the transfer operation by
combining one or more different products together to form a new
product. The MSC-L creates the final, required product based on a
user-supplied specification, known as a Recipe.
For more information about Recipes, refer to the section CHAPTER 5 -
Operation.
The types of composite products that the MSC-L can create is limited by
various physical constraints such as product piping, isolation valves, the
availability of pumps, and blend valves.
The MSC-L can create composite products by combining products
through one of the following methods.
 Blending - The process of combining two or more products contin-
uously.
 Additive injection - The process of injecting small and discrete
amounts of a product (an additive) into another product.
3.1.1.1 Transactions and Batches
The MSC-L uses the following terms to control and record the product
transfer process.
 Transaction - A single user session during which one or more
batches may be initiated. A transaction also defines the basic unit of
financial reconciliation.
 Batch - Loading of a preset amount of final product into a
compartment on the vehicle.
3.1.2 Batch principle

Batch is defined as the loading of a preset amount of the final product
into a compartment on the vehicle. This final product may be a single
product or a blended product made on-the-fly by the MSC-L. If more
than one compartment is available, then more than one batch per
transaction can be initiated. There are no dependencies between
batches. That is, each compartment has its own independent operation.
If there are more than one load arm associated with the MSC-L then
multiple batches may be running simultaneously in the MSC-L.

3.1.2.1 Batch Flow Stages

Following are the four batch flow stages for the MSC-L.
 Initial Flow Phase
In the initial state, product is initially slowly added to the receiving
container to mitigate the risk of electro-static buildup within the
container. The loader will continue to deliver product at the Initial
Flow Rate until the Deliver Product Volume reaches the Initial
Volume.
 Full Flow Phase
In the Full Flow Phase, the product is delivered quickly so that the
batch can finish as soon as possible. The Full Flow Phase continues
until the Delivered Product Volume reaches the value equal to (Batch
Preset Volume – Pre-Stop Volume).
 Pre-Stop Phase
In the pre-stop phase the flow rate is decreased so that the flow can
be stopped quickly and accurately at the very end of the load. The
Pre-stop phase continues until the Delivered Product Volume
reaches the value equal to (Batch Preset Volume – Valve closing
quantity).
 Clean Arm Volume
The last part of a batch typically is to “clean arm”, it is essential that
all blend volumes are delivered before that time. To achieve this, a
certain percentage of headroom is included in the blend flows such
that effectively enlarge the clean arm volume in an ideal case.
Headroom is the transition quantity during flow rate change from high
flow state to pre-stop flow state. This solution is because a larger
clean arm volume is permitted while the opposite is not true.
Always recommended to use clean arm volume to maintain correct
blend ratio in the compartment. For no clean arm functionality, blend
percentage may not be accurate due to few unknown blend percentage
already available in arm which was delivered in the previous batch.
Blending is allowed in any stage as long as the flow rates of the streams
do not fall below the minimum measurement boundary. The Clean Arm
Volume is calculated back from the end of the batch. This means that,
when configured, the clean arm volume can be loaded over multiple
phases in the flow profile. Blending is not allowed when the clean arm
volume has to be delivered. The is to assure that at the end of the batch
the blend ratio is within specifications and the clean arm volume is not
compromised.
It is possible to specify a clean arm volume greater than the pre stop
volume. This implies that part of the clean arm volume can be delivered
during full flow. Given the fact that no blending is allowed during delivery
of the clean arm volume it is possible that the flow rate of the main
stream can be increased while still adhering the before mentioned
restrictions.

The flow rate setpoint calculated such that they meet stream and arm
limitations. For the arm this means that the total flow rate may never
exceed the arm’s full flow rate. For streams, it means that the flow rate
must always be in the inner window of its valve and meter minimum and
maximum flow rates in the steady state.
The following image illustrates how the actual batch blend percentage
may vary during the load based on the various configuration settings.
For instance, if the initial flow rate is too small for accurate blend
product measurement, then blending only starts in the Full Flow Phase.
Secondly, if the clean arm functionality is configured, then the MSC-L
intentionally over blends to ensure that all the required blend products
are dispensed before the clean arm phase begins.
NOTE: To adequately match various specific applications,

the MSC-L has a number of configurable
parameters. For an explanation of all these
parameters and their specific settings, see chapter 5
"Operation".

3.1.3 Types of Blending

The following sections describe the various types of blending supported
in the MSC-L.
3.1.3.1 Straight Loading
Straight loading is a batch in which only the main product is dispensed

without any additional blend products.
FIGURE 3-1 Straight Arm Loading
3.1.3.2 Ratio Blending
Ratio blending is a process in which the main product is blended with

one or more blend products, when a batch is loaded. The amount of
each product is defined by the recipe selected for the batch. Each
product - main and blend(s) - must be controlled independently by its
own product valve and must have its own meter.
FIGURE 3-2 Ratio Blending Piping
3.1.3.3 Side Stream Blending
Side Stream blending is a batch blending where one blend product is

blended into the main product. The blend product must have its own
valve and meter. The combined, final, blended product must also have
its own valve and meter.

In side stream blending, the main product does not have its own valve
and meter. The flow rates of both the main and blend products are
therefore a function of both valves.
FIGURE 3-3 Side Stream Blending Piping
3.1.3.4 Sequential Blending
Sequential blending is a process in which multiple products share a

single flow meter and control valve and are loaded one by one in
sequence. Each product has dedicated pump demand and block
valves. The mixing of the products takes place in the receiving
compartment. The amount of each product and order of loading is
defined by the recipe selected for the batch. See chapter 5 "Operation"
for more details.
FIGURE 3-4 Sequential Blending Piping

3.1.4 Additive Injection

Additive injection is a process in which small amounts of additives are
added to the final product. The additive product is injected in pace with
the product flow. That is, the additive injection occurs after an interval of
configured pacing volume until the end of the batch. The recipe
configured on the MSC-L controls the rate of additive being injected into
the product stream.
When the MSC-L determines that an additive cycle is required, it opens
the solenoid control valve and injects a small quantity of additive into
the product stream. When the amount of additive is reached for that
cycle, the solenoid valve is closed and the instrument waits until the
next additive cycle is required. The additive injection cycle repeats in
this manner, which keeps the additive synchronised with the product
flow.
MSC-L also supports additive injection by interfacing with External
additive controller. For more details, see chapter 5.13 "Interfacing With
External Additive Controller".
NOTE: The MSC-L assumes that the additive piping is done

in such a way that additives comes in upstream
(before) the custody transfer flow meter.
When the additive piping is done in such a way that

additives comes in downstream (after) the custody
transfer flow meter the additive is not a part of the
finalized product volume but the individual additive
volumes are measured and are part of the trans-
action record and therefore available when viewing
transactions or for printing additive reports by the
Fusion4 Portal.
3.1.5 Loading Principle

The loading arm of the MSC-L supports the control of the following as
described in the following figure.
 Maximum 7 product streams
 Maximum 12 additive streams (inclusive of internal additive streams
and upto 6 external additive streams)

utillizes
utillizes
However, a single batch (load to a compartment) can only control a

subset of the product streams or the additive streams.
For each batch, the MSC-L supports the control of the following, as
described in the following figure.
 Stream with main product
 Maximum 3 blend streams
 Maximum 6 additive streams (inclusive of internal and external
additives)
This sub set is defined by the recipes running on that arm.

3.1.5.1 Device loading capabilities
Following are the device loading capabilities, as described in the

following figure.
 Maximum of 6 simultaneous loading arms are supported.
 Maximum of 50 recipes can be configured per loading arm.
 Maximum of 10,000 transactions First in First Out (FIFO) can be
stored in the device.
 A transaction (record of product transfer to one customer) can be
transferred to the Fusion4 Portal (transaction record) for W&M
compliant BoL storage and printing.
 A transaction can contain batches loaded with maximum of 6
different loading arms.
 A transaction contains maximum of 20 batches.
 A batch simultaneous controls a maximum of 10 streams:
• Stream with main product
• Up to 3 blend streams
• Up to 6 additive streams

System Description - MID Compliance
3.1.6 Menu-based MSC-L Control

By using service tools (the LAD, the IR controller, and the integrated
keyboard) the MSC-L can be controlled through its integrated and menu
based interface.
This control device can be one of the following three devices.
 The RS-485 connection (through an Ex d/ Ex i connector on the front
of the MSC-L) based on the LAD.
 The Fusion4 IR Controller.
 Integrated keyboard.
Using one of these devices, it is possible to navigate the menu items,
change the settings (commissioning), initiate a calibration, and
diagnose problems.
3.2 MID Compliance
3.2.1 Introduction
The Measuring Instruments Directive (MID) (2004/22/EC) is
designed to provide a level playing field in Europe, for custody transfer
measuring equipment and systems. The MID currently covers 10
instrument categories, for uniform legislation in the 27 EU countries.
The implementation of this directive in national legislation became due
on the 30th of October 2006.
The MSC-L is 100% MID-compliant.
This legislation results in breaking down trade barriers and improving
competition, which is one of the main objectives of the European Union.
In the directive, the specific articles on each of the instrument
categories are called Annexes. The Annex relevant to the measurement
of petroleum products is “flow metering of liquids other than water”
and is identified as Annex MI-005. The requirements in this Annex are
based on the OIML recommendation R117-1, which is the pre-eminent
set of guidelines for Weight & Measures of petroleum metering
installations, for a considerable time.
3.2.2 MID Approval Approach

One of the key changes in the Measurement Instruments Directive (MI-
005) compared to previous national legislation, is that the total metering
system is now subject to perform in the accuracy specification, and not
just specific components. This means that not only the flow meter is
subject to certification but also others.

Essential parts of the metering system, such as temperature

transmitters, electronic volume converters air-eliminators, and so on. In
addition to this, the method with which the system is built is also
examined by the Notified body. In turn the Notified Bodies are
scrutinized by the European Board of Accreditation.
The system approval process for MID consists of two main steps:
 ‘Bringing on the market’ - type-examination by a Notified body in
accordance with Annex-B of the MID. This generates a so-called
type-examination certificate.
 ‘Putting it into use’ - conformity check of the essential parts and a wet
calibration in the legal specification. This is implemented in
accordance with Annex F or D of the MID. This generates the system
approval.
The system can now be used for trade and excise applications. The
received approval is subject to recalibration at 1 or 2 year interval, and
this is determined on national level.
NOTE: Evaluation Certificate provides demonstration that

the MSC-L as a component of an MID-compliant
instrument is approved per MID and OIML
requirements.
3.2.3 Component-level Requirements

For blending applications such as ethanol- and biodiesel-blending, the
minimum required accuracy of the metering line is ±0.5% (class 0.5).
The flow metering element of the system is allowed ± 0.3% in accuracy,
and the remainder of the system is permitted to show maximum errors
to ± 0.2%.
As the errors are directly related to inaccuracies, they are added to get
the total maximum. Therefore, ± 0.5% is the maximum allowed
discrepancy between what the seller states as the volume transferred,
and the actual volume the buyer receives.

FIGURE 3-5 Component-level requirements (flow accuracy)
In the metering line, the essential parts of the system are the flow meter,
the temperature sensor, and the load controller itself. The flow meter
physically measures the flow and generates pulses, which are related to
the volume passed through the meter. For reliability, the pulses are dual
phase shifted and are constantly checked by the electronic load
controller for integrity, according to API and ISO. Through the
temperature sensor (transmitter) the metered volume can be corrected
to base temperature of either 15°C (60°F) or 20°C (68°F), in
accordance with the ASTM standards. If a temperature transmitter is
applied, then component level requirements must also have an
evaluation certificate. For the temperature sensor (Pt100) it is not
required.

FIGURE 3-6 Component-level requirements (Temperature and Pressure accuracy)
The load controller evaluation is quite complex, but in principle it has to

comply with the security of signal and data handling, as required by MID
and working documents of WELMEC.
A very stringent requirement is the EMC standard for industrial use of
electronic equipment. Electro-magnetic noise might influence the
measurement of the metering signal, and this is not allowed to occur
outside the maximum given accuracy.

3.2.4 System-level Requirements

With any new equipment legislation such as MID, there is a raft of new
issues and criteria that need to be understood by both those who are
manufacturing the equipment and those who seek to utilise it. In the
downstream oil and gas sector the volume of that legislation is vast. In
the case of MID where the legislation crosses the boundaries of
mechanical and electronic hardware, software, communications, and
reconciliation and reproduction of data, correctly understanding the
legislation, can be particularly vexing.
For this reason, the provision of “system solutions” is seen by many as
the most efficient method of procuring equipment that is in compliance
with their regulatory needs. Instead of having to understand the
individual technical requisites of each individual component of a system,
they only need to understand their “end game”. “I need an MID
compliant ethanol blending system” is far easier to define than
specifying the individual technical specifications of each component of
that system. For this to work though, the acquirer has to have
confidence that the supplier is suitably knowledgeable to accurately
provide them with the correct solution for their needs. The provision of a
“solution” circumnavigates the minefields associated with integrating
multiple components into compliant system arrangement.
Pre-configured biofuel blending systems such as the MSC-L do exactly
this. Piecing together accurately specified MID-compliant components
to provide an end-to-end solution. Combining the physical measuring
element with the electronic control device and associated reconciliation
options such as digital storage or printing of BoLs. Each of these
functions is required to operate under the concise guidelines laid out
under MID and associated legislation such as OIML R117 and
WELMEC.
3.2.5 The Fusion4 MSC-L

The heart of the system is the Fusion4 MSC-L.
Founded on Honeywell Enraf’s proprietary FlexConn™ architecture, the
MSC-L is part of the Fusion4 portfolio of loading automation and control
products family. A modular collection of mechanical, electronic, and
software sub-systems that can be integrated with each other to create
scalable solutions.
The FlexConn™ approach has enabled Honeywell to take the well-
proven functionality of its additive and blending portfolio and bring all
the options together as a single offering, which is configurable to suit
the end you need. Subsequently, the MSC-L incorporates 12 separate
devices, each providing individual functionality, and each one
configurable from one single device, and selectable through a license
key.

System Description - System Architecture
The MSC-Ls solution approach facilitates the ratification of both the MID
compliance steps mentioned previously, ‘bringing on the market’ and
‘putting into use’, by pre-configuring all components in accordance with
the MID requirements, and checking conformity through pre-installation
testing before delivery, as a complete system. This method not only
reduces the risk of non-compliance, but also speeds up the MID
qualification process for the system owner.
For the owner, ‘putting into use’ qualification not only includes the
accuracy and security of the physical operation of the blend process,
but also the reconciliation and reproduction of the measurement data.
This is applicable, whether the information is to be stored locally on the
device, distributed and stored on peripheral devices, or reconciled as a
Bill of Lading print-out. For the system to be fully compliant, any of these
functions must also operate in the MID criteria.
As such, the MSC-L offers a number of options to ensure compliance.
Firstly it implements a large transaction storage memory of 10,000
transactions, which allows a device to operate for over three months
without losing a single transaction, in standard operating conditions.
Alternatively, the MSC-L can have its transaction data securely
downloaded through the Fusion4 LAD (Local Access Device). This
allows the MSC-L to have its memory cleared in preparation for the
storage of another 10,000 transactions. The transactions subsequently
transferred to the LAD can then be manually transferred to any
peripheral system for storage or printing through the SD card.
Finally the preferred method is to link the MSC-L through Comms to the
Fusion4 Portal software package. When connected, all the transaction
data are scanned and collected by Portal from each device. The
transaction record is stored and can be printed directly or distributed
through OPC to third party systems for separate reconciliation.
The Fusion4 Portal BoL Print facility is fully MID compliant, and
therefore can facilitate a stand-alone blending infrastructure that meets
all the MID requirements. Along with the MID print functionality and the
OPC capability, built-in modules for the Portal software suite also
include remote configuration, remote event monitoring and alarm
handling and advanced LAD interaction tools.
3.3 System Architecture

The MSC-L is installed as per the Honeywell Enraf’s proprietary
FlexConn architecture. The MSC-L is a member of Fusion4 portfolio of
Loading Automation and Control products.
The MSC-L system is built up of interchangeable hardware modules.
These modules consist of uniform Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), each
of them representing a different and a unique functionality. See section
3.6.1 - PCB Details, for more information.

System Description - System Architecture
With the software implemented on these hardware parts, each PCB

makes up a FlexConn module. These modules communicate with each
other through the serial CAN-bus. See FIGURE 3-7, for more
information.
STRAINER
IDENTIFICATION
SYSTEM - RS-485 DEAD MAN
TAS/FUSION4
PORTAL
ESD
MSC-L DISPLAY RS-485/ETHERNET

(REDUNDANT)
REMOTE TOTALIZER
W&M SWITCH DI
MAINS DI
DI DO
SUPPLY EMR
DO
PO AO
s
N-bu
FUSION4 IR CONTROLLER
CA CAN-PSF-MSC CONTROL VALVE
IR CN9
LE1 LE2 LE3 LE4 LE5 LE6
OVERFILL
C11
CN3
U6
U8
CN8 CN7
C10
FM-HMI
C12
SW2
ON
U19
C1
U26
1 2 3 4
U28
U21
U18
JP8
JP7
JP10
JP9
U11 U10
6
5
SW1
4
3
2
ON
1
CN5 CN6
CN2 U9
+
CN4
MSC-L KEYBOARD CAN-HMI-MSC

DI
RS-485
CAN-ARM-MSC
CN1
L3
CN2
ON
S1
Fusion4 CN1
L3
CN2
ON
1 2
S1
3 4 5 6
DI
VAPOUR RECOVERY
K11
1 2 3 4 5 6
K11
MSC-L AO
U34
U33
U32
U22
U21
U20
U25
U24
U23
U26
U27
U28
U29
U30
U31
U43
U41
U42
K2
K5
K8
U34
U33
U32
U22
U21
U20
U25
U24
U23
U26
U27
U28
U29
U30
U31
U43
U41
U42
K2
K5
K8
K13
U39
K13
U39
FM-ARM FM-IN-OUT
K12
K12
D26
D26
LAD AI
TZ1
K1
K4
K9
TZ1
K14
K1
K4
K9
D30
K14
D30
U38
U35
U38
U35 U36
U36
U40
U40
K10
U49
K3
K6
K7
K10
K3
K6
K7
U49
PLC/DCS
LE1 LE2 LE3
DO LE1 LE2 LE3
DI
S-PI CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
D-PI
DI TANK LOW LEVEL/EMPTY
LOAD ARM
ADDITIVE FLOWMETER SOLENOID
INJECTION
VALVE 2*DO
DO
DO
RTD DO BAY LIGHT
MONOBLOCK AI
AI AI DI
2*DO DO
QPI
RS-485
DCV BAY BARRIER
BLEND FLOWMETER RS-485
STREAM ETHERNET
QPI 2*DO
FLOWMETER DCV DENSITY

SSC-A
PRESSURE BLOCK VALVE PUMP
TEMPERATURE
MAIN STREAM PT100
GROUNDING
RIT panel
F4 A1 0-00 04
FIGURE 3-7 The Fusion4 MSC-L architecture overview

System Description - FlexConn Modules
3.4 FlexConn Modules
3.4.1 General
One of the main characteristics of the FlexConn architecture is the
placement flexibility of the FlexConn modules. The backbone of this
concept is the serial Control Area Network (CAN) bus to which each
FlexConn module connects.
= terminating resistor
CAN-HMI-MSC CAN-IN-OUT-MSC CAN-ARM-MSC
CAN-L
CAN-H
FIGURE 3-8 FlexConn CAN bus concept
Each FlexConn module has one or more specific functions as follows:

 A sensor function - Measures or calculates a process value, or
obtains a process value from a connected external instrument.
 An application function - Controls the high-level operation of a
device. For example, stream control, flow control, or device control.
 An Input/Output (I/O) function - Controls digital output or reads digital
input from instruments around the loading framework.
 A communication function - Ensures the communication with a
communication interface unit or with a DCS, SCADA, tank inventory,
or another terminal automation system.
 A display function - Ensures communication with the module(s)
through an HMI.

System Description - Hardware Structure
3.5 Hardware Structure

For details on the hardware structure of the MSC-L, see the following
sections.
3.5.1 Housing
The housing of the MSC-L consists of an enclosure and a cosmetic
cover. The enclosure can be opened by removing the cosmetic cover
and loosening the 32 captured bolts. See FIGURE 3-8, for more
information.
NOTE: Turn the bolts two times on the cosmetic cover to

loosen the bolts and retain them in the lid.
FIGURE 3-9 The MSC-L enclosure

FIGURE 3-10 Housing of the MSC-L
Label Description
A Cosmetic cover
B Captive socket-head screws (32x), of which one can have an enlarged
head for sealing purposes (see figure left)
C Lid
D O-ring (standard available part)
E Glass
F Glass retainer rings (not visible in the front view of the MSC-L)
G Keyboard
H W&M switch

3.5.2 Interior
 The boards are mounted on the connector slots provided on the
backplanes.
 The CAN-HMI-MSC board is connected to the backplane using a
pair of Sub-D 15 cables. The MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD, CAN-PSF-
MSC, CAN-ARM-MSC board, and CAN-IN-OUT-MSC boards are
mounted on the connector slots provided on the backplane boards.
The following boards can be placed in the MSC-L.
 MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD
 ARM1-BACKPLANE-MSC
 ARM2-BACKPLANE-MSC
 EX-IO-HMI-MSC-L
 CAN-PSF-MSC
 CAN-HMI-MSC
 CAN-ARM-MSC
 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
FIGURE 3-11 PCB configurations, MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD, and the CAN-HMI-MSC

PCB name Modulea name Description

CAN-HMI-MSC FM-HMI Controls the display and the LAD interface.
CAN-ARM-MSC FM-ARM Provides the I/O functions required for
loading, blending, and additive injection
processes.
FM-PI Provides the firmware to control the pulse
input signals from the connected flow
meters.
CAN-IN-OUT-MSC FM-IN-OUT Provides I/O functions, which are
necessary to control the enhanced loading
and additive injection processes.
CAN-PSF-MSC - Delivers the internal power for the MSC-L.
MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARDS - Protects the internal electronics so that the
high current can be withdrawn.
A PCB with software installed
3.5.3 Grounding Concept

The CAN-ARM-MSC board and the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC board contain
two grounding points, which are mechanically connected with the metal
housing using the metal spacers, as displayed in FIGURE 3-12. In
addition, these boards connect the GND cables, which are connected to

the backplane through multiple pins of the DIN41612 F-type 48-pins

connector.
FIGURE 3-12 Mechanical grounding of CAN-ARM-MSC and CAN-IN-OUT-MSC boards
The CAN-HMI-MSC board, which is mounted on the lid of the MSC-L

enclosure, connects directly to the metal housing through the nine
mounting screws, as displayed in FIGURE 3-13.

FIGURE 3-13 Mechanical grounding of CAN-HMI-MSC board
WARNING! For ensuring intrinsic safety of the MSC-L, the

grounding connection of the lid to the main box and
the box to the local grounding system is very crucial.
If the grounding cable is required to be detached,
make sure you reinstall the device before any
operation is performed.
1. Open and install the fasteners from the device using a proper tool.
2. Make sure the construction is similar to the original assembly after
the grounding cable is detached and all the parts are repositioned in
a similar way when reinstalling. Take special care of the orientation of
the cable rings and toothed rings for the grounding cable.
3. Check the wire in the box and the lid. Make sure it is not damaged
before reinstalling.
4. Reinstall the original cable assembly. Do not replace it with random
parts.
NOTE: Complete replacement of the lid should only be done

in the Honeywell Enraf factory and not at the site.

The lid of the metal housing is connected to the MSC enclosure through
a separate GND signal transmitted through the GND cable, as
displayed in FIGURE 3-14.
FIGURE 3-14 Cable (GND cable) used for grounding the lid of the MSC enclosure
The Protected Earth (PE) ground connections for external cables are
connected to one of the nine M4 studs at the bottom, using the gland
entries, as displayed in FIGURE 3-15.
FIGURE 3-15 PE ground connections for external cables

System Description - PCB Layout
3.6 PCB Layout

Each FlexConn PCB consists of generic electronic parts and specific
electronics part.
The generic electronic parts can be found on any FlexConn modules.
The specific electronics part represent an application specific function.
On the generic electronics part, the following parts are available.
 Program memory - Contains the module specific software.
 Microprocessor/controller - Executes the module specific software
stored in the program memory.
 Non-volatile memory - Stores the commissioning parameters and the
diagnostics data when the power is turned off.
 Jumpers - Establish specific hardware settings.
 Health LED (blue) - Indicates the general health status of the
FlexConn module.
The following table specifies the health status and the flashing
pattern on the FlexConn module.
Health Status Flashing Pattern
Good
Uncertain
Bad
 Function LEDs - Indicates the module specific activities such as the

data being transmitted or received.
 Voltage monitors and temperature sensors - Used for internal diag-
nostics purposes.

3.6.1 PCB Details
3.6.1.1 CAN-HMI-MSC
3.6.1.1.1 Functions
The CAN-HMI-MSC board is used as the basic Human Machine

Interface (HMI) for the MSC-L. The board supports various
communication interfaces, Ex-i interfaces, and the display interface
control.
Following are the functions of the CAN-HMI-MSC board.
Function Description
Display interface control Displays a 8” WVGA color display in the MSC-L lid.
RTC with battery backup Is used for the date and time stamping of the transaction data.
External backup battery is connected to the RTC to retain the real-time
information, even when the main power of the MSC-L is turned off.
Transaction storage memory Is the external, non-volatile memory for storage of the transaction details.
Display image memory Stores video data and it is interfaced to the Field Programmable Gate
Array (FPGA).
Power failure memory management Is the non-volatile memory for storage of measured values as a protec-
tion against the power failure.
HHC IR interface Is the HHC IR interface for the Fusion4 IR Controller.
Ambient light sensor Is the device used for sensing the ambient light condition. It is sensitive
to visible light and has peak sensitivity at 570 nm.
RS-COM (2-wire or 4-wire) The RS-485 serial communication block is used by the FlexConn micro-
processor to communicate with external devices using an RS-485 com-
pliant physical layer. It can be configured for a 2-wire half-duplex or a 4-
wire full-duplex RS-485 communication.
ETHERNET The Ethernet communication block is used for allowing the FlexConn
microprocessor to communicate with the external devices using an
Ethernet-compliant physical layer.

Display interface control
RTC Transaction Display Power failure

battery
RTCbackup storage image memory
battery backup memory memory management
HHC Ambient
IR interface light sensor
COMMS COMMS ETHER

RS485 (4-wire RS485 (2-wire (Ethernet
isolated) 1 isolated) 2 isolated) 1
FlexConn generic
ext RAM
CN9
C11
CN3
U6
U8
CN8 CN7
C10
C12
SW2
ON
U19
C1
1 2 3 4
U26
U28
U21
U18
JP8
JP7
JP10
JP9
U11 U10
6
5
SW1
4
3
2
5 N6
ON
1
CN C
CN2 U9
+
CN4
FIGURE 3-16 CAN-HMI-MSC functions (top) and physical layout (bottom)

3.6.1.1.2 Component Locations
CN9
C11
CN3
U6
U8
CN8 CN7
C10
C12
SW2
ON
U19
C1
1 2 3 4
U26
U28
U21
U18
JP8
JP7
JP10
JP9
U11 U10
6
5
SW1
4
3
2
6
ON
5
CN
1
CN
CN2 U9
+
CN4
FIGURE 3-17 CAN-HMI-MSC component locations
Item
Description
reference
JP7, JP8 FlexConn jumpers for RS-485 CH5 finishing setting.
JP9 FlexConn jumpers for RS-485 CH3 finishing setting.
JP10 FlexConn jumpers for RS-485 CH4 finishing setting.
CN1 Programming connector for U11 (ARM controller).
CN2 LAD or keyboard connections to EX-IO-HMI-MSC-L.
CN3 Programming connector for U6 (FPGA).
CN4 microSD connector.
CN5, CN6 Connectors for interfacing with the ARM1-BACKPLANE-MSC.
CN7, CN8 Connectors for interfacing with the Varitronix display.
CN9, CN10 Connectors for interfacing with the Hitachi / PV.
LE1 Health of the board.
LE2 Configurable.
LE3 Configurable.
LE4 Ethernet auto negotiation.
LE5 Ethernet speed indicator.
LE6 FPGA Health.
U8,U9,U10 SDRAM.
U6 FPGA.
U11 ARM controller.
U19 Flash memory.
U1 A holder for IR receiver.
V2 Ambient light sensor.

 SW1 - FlexConn jumper function switches
Reference Jumper name Function when set to ON

SW1-1 FlexConn JP1 W&M entities protection
SW1-2 FlexConn JP2 Password is read protected
SW1-3 FlexConn JP3 Nothing used
SW1-4 FlexConn JP4 Spare
SW1-6 FlexConn JP6 CAN bus termination
 SW2 - RS485 CH5 mode selection
Reference Setting Function Description

SW2-1 ON 2-wire 2-wire RS-485 communication
interface
SW2-2 ON
SW2-3 OFF
SW2-4 OFF
SW2-1 OFF 4-wire 4-wire RS-485 communication

interface
SW2-2 OFF
SW2-3 ON
SW2-4 ON
 Jumper for RS-485 communication terminating setting
Jumper Position Description

JP7, JP8, JP9 and (1-2) Closed RS-485 communication with 120 is
JP10 terminated.
JP7, JP8, JP9 and (2-3) Closed RS-485 communication is NOT termi-
JP10 nated.
NOTE: When position (1-2) of jumper JP7 is closed, it will

connect a resistance of 120  between terminals 3 &
4 of COM PORT 5
When position (1-2) of jumper JP8 is closed, it will

connect a resistance of 120  between terminals 1 &
2 of COM PORT 5

3.6.1.2 CAN-ARM-MSC
3.6.1.2.1 Functions
The function of the CAN-ARM-MSC board is to provide the minimum I/O

functions required for loading and for enhanced additive injection
processes.
The CAN-ARM-MSC board supports both W&M and non-W&M additive
injection and blending processes.
Following are the functions of the CAN-ARM-MSC board.
12 Pulse Input DC (Quad PI) circuit Converts pulse signals from external flow measuring devices into
numeric data that can be read by a FlexConn microprocessor.
7 Analog Input (AI 4-20 mA Active/Passive) Converts analog signals received from a single external 4-20 mA trans-
circuits mitter into a signal that can be read by the FlexConn microprocessor.
2 Pulse Output DC (PO DC) circuits Converts logic signals from the FlexConn microprocessor into isolated
switched DC signals.
12 Digital Output Solid State Relay AC (DO- Converts logic signals from the FlexConn microprocessor into isolated,
SSR AC) circuits high voltage, switched AC signals.
Analog Output (AO 4-20 mA Passive) cir- Converts signals from the FlexConn microprocessor into scaled 4-20 mA
cuit analog signals.
2 COMMS circuits (2-wire) The RS-485 serial communication block, which can be configured as a
2-wire circuit, allows the MSC-L to communicate with external devices
through an RS-485 compliant connection.
An ETHER circuit The Ethernet communication block allows the FlexConn microprocessor
to communicate with external devices through an Ethernet physical com-
pliant layer.
3 Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD Converts the temperature data from a remotely connected PT100 RTD
3-wire or 4-wire) circuits into a resistance value that can be read by the FlexConn microcontroller
and then converted back into a temperature value.

AI AO
Quad PI
(2-wire (2-wire
12 act/pass) passive)
7 1
RTD
DO-SSR PO 3-wire or
(AC) (DC) 4-wire
12 2 3
COMMS Ethernet
(2-wire isolated
isolated) 2 1
FlexConn generic
ext RAM
CN1 CN2
L35 U66
U47
U13 U12
U16
U14
U22
U17
U25
U24
U72 U54 U51

U28
U8
U6
U53
U67
G1
U9
U30 U68
U52
T3
U48 U29
K10
K11
K12
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
U26
U27
U4
G2
X5
U55 U1
U46
U65
U9
K4 U63
U57
U64
K3
U7
K2 U71
A1 A18
U69
K1
U56 U5
U10
U50
V1 V18
U11
19 1
ON
20 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
FIGURE 3-18 CAN-ARM-MSC functions (top) and physical layout (bottom)

CN1 CN2
L35 U66
U47
U13 U12
U16
U14
U22
U17
U25
U24
U72 U54 U51
U28
U8
U6
U53
U67
G1
U9
U30 U68
U52
T3
U48 U29
K10
K11
K12
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
U26
U27
U4
G2
X5
U55 U1
U46
U65
U9
K4 U63
U57
U64
K3
U7
K2 U71
A1 A18
U69
K1
U56 U5
U10
U50
V1 V18
U11
19 1
ON
20 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
FIGURE 3-19 CAN-ARM-MSC component locations
Item
Description
reference
CN1, CN2 Connectors for interfacing with the ARM1-BACKPLANE-MSC or
ARM2-BACKPLANE-MSC.
CN3 Programming connector for U56 (ARM controller).
CN4 Programming connector for U46 (PI processor -Cortex M0).
JP7 2-wire RS-485 communication interface
JP8 2-wire RS-485 communication interface

 SW1 - FlexConn jumper function switches

SW1-1 FlexConn JP1 W&M entities protection
SW1-2 FlexConn JP2 Password is read protected
SW1-3 FlexConn JP3 Nothing is used
SW1-6 FlexConn JP6 CAN bus termination
 JP7 and JP8 - Jumper for RS communication termination setting
Position Description
JP7 (1-2) Closed RS-485 communication terminated with 120 for COM Port 1 / 6
JP7 (2-3) Closed RS-485 communication NOT terminated for COM Port 1 / 6
JP8 (1-2) Closed RS-485 communication terminated with 120 for COM Port 2/ 7
JP8 (2-3) Closed RS-485 communication NOT terminated or COM Port 2/ 7
3.6.1.3 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
3.6.1.3.1 Functions
The function of the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC board is to provide I/O functions,

which are necessary to control the enhanced loading and additive
injection processes.
Following are the functions of the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC board.
3 Digital Input AC (DI-AC) circuits Converts high voltage switched AC signals into an isolated logic signal
that can be read by the FlexConn generic microprocessor.
15 Digital Input DC (DI-DC) circuits Converts switched DC signals into an isolated logic signal that can be
read by the FlexConn microcontroller.
Analog Output (AO) circuit Converts signals from the FlexConn microcontroller into scaled 4-20 mA
analog signals.
4 Digital Output Solid State Relay AC (DO- Converts logic signals from the FlexConn generic microcontroller into
SSR AC) circuits isolated, high voltage switched AC signals.
10 Digital output Electro Mechanical Relay Converts logic signals from the FlexConn generic microcontroller to
AC/DC (DO-EMR) circuits switched high power AC or DC signals.

DI AC DI DC
3 15
AO DO EMR DO-SSR
(2-wire (AC+DC) (AC)
passive) 1 10 4
Watchdog
1
FlexConn generic
ext RAM
CN1 CN2
S1
ON
L3
1 2 3 4 5 6
K11
U34
U33
U32
U22
U21
U20
U25
U24
U23
U26
U27
U28
U29
U30
U31
U43
U41
U42
K2
K5
K8
K13
U39
K12
D26
TZ1
K1
K4
K9
K14
D30
U38
U35
U36
U40
K10
U49
K3
K6
K7
LE1 LE2 LE3
FIGURE 3-20 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC functions (top) and physical layout (bottom)

CN1 CN2
S1
ON
L3
1 2 3 4 5 6
K11
U34
U33
U32
U22
U21
U20
U25
U24
U23
U26
U27
U28
U29
U30
U31
U43
U41
U42
K2
K5
K8
K13
U39
K12
D26
TZ1
K1
K4
K9
K14
D30
U38
U35
U36
U40
K10
U49
K3
K6
K7
LE1 LE2 LE3
FIGURE 3-21 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC component locations
Item
Description
reference
JP7 to JP16 Jumper for EMR contacts setting.
CN1, CN2 Connectors for interfacing with the ARM1-BACKPLANE-MSC or the
ARM2-BACKPLANE-MSC.
LE1 Health of the board.
LE2 Configurable.
LE3 Configurable.
U44 Cortex M4 CPU.
K1-K10 Electro Mechanical Relay.
K11-K14 Solid State Relay.

 S1 - FlexConn jumper function switches

S1-1 FlexConn JP1 W&M entities protection.
S1-2 FlexConn JP2 Password is read protected.
S1-3 FlexConn JP3 Nothing is used.
S1-4 FlexConn JP4 Spare.
S1-5 FlexConn JP5 Spare.
S1-6 FlexConn JP6 CAN bus termination.
 JP7 to JP16 - Jumper for Electro Mechanical Relay contacts setting
Position Contacts Description

2&3 NO Relay contacts normally open.
1&2 NC Relay contacts normally closed.
3.6.2 CAN-PSF-MSC
3.6.2.1 Functions
The function of the CAN-PSF-MSC is to convert single-phase AC main

voltage into multiple DC voltages. This powers the other modules in the
MSC-L and also provides DC power to external devices such as flow
meters, temperature sensors, and so on.
On the system level two separate Power Supply Units (PSUs) operate
the sharing current. The two PSUs make the system powering
redundant. One PSU is able to power the complete system at maximum
temperature. See FIGURE 3-22 for the functions of the MSC-L.
FIGURE 3-22 CAN-PSF-MSC functions

3.6.2.2 Power Board Connection
The CAN-PSF-MSC is mounted inside the MSC-L Ex-d box through a

DIN41612 F-type 48 pins connector. It is mounted on the ARM-x-
BACKPLANE-MSC and connected to AC input and DC outputs.
The heat generating components are conducted to the enclosure. A
mechanical cooling method is implemented together with the
mechanical design of the enclosure. See FIGURE 3-23 for information
regarding the mechanical specification of CAN-PSF-MSC.
FIGURE 3-23 Mechanical specification drawings
3.6.2.3 Hardware Specifications
The following table specifies the hardware I/O specifications of the AC

port.
Item Conditions Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
Input voltage 100 - 240 VAC
Input frequency 50 - 60 Hz
Inrush current 230 VAC - 33 37.3 A
Power Factor 115 VAC - 95 - %
(at the maximum 230 VAC 90
current)
Power - - - 120 W
consumption


Efficiency - 80 - - %
Insulation voltage AC Input to all 2500 V - - VAC
DC outputs
Insulation voltage AC Input to PE 2500 V - - VAC
Leakage current AC Input to PE - - 3.5 mA
The following table specifies the hardware I/O specifications of the DC

output 1, DC output 2, and DC output 3.
DC Output Item Conditions Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
Output 1 DC Voltage - 4.75 5.0 5.25 VDC
DC Current 5.0 V 10.0 - - A
DC OVP - 6.25 - 7.0 VDC
Over Current Limit - 12 - 15 A
DC OVP - 14.0 - 15.5 VDC
Over Current Limit - 2.2 - 3.0 A
DC OVP - 28 - 31.0 VDC
Over Current Limit - 1.1 - 1.5 A
The following table specifies the hardware I/O specifications of the

common DC output.
S/C protection -
DC outputs (all) Continuous - constant current
(self-recovering)
Load Regulation - - 1% -
DC outputs (all)
Line Regulation - - 1% -
DC outputs (all)
Ripple and Noise - - 100 mV VP-P
DC Outputs (all)
Ripple and Noise - - 240 mV VP-P
DC Outputs (all)
Isolation voltage Between DC 500 - - VDC
DC Outputs (all) outputs
The CAN-PSF-MSC board contains a 48 pin (DIN41612 F-type) press-

fit connector. The signals are grouped as high voltage AC signals and
low voltage DC signals.

3.6.2.4 Fuse Boards
3.6.2.4.1 MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD
The MSC-SHORTCUT-Board is directly interfaced to the backplane of

the MSC-L through the 48 pin connector. The MSC-L contains the
Digital Output Solid State Relay AC (DO SSR AC) interface. The SSRs
are used for switching AC signals connected to the load. Every DO SSR
AC requires an optional fuse to protect the internal electronics so that
the high current can be withdrawn. Because the fuse is optional, 0 ohm
resistor can alternatively be connected in parallel to each fuse.
FIGURE 3-24 MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD
3.6.3 Device Electrical Features

Following are the device electrical features of the MSC-L.
1. Internal power supply.
2. Seven microprocessor controlled modules.
3. Each I/O is galvanic isolated from the internal electronics for safety
performance.
4. Backplanes (ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC and ARM-2 BACKPLANE-
MSC) for external wiring.
5. Colored connectors on the backplane to distinguish different kinds of
signals.
3.6.4 System
 Full-color (16 bits) WVGA, 8” diagonal display.
 Multi-language support for main screens which are as follows:
• English US
• English UK
• French

System Description - Available Input/Output Functions of the MSC-L
• German
• Dutch
• Spanish
• Chinese
• Japanese
• Polish
• Portuguese
• Italian
• Thai
• One additional configurable user language
 Menu driven service interface:
• LAD intrinsic safe interface.
• IR interface, which is compatible with the Fusion4 IR Controller.
• Real-time clock for time stamping.
• Seven communication ports and three ethernet ports for inter-
facing with the safe area tools and systems.
3.6.5 Environment
Parameter MSC LAD
Operating temperature -40 °C ... +65 °C (-40 ºF ... +149 ºF) -20 °C ... +65 °C (-4 ºF ... +149 ºF)
Electronics designed -40 °C ... +85 °C (-40 ºF ... +185 ºF) -40 °C ... +85 °C (-40 ºF ... +185 ºF)
and and
RoHS1 RoHS1
Storage temperature -40 °C ... +85 °C (-40 ºF ... +185 ºF) -40 °C ... +85 °C (-40 ºF ... +185 ºF)
Ingress protection IP66 / NEMA 4X IP54 / NEMA 3R
SD-card compartment behind lid - IP20
1 Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
3.7 Available Input/Output Functions of the MSC-L

The following table lists the different types of interfaces supported by
the boards.
Refer to
I/O block CAN-ARM-MSC CAN-IN-OUT-MSC CAN-HMI-MSC
section
Single Pulse Input / DI DC Input 12 15 0 3.8.2 and
3.8.3
Dual Pulse Input (Quad PI) 6 0 0 3.8.4
Analog Input (4-20mA Active/Passive) 7 0 0 3.8.5
Resistance Temperature Detector- 3 0 0 3.8.6
RTD Temperature Input (3-wire or 4-
wire)

System Description - Available Input/Output Functions of the MSC-L
Refer to
I/O block CAN-ARM-MSC CAN-IN-OUT-MSC CAN-HMI-MSC
section
Digital Input AC 0 3 0 3.8.7
Pulse Output DC 2 0 0 3.9.2
Analog Output (4-20 mA Passive) 1 1 0 3.9.3
Digital Output Electromechanical 0 10 0 3.9.4
Relay AC or DC
Digital Output AC (Solid state relay) 12 4 0 3.9.5
RS-485 Communication (2-wire) 2 0 2 3.10.2
RS-485 Communication (4-wire) 0 0 1 3.10.2
Ethernet Communication 1 0 1 3.10.3
For the configuration of these I/O functions, see chapter 5 "Operation".

System Description - Input Functions
3.8 Input Functions
3.8.1 General
The following table lists the electronic input functions supported by the
the MSC-L.
I/O block name
Input function
CAN-ARM-MSC CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
Single Pulse Input/DI DC Input PI DI DC
Dual Pulse Input QPI -
Analog Input (4-20 mA Active/Pas- AI -

sive)
Resistance Temperature Detector- RTD -

RTD Temperature Input (3-wire or
4-wire)
Digital Input (AC) - DI AC
3.8.2 Digital Input DC (DI DC)
3.8.2.1 Functional Description
The function of the Digital Input DC (DI DC) is to convert the switched
DC into a signal that can be used by the controller to ensure specific
functionality required.
Two types of contacts are available which are as follows:
1. External DC voltage switching
2. Volt free switching

FIGURE 3-25 illustrates the simplified block diagram of the DI DC

connections.
External equipment CAN-ARM-MSC or

CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
+5V
CNx
R
DCx_hi
COMMON
Voltage free contact

0V
or

CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
+5V
CNx
R
DCx_hi
COMMON
0V
NPN open collector-emitter
(Load computer, PLC, TAS, or external
switching voltage)
FIGURE 3-25 DI DC connections

3.8.2.2 Characteristics
Item Minimum Typical Maximum Unit

Isolation voltage - - 3500 VAC
Switching current (ISW) - - 10 mA
Input switching frequency - - 10 kHz

Input on time (TON) 50 - - µs
Input off time (TOFF) 50 - - µs
External Device presence detec- 0-5, 18-30 V
tion Voltage Level
External Device absence detec- Floating Input (Open Contact), 9-14 V
tion Voltage Level
3.8.3 Single Pulse Input
The function of the Single Pulse Input is to accept pulse signals from a
product stream single pulse flowmeter or an additive stream single
pulse flowmeter.

FIGURE 3-26 illustrates the simplified block diagram of the Single Pulse
Input connections.
External equipment CAN-ARM-MSC
+5V
CN135
R
PULSE A 3
COMMON 2
0V
NPN open collector-emitter
(Load computer, PLC, or TAS)
or
+5V
CN135
R
Voltage free contact

0V
FIGURE 3-26 Single Pulse Input connections
NOTE: The connector CN135 used in the illustration refers

to the connector on the backplane that connects to
QPI1. This is only an example.



tion Voltage Level
tion Voltage Level
3.8.4 Dual-Pulse Input (Quad PI)
The Dual-Pulse Input (Quad PI) can accept signals from one dual pulse
flow meter for applications requiring a high level of pulse integrity
offered by a dual-pulse flow meter. This is also referred to as a quad
(quadrature) flow meter or one single-pulse flow meter. See section
3.8.3 - Single Pulse Input.
NOTE: The dual-pulse input cannot be used for accepting

signals from two separate single-pulse flow meters.
FIGURE 3-27 illustrates the simplified block diagram of the Dual-Pulse
Input connections.

+12Vdc_ext +5V
CN135
METER POWER 1
R R
PULSE A 3
PULSE B 6
F
COMMON 5
Flowmeter with NPN open

0V
collector outputs
for example, Tuthill FPP – TS Series

or Monoblock 10-31558
Pulse B is omitted for single pulse
flowmeters
or
+12Vdc_ext +5V
CN135
1
R R
PULSE A 3
COMMON 2
PULSE B 6
COMMON 5
0V
Namur Flow meter connected
through external barrier with NPN
open collector-emitter outputs
for example, Stahl 9170 series
FIGURE 3-27 Dual-Pulse Input connections
NOTE: The connector CN135 used in the illustration refers

to the connector on the backplane that connects to
QPI1. It is only an example.



tion Voltage Level
tion Voltage Level
3.8.5 Analog Input (AI)
The Analog Input (AI) supports 2-wire 4-20 mA, and can be configured
by a switch to operate in active mode or passive mode. See FIGURE 3-
28.
In the active mode, the external transmitter is directly powered from the
24 V, which is generated by the MSC-L power supply.

In the passive mode, the transmitter is powered externally.
CN128
24V
AI+ 1
4-20mA T
-
AI- 3 Analog Signal
Temperature or
pressure transmitter
250
24V Common
CN128 24V
24VDC
AI+ 3
Analog Signal
-
External DC
power supply
4-20mA T
250
+
24V Common
AI- 2
Temperature or
pressure transmitter
FIGURE 3-28 Analog Input connections - Active mode (top) and Passive mode (bottom)
All AI inputs are MID compliant for measuring of product temperature,

product pressure & product density or any other type of analog 4-20 mA
signal measurement.
The AI interface is not intrinsically safe, and external devices connected
to the AI must conform to Ex d safety standards when used in a
hazardous area.

NOTE: AI can only be used for non MID applications when

using FM-ARM board of hardware version 1. The
hardware version can be identified from the device
information page described in section chapter 5.23
"Info (Device Information)"

Isolation - - 500 VAC
VLoop 23.0 24.0 42.5 VDC
VLoop(ISO) 24 VDC
ILoop(ISO) 20 mA
Nominal loop current range 4 - 20 mA
Loop current measurement 0 - 22.5 mA

range
Maximum loop current - - 27.5 mA
RS(TCR) - - 0.01 %/°C
Accuracy 24 - - uA
(Without external
transmitter)
3.8.6 Resistance Temperature Detector
The Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) input allows the controller

to read the temperature of a remotely connected PT100 resistance
temperature detector. FIGURE 3-29 illustrates the RTD connections.
The RTD input supports 3-wire connections and 4-wire connections.

CN141
RTD S- 1
RTD COM 2
4-Wire
ADC
RTD RTD POS 3
RTD S+ 4
PT100 RTD element

IEC 60751(0.385/ C)
or
CN141
RTD S- 1
RTD COM 2
3-Wire
ADC
RTD RTD POS 3
PT100 RTD element

IEC 60751(0.385/ C)
FIGURE 3-29 RTD connections

The following RTD type is accepted.

RTD type Connection Alpha co-efficient
PT100 3-wire or 4-wire IEC 60751
(Kelvin connection) (0.385 /°C / 0.214 /°F)
DIN 43760 1/3 DIN
DIN 43760 1/5 DIN
DIN 43760 1/10 DIN
The selection of 3-wire or 4-wire RTD type is performed in the software,

but the RTD must be connected to the circuit as displayed in FIGURE 3-
29.

Isolation 2 seconds - 500 - VAC
max
Range -200 - -50.01 °C
Error - ±0.5 °C
Temperature
Range (MID) -50 - +150 °C
measurement
range and Error Error (MID) 0 ±0.3 °C
Range +150.01 - +250 °C
Error 0 ±0.5 °C
RTD current source - 50 500 1500 µA
RTD cable length - - - 150 m
Conversion time - - - 1.0 s
3.8.7 Digital Input AC (DI AC)
The function of the Digital Input AC (DI AC) is to convert high-voltage

switched AC into a signal that can be used by the controller to ensure
the specific functionality required.
FIGURE 3-30 illustrates the simplified block diagram of the DI AC
connections.

External equipment CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
CN116 or CN117
Fuse
2.3 or 4 [ACx_L (LIVE)]
L 1A(T)
AC
N 1[AC_NEUTRAL]
AC Neutral common to all

DI AC on each board
FIGURE 3-30 DI AC connections

Isolation voltage 2500 VAC
Input voltage - - 265 VAC
Input frequency 47 - 63 Hz
Input impedance - 44 - k
High input (must turn on) 85 - - VAC

voltage
Low input (must turn off) - - 20 VAC

voltage
Maximum input switching - - 4 Hz

frequency
AC on time (TON) 50 - - ms
AC off time (TOFF) 200 - - ms

System Description - Output Functions
3.9 Output Functions
3.9.1 General
The following table describes the electronic output functions the MSC-L
supports.
I/O block name
Output function
CAN-ARM-MSC CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
Pulse Output DC PO -
Analog Output (4-20 mA Passive) AO AO
Digital Output Electromechanical - DO-EMR AC or DC

Relay AC or DC
Digital Output AC (Solid State DO-SSR DO-SSR

Relay)
3.9.2 Pulse Output (PO DC)
There are two pulse output channels available in MSC-L i.e. PO1 &
PO2.
For meter calibration, the pulses coming from Flow Meter are also
required to drive the pulse output. The scheme using multiplexer for
selection of inputs. Any one pulse from dual pulse input may be
selected to drive the pulse output.
PO1 is real time pulse output, used to connect real time PO for channel
A & B of quadrature (dual) pulse input. A single pulse input out of 12
pulse inputs is selected by using multiplexer 16 to 1 multiplexer and
select lines.
PO2 is a factored pulse output, can be used either as a factored pulse
output or can be used to connect real time PO for channel B of
quadrature (dual) pulse input.
FIGURE 3-31 illustrates the simplified block diagram of the external PO
connections.

CAN-ARM-MSC External equipment
CN144
1 or 3 (Pox_HI)
+
External
DC PSU
-
2 or 4 (Pox_LO)
LOAD
NPN
or
CN144
1 or 3 (Pox_HI)
LOAD
+
External
DC PSU
-
2 or 4 (Pox_LO)
NPN
FIGURE 3-31 PO connections


Output load voltage - - 30 VDC
Output load current (Sink) - - 10 mA
Output load current (Source) - - 10 mA
FMAX Switching frequency - - 10 kHz
TON and TOFF pulse width 15 - - µs
Output Saturation voltage - - 1 VDC

(over entire temp range)
3.9.3 Analog Output
The Analog Output (AO) supports 2-wire passive 4-20 mA. The AO
does NOT provide a power supply to power the loop.
FIGURE 3-32 illustrates the simplified block diagram of the AO
connection to the external devices.
CAN-ARM-MSC or External equipment

CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
CNx
24VDC
AO+
1, 3 or 5 (AO_ax) -
External DC
power supply T 4-20mA
+
AO-
2, 4 or 6 (AO_bx)
NPN
FIGURE 3-32 AO connections


VLOOP 23.0 24.0 36.0 VDC
Nominal loop current range 4 - 20 mA
Loop current control range 3 - 21 mA
Accuracy (without external - - ±1.0 %
receiver)
Update time - - 250 ms
Load resistance 0 - 750 
3.9.4 Digital Output Electromechanical Relay (AC or DC)
The Digital Output Electromechanical Relay (DO EMR AC or DC) allows

the controller to switch DC signals or AC signals to control alarms and
other loads.
The two output terminals are “volt-free” contacts and require an external
power supply to drive a load.
The relay output contacts are effectively Single Pole Single Throw
(SPST) and are configurable through a jumper1 to be either Normally
Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC).
See FIGURE 3-33 illustrates the simplified block diagram of the DO
EMR connections.
1. For physical location(s),

see CHAPTER 4 - Installation.

CAN-IN-OUT-MSC External equipment
JPx
N/O N/C CNx
1,3,5,7 [EMRx_no]
External
2,4,6,8 [EMR_common]
- DC PSU
LOAD
SPST
Configurable as N/O or N/C
via jumper
CAN-IN-OUT-MSC External equipment
JPx
N/O N/C CNx
1,3,5,7 [EMRx_no]
3A(T) L
AC
N
2,4,6,8 [EMR_common]
LOAD
SPST
Configurable as N/O or N/C
via jumper
FIGURE 3-33 DO EMR connections


Load voltage to be switched - - 265 VAC
Switching current - - 1 A
Steady state current - - 1 A
Output contact type - SPST - -
Operate time - - 5 ms
Release time - - 10 ms
Setting time - - 50 ms
Control voltage 2.5 - - VDC

(high level)
Control voltage - - 0.4 VDC

(low level)
Control current - - 1 mA
(high level)
TABLE 3-1 Digital Output Electromechanical Relay (AC)

Load Voltage to be - - 30 VDC
switched
Switching current - - 1 A
Steady state current - - 1 A
Output contact type - SPST - -
Operate time - - 5 ms
Release time - - 10 ms
Setting time - - 50 ms
Control voltage 2.5 - - VDC

(high level)
Control voltage - - 0.4 VDC

(low level)
(high level)
TABLE 3-2 Digital Output Electromechanical Relay (DC)

3.9.5 Digital Output Solid State Relay AC
The Digital Output Solid State Relay AC (DO-SSR AC) allows the
controller to switch high-voltage AC signals to control solenoids, digital
control valves, alarms, and other loads.
The two output terminals behave as a “volt-free” contact and require an
external AC power supply to drive a load.
FIGURE 3-34 illustrates a simplified block diagram of the DO-SSR AC
self powered connections and FIGURE 3-35 illustrates a simplified
block diagram of the DO-SSR AC externally powered connections.

MSC-FUSE-BOARD External equipment

CNx
L N
AC Mains supply
CNx
N
Fuse
L
1.5A(T)
CAN-ARM-MSC or
CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
CNx
SSrx_feed_ac
SSrx_sw_ac
LOAD
Solid State Relay

Typical load is an
additive solenoid or blend DVC
FIGURE 3-34 Solid State Relay “Self-powered” connections

CAN-ARM-MSC or External equipment

CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
CNx
Fuse
SSRx_feed_ac
1.5A(T) L
AC
N
SSRx_sw_ac
LOAD
Solid State Relay
FIGURE 3-35 Solid State Relay “Externally powered” connections

Isolation voltage - - 3700 VAC rms
Operating voltage 90 - 265 VAC
Operating frequency 47 - 63 Hz
Output steady state load 1 - 250 mA

current
Output surge load current - - 3 A
Off state output leakage - - 0.1 mA

current
Off state output blocking - - 600 V

voltage
Switching time - - 10 ms
Control voltage must turn 2 - - VDC

on
Control voltage must turn - - 0.4 VDC

off

System Description - Communication Functions
3.10 Communication Functions
3.10.1 General
The following table describes the electronic communication functions
the MSC-L supports.
I/O block name
Communication function
CAN-ARM-MSC CAN-HMI-MSC
RS-485 Communication RS-485 2-wire RS-485 2-wire
RS-485 Communication RS-485 4-wire
Ethernet Communication ETHERNET ETHERNET
3.10.2 RS-485 Communication (2-wire or 4-wire)
The Communication block, which consists of wires and switches allows

the MSC-L to communicate through an RS-485 connection with external
devices including a TAS system, Fusion4 Portal, or other remote
interfaces.
For the CAN-HMI-MSC, CH5 can be configured for either a 2-wire half-
duplex or a 4-wire full-duplex.

FIGURE 3-36 illustrates the RS Communication 2-wire connections and

FIGURE 3-37 illustrates the RS Communication 4-wire connections.

CAN-HMI-MSC
CNx
RXD RXD
RS485_A_CHx 1, 4
RS485_B_CHx 2, 5
TXD TXD
RS485_Common_CHx 3, 6
0V
RS-485
TRANSCEIVER
0V
0V connection is omitted for some

RS-485 applications
FIGURE 3-36 RS Communication 2-wire connections
CAN-HMI-MSC External equipment
CN151
RS485_A_CH5 1
RXD TXD
RS485_B_CH5 2
RS485_Y_CH5 4 RXD
TXD
RS485_Z_CH5 3
RS485_Common_CH5 5
0V
RS-485
0V TRANSCEIVER
0V connection is omitted for some

RS-485 applications
FIGURE 3-37 RS Communication 4-wire connections (CAN-HMI-MSC only)


RT Terminator resistor 118 120 122 
Driver output short circuit - - 200 mA

current
Data transmission rate - - 500 kbps
3.10.2.3 Cable Specifications

Cable length - - 1000 m
Cable characteristic - 120 - 

impedance
Cable DC loop resistance - - 100 
Cable capacitance - - 55.77 pF/m
3.10.3 Ethernet Communication
The function of the Ethernet Communication (ETHERNET) block is to

allow the FlexConn microprocessor to communicate through an
Ethernet compliant physical layer with external devices including a TAS
system, Fusion4 Portal, or other remote interfaces.

FIGURE 3-38 illustrates the Ethernet connections using the external

cables or Ethernet connections to the external devices.

CAN-HMI-MSC
CNx
Orange/white (RJ45 pin 1) 1 [ARM/HMI_ETHER_TXP]
ETHERNET
Orange (RJ45 pin 2) 2 [ARM/HMI_ETHER_TXN] PHY
Green/white (RJ45 pin 3) 3 [ARM/HMI_ETHER_RXP]
Green (RJ45 pin 6) 4 [ARM/HMI_ETHER_RXN]
RJ-45 CONNECTOR
FIGURE 3-38 Ethernet complaint physical layer

Data transmission rate 10 - 100 mbps
3.10.3.3 Cable Specifications

Cable length - - 100 m
Cable characteristic 85 100 115 

impedance
Cable DC loop resistance - ≤ 0.188 - m
Cable capacitance - 52 - pF/m

System Description - Security Guidelines
3.11 Security Guidelines

This section provides security guidelines for Fusion4 MSC-L.
3.11.1 Device Security Recommendations

Following are the recommendations to prevent malicious users from
accessing the device and its data
 Change the default password on first use and ensure that the user
passwords are changed periodically and maintained securely
 Restrict unauthorize persons near the loading bay area
 Use earth connection Interlock so that loading cannot be initiated
without driver physically present
3.11.2 Network and Security Control Recommendations

The MSC-L provides TCP/IP communication with TAS/Fusion 4 Portal
over Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 ports to support remote loading and
sharing of information. The device support only server mode for TCP/IP
communication and only single socket on either Ethernet ports.
Following are recommendations to prevent malicious users from
accessing the device and its data over the communications network
 Deploy MSC-L and Remote Host application under secured and
physically restricted network within local network
 Restrict physical access to the device and other devices in the same
network
 Physically secure the connection between the device and host
 Use a firewall for the business network to process control/monitor
network interface to restrict access from the business network to
process control network.
 Close all unused TCP and UDP communication ports on system
hosting host application
 Set the minimum required level of privilege for all accounts and
enforce a password policy on all systems.
 Restrict usage of unauthorized removable media
 Prevent the use of unauthorized laptops on the process control
network
 Ensure that your virus protection and Operating system security hot
fixes are up to date on all systems.
 Do not connect MSC-L to the public network. Any external
connections shall be secured by setting up VPN.

3.11.3 How to report a security vulnerability

For the purpose of submission, a security vulnerability is defined as a
software defect or weakness that can be exploited to reduce the
operational or security capabilities of the software. Honeywell
investigates all reports of security vulnerabilities affecting Honeywell
products and services.
To report a potential security vulnerability against any Honeywell
product, please follow the instructions at:
https://honeywell.com/pages/vulnerabilityreporting.aspx
Submit the requested information to Honeywell using one of the
following methods:
 Send an email to security@honeywell.com or
 Contact your local Honeywell Technical Assistance Center (TAC) or
support center listed in the Contacts section of this document.


Installation - Mounting and Dimensions
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION
4.1 Mounting and Dimensions

For personal safety and for LVD compliance, make sure that the
structure on which the housing is mounted and the mounting parts
support at least 200 kgs, to provide permanent support to the device.
Following are the mechanical features of the MSC-L.
1. An enclosure box with a hinged lid, which allows M10*1.5 - g6 fixing
bolts.
The weight of the MSC-L is 53.8 kgs. The width is 525 mm (20.67
inches), depth is 265 mm (10.43 inches), and the height is 344 mm
(13.54 inches).
Shaft: 7.50 h13 mm [0.295 h 0.512 inches]

Thread: M10x1.5 g6
Type: ISO 4762
Material: A2 70
Torque: 33 Nm [22.12 lb-ft - 25.077 lb-ft]
2. An Ex flame path by means of an internal flange.

3. 31 bolts and one sealing bolt, as illustrated in the following figure.
4. An O-ring positioned inside the lid, as illustrated in the following

figure.
5. Wall mounting facilities - There are four wall mounting bolts, as illus-
trated in the following figure. The size of the bolts is M10*1.5 - g6.

6. Base mounting facilities - The base mounting holes are located on

the right side and the left side of the MSC-L, as illustrated in the
following figure.
NOTE: The base mounting bolt thread size is M10.

7. Lifting eyes facility for easy installation, as illustrated in the following

figure. (This facility is not allowed for permanent mounting as it is used
only for installation purpose).
FIGURE 4-1 Lifting eyes facility for easy installation
NOTE: The ring bolt is rotatable, therefore the load direction

is adjustable and unintended tightening or loosening
is negated. The higher load rating ring bolts allows
for smaller connection threads.
The lifting eye thread size is M10.

8. Three external grounding facilities are available to ground the MSC-L
enclosure with an external ground reference/point. See , for more
information.
9. Internal grounding is available for each gland entry to ground the
internal electronics and ground/earth signal of the cables. See for
more information.
10. Metric or the NPT cable entry layout. See section 4.2 - Gland Entries,
for more information.

11. Mounting facilities for the type plates and an optional tag plate, as
illustrated in the following figure.
12. Optional breather/drain, as illustrated in the following figure.

13. Intrinsically safe interface connector for LAD, as illustrated in the
following figure.
14. Glass window for display and IR interface for IR controller, as illus-
trated in the following figure.
WARNING! Do not drill into the housing as this invalidates the

explosion safety approvals.
REMARK: Refer to the specific equipment’s guides for

directions to carry and lift the equipment or parts that
weigh more than 18 kgs.

Installation - Gland Entries
4.2 Gland Entries
4.2.1 General
The mechanics of the MSC-L requires gland entries to connect the
cables inside the controller and the wires to the terminals and the
connectors.
The gland/cable entries are positioned at the bottom of the MSC-L.
The MSC-L external cables enter the enclosure through one of the
cable entries.
4.2.2 Metric Gland Entries

The MSC-L implements an optional metric gland assembly layout,
which supports the following glands.
 2 x M20 (meters, solenoids)
 6 x M40
 6 x M32 (auxiliary)
 1 x non-metric (½” NPT) not for wiring, but for optional breather.
FIGURE 4-2 Metric gland entries overview

Installation - Gland Entries
4.2.3 NPT Cable Entries

The MSC-L with an optional NPT cable entry layout, supports the
following thread sizes.
 4 x 1½'' NPT
 4 x ¾'' NPT
 1 x ½'' NPT (optional breather)
FIGURE 4-3 NPT cable entries overview

Installation - Opening the MSC-L
4.3 Opening the MSC-L
WARNING! Do NOT open when an explosive atmosphere is

present. It is forbidden to open the MSC-L in an
explosive hazardous environment, unless otherwise
stated on the safety label.
WARNING! Treat the flange surface of the cover and the housing
with care. Keep the flange surface free of dirt. The O-
ring must be present and undamaged.
To open the MSC-L Lid
1. Remove the W&M seal, if present.
2. Remove the cosmetic cover, by gently pulling the cover.
3. Loosen all the 32 bolts by loosening one or two threads of the bolts
with an 8 mm Allen key.
The MSC-L lid can now be opened.
8 mm

4. If the MSC-L lid is stuck due to the air seal, carefully force it to open
with the screwdrivers, as illustrated in the following figure.
WARNING! Do not force the MSC-L lid to open in other places.

Also, take care not to damage the flame path.
WARNING! For ensuring intrinsic safety of the MSC-L, the

grounding connection of the lid to the main box and
the box to the local grounding system is very crucial.
5. Remove the screw of the earth strap protection cable on the MSC-L
lid.

6. Remove the screw on the earth strap assembly from the MSC-L lid.
NOTE: The screw must be removed only by Honeywell Enraf

trained service technicians.
7. Remove the screws that hold the boards fastened to the enclosure
with a 4 mm allen key.
8. Remove the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC boards and CAN-ARM-MSC boards.
9. Remove the 2x cabling from the backplane of the CAN-HMI-MSC
boards.
10. Replace all the toothed rings in the MSC-L lid.
NOTE: Make sure there is no corrosion between the parts of

the MSC-L.
11. Replace the screw of the earth strap protection cable on the MSC-L
lid.
12. Replace the screw of the earth strap assembly on the MSC-L lid.

4 - 10 Installation & Operation Manual
Installation - Closing the MSC Lid
4.4 Closing the MSC Lid

To close the MSC-L Lid
1. Make sure the O-ring is in place and it is not damaged. If the O-ring
is damaged, replace it first.
2. Remove the 2x cable (grounding cable and cable to prevent over-
stretching door after oppening the door) before replacing the O-ring.
NOTE: The O-ring must be replaced only by the Honeywell

Enraf trained by service technician.
3. Make sure the wires are not caught between the lid and the box
flange.
4. Make sure the ground bonding provided is effective.
5. Tighten all the 32 bolts crosswise using an 8 mm Allen key and the
applicable torque value (33 Nm).
6. Replace the cosmetic cover.

Installation - Removing/Replacing the PCBs
4.5 Removing/Replacing the PCBs
CAUTION! Wear an ESD wrist strap while handling a printed

circuit board from the MSC-L, to prevent damage by
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
1. Perform step 1 through step 3 in section 4.3 - Opening the MSC-L,
before removing/replacing the CAN-HMI-MSC, CAN-IN-OUT-MSC,
CAN-ARM-MSC, and MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD.
2. Ensure that the thermal conductive pads on all the boards are in
place.
3. Before placing the boards, remove the protection film, if present.
To remove the CAN-HMI-MSC board
1. Remove the PCB protector plate MSC lid.
2. Remove the subD 15 (2x) cables.
3. Remove the contra connector with the blue color cable (CN2).
4. Remove the display cables (CN9 and CN10).
5. Loosen and remove the screws that hold the CAN-HMI-MSC board
to the MSC-L lid.
NOTE: To replace the CAN-HMI-MSC board, perform the

previous steps in reverse order.
To remove the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC or CAN-ARM-MSC boards
1. Remove the screw that holds the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC or CAN-ARM-
MSC boards to the enclosure.
The screws for both the grounding and the protection cable are M4
Socket Cap screws which need a 3 mm hex key (or Allen key).
NOTE: To replace the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC and CAN-

ARM-MSC boards, perform the previous steps in
reverse order.
To remove the MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD
1. Remove the MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD from the backplanes by
pulling the MSC-L fuse board cover.
NOTE: To replace the MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD perform

the previous steps in reverse order.
NOTE: Do not remove the CAN-PSF-MSC board.

Installation - Fusing and Power Consumption
4.6 Fusing and Power Consumption
4.6.1 Fusing
4.6.1.1 Internal Fusing
The MSC-L provides internal fuses for the protection of the AC mains as
follows.
 The CAN-PSF-MSC (Power supply) board - Converts the mains AC
voltage into three different DC voltages. See section 3.6.2 - CAN-
PSF-MSC, for more information. The CAN-PSF-MSC board has an
internal fuse to protect the external AC mains against any over-
current condition or fault condition inside the MSC-L.
 MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD - The mains AC input, which is supplied
to the MSC-L is also routed to the external devices through the MSC-
SHORTCUT-BOARD. The fuses on the MSC fuse board deliver fuse
protected AC power to the external devices.

FIGURE 4-4 illustrates the block schematic of a zero ohm resistor on

the MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD.
ȍ SSR1_Feed_AC
SSR1_Feed_AC Resistor SSR1_SW_AC
AC_FUSED_1
SSR1_SW_AC
SSR AC_Neutral
AC_IN
4 pin connector for field connection
48 pin connector for CAN-ARM or
4 pin connector for Shortcut board
CAN-IN-OUT board
FIGURE 4-4 Block schematic of a zero ohm resistor on the MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD

FIGURE 4-5 illustrates the architecture of the MSC-SHORTCUT-

BOARD.
10 *
1 A with l2t < 1.6
AC_FUSED_1
AC_FUSED_2
AC_FUSED_3
AC_FUSED_4
AC_FUSED_5
AC_FUSED_6
10 A with 1500
breaking current
AC_FUSED_7
AC_IN
AC_FUSED_8
AC_FUSED_9
AC_FUSED_10
10 *
1 A with l2t < 1.6
AC_FUSED_1
AC_FUSED_2
AC_FUSED_3
AC_FUSED_4
AC_FUSED_5
AC_FUSED_6
10 A with 1500
breaking current
AC_FUSED_7
AC_FUSED_8
AC_FUSED_9
AC_FUSED_10
FIGURE 4-5 Architecture of MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD

4.6.1.2 External Fusing
External fuse can also be connected to the AC mains input available for
the MSC-L. There are two different power supply units, which can either
be powered using the individual AC sources or the common AC source.
 Use two 217 005.P (little fuse) or equivalent on each AC source for a
system with separate AC mains for each power supply.
 Use a single 217 010.P (little fuse) or equivalent for the common AC
source.
NOTE: External fusing is not required, as all the fusing is

done internally on the CAN-PSF-MSC board.
4.6.2 Power Consumption

The maximum consumed mains power depends on the external loads,
which can add up to 690 W.
The MSC-L contains DO-SSR-AC interfaces. The SSR relays are used
for switching AC signals connected to the MSC-L load.
The following boards in the MSC-L contain DO-SSR-AC interfaces.
1. CAN-ARM-MSC (one per backplane)
2. CAN-IN-OUT-MSC (two per backplane)
On each CAN-ARM-MSC board there are 12 SSR interfaces and on
each CAN-IN-OUT-MSC board there are four SSR interfaces.
Every DO-SSR-AC needs an optional fuse to protect the internal
electronics for the high current drawn. The 22 fuses are placed on the
optional MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD. These fuses when placed on the
MSC-L protect the electronics against the high current condition.
For the MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD board only the fuses are assembled
and not the 0E resistors. The MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD board has 22
fuses, and the SSR output is connected to the MSC-L load through the
fuse. The MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD is directly interfaced to the
backplane through the 48 pin connector.
The following table provides an example of the maximum dissipation of
the boards, based on the specific main voltage conditions for the
particular region/country, for the site where the MSC-L is installed.
Number
Boards Dissipation Description
of boards
CAN-ARM-MSC 2 15.4 W The dissipation is based on the
maximum load.
CAN-IN-OUT- 4 25 W The dissipation is based on the
MSC maximum load.
CAN-HMI-MSC 1 7.2 W The dissipation is based on the
maximum load.

Installation - Wiring Termination Guidance
Number
Boards Dissipation Description
of boards
Display KOE 1 6W The dissipation is based on the
TX20D26VM0A maximum load.
AA
CAN-PSF-MSC 2 20.3 Internal dissipation is 0.2 * 53.6 =
10.7 W
External 12 V dissipation is 0.2 *
24 = 4.8 W
External 24 V dissipation is 0.2 *
24 = 4.8 W
Total dissipa-
tion - 73.9W
4.6.3 Disconnecting/breaker device
WARNING! A readily accessible disconnecting/breaker device

with a 20 A fuse shall be incorporated external to the
equipment.
4.7 Wiring Termination Guidance
4.7.1 Wiring Architecture

 Ex i wiring is separated from other wiring.

 To limit the interference between low voltage and high voltage

signals, a logical separation between cables containing the signals
are created.
FIGURE 4-6 High/low voltages separation concept

4.7.2 Backplane Boards

All the external wires of the MSC-L connect to one of the Phoenix
Contact connectors of the backplanes. These backplanes are mounted
on the rear of the MSC-L enclosure.
The backplane connectors have a unique CN number, color, and XY
coordinate. The connectors contain 3, 4, 5, 6, or 8 pins. ARM-1-
Backplane-MSC start with the CN number CN101 and contains 52
connectors. ARM-2-Backplane-MSC start with the CN number CN201
and contains 49 connectors.
FIGURE 4-7 Backplane boards

4.7.2.1 ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC
FIGURE 4-8 ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC

4.7.2.2 Floorplan
The following image illustrate the floorplan for ARM-1-BACKPLANE-

MSC board.
ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 AI-1 3

2074295-D03 CN118 M11 CN123 Q11 CN128 U11
All primary wiring must be rated with insulation 1 2 3 16 17 18
24V
for minimum 300 V and with a max. temperature H C H C H C H C H C H C C A
of at least 105 °C [221 °F].
1 DO-EMR 8 1 DO-EMR 8 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 AI-2 3
CN101 A10 CN102 F10 CN119 M10 CN124 Q10 CN129 U10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 19 20 21
24V
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B H C H C H C H C H C H C C A
1 DO-EMR 8 1 DO-EMR 8 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 AI-3 3

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 7 8 9 22 23 24
24V
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B H C H C H C H C H C H C C A
1 DO-EMR 8 1 DO-SSR 8 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6
CN105 A8 CN106 F8 CN121 M8 CN126 Q8

9 10 19 20 1 2 10 11 12 25 26 27
A B A B A B A B F O N L F O N L H C H C H C H C H C H C
1 DO-SSR 8 1 DO-SSR 8 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 AI-4 3

3 4 5 6 13 14 15 28 29 30
24V
F O N L F O N L F O N L F O N L H C H C H C H C H C H C C A
1 DO-SSR 8 1 DO-SSR 8 1 QPI-1 6 1 QPI-4 6 1 AI-5 3

7 8 9 10 A B A B
24V
F O N L F O N L F O N L F O N L C A
12V
12V
12V
12V
C P C P C P C P
1 DI-AC 4 1 DO-SSR 8 1 QPI-2 6 1 QPI-5 6 1 RTD-1 4 1 AI-6 3
CN116 A5 CN111 D5 CN136 J5 CN139 N5 CN141 R5 CN133 U5

11 12 A B A B
24V
S+
1-L
2-L
3-L
S-
F O N L F O N L C A C A
12V
12V
12V
12V
N
C P C P C P C P
1 DI-AC 4 1 DO-SSR 8 1 QPI-3 6 1 QPI-6 6 1 RTD-2 4
CN117 A4 CN112 D4 CN137 J4 CN140 N4 CN142 R4

13 14 A B A B
4-L
5-L
6-L
S+
S-
F O N L F O N L C A
N
12V
12V
12V
12V
C P C P C P C P
1 MAINS-1 3 1 DO-SSR 8 1 AO 6 1 COM 6 1 RTD-3 4
CN148 A3 CN113 D3 CN145 J3 CN146 N3 CN143 R3

15 16 2 3 1 1 2
S+
S-
L N E F O N L F O N L + - + - + - + - C + - C C A
1 MAINS-2 3 1 DO-SSR 8 1 COM 6 1 PO 4
CN149 A2 CN114 D2 CN150 L2 CN144 P2

17 18 3 4 1 2
L N E F O N L F O N L + - C + - C HI LO HI LO
2074295-D03
1 DO-SSR 8 1 COM-5 5 1 ETH-1 4 1 ETH-2 4 1 AI-7 3
CN115 D1 CN151 J1 CN147 M1 CN152 P1 CN134 S1

19 20
24V
R+
R+
R+
T+
T+
T+
R-
R-
R-
F O N L F O N L
T-
T-
T-
C A
C
FIGURE 4-9 Blackplane arrangement of ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC

4.7.2.3 Connector Overview
The following table provides an overview of the ARM-1-BACKPLANE-

MSC connector.
ID PINS FUNCTIONS BOARD COLOR X-Y NAME
CN-101 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 1 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 Yellow A-10 DO-EMR-1
DO-EMR-AC-DC 2 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 DO-EMR-2
CN-102 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 5 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 Yellow F-10 DO-EMR-5
CN-103 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 11 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-2 Yellow A-9 DO-EMR-
11
DO-EMR-AC-DC 12 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-2 DO-EMR-
12
13
14
CN-104 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 15 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-2 Yellow F-9 DO-EMR-
15
16
17
18
CN-105 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 9 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 Yellow A-8 DO-EMR-9
10
19
20
CN-106 8 DO-SSR-AC 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Orange F-8 DO-SSR-1
DO-SSR-AC 2 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 DO-SSR-2
CN-107 8 DO-SSR-AC 3 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Orange A-7 DO-SSR-3


CN-109 8 DO-SSR-AC 7 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Orange A-6 DO-SSR-7
DO-SSR-AC 10 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 DO-SSR-

10
CN-111 8 DO-SSR-AC 11 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Orange D-5 DO-SSR-

11
DO-SSR-AC 12 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 DO-SSR-

12
CN-112 8 DO-SSR-AC 13 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 Orange D-4 DO-SSR-

13
DO-SSR-AC 14 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 DO-SSR-

14

15

16

17

18

19

20
CN-116 4 DI-AC 1 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 Red A-5 DI-AC-1
DI-AC 2 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 DI-AC-2
CN-117 4 DI-AC 4 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-2 Red A-4 DI-AC-4


CN-118 6 DI-DC 1 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 Green M-11 DI-DC-1
DI-DC 2 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 DI-DC-2
CN-123 6 DI-DC 16 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-2 Green Q-11 DI-DC-16
CN-128 3 AI 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green U-11 AI-1


CN-134 3 AI 7 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green S-1 AI-7
CN-135 6 QPI-A 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green M-6 QPI-1A
QPI-B 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 QPI-1B
CN-136 6 QPI-A 2 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green J-5 QPI-2A
CN-138 6 QPI-A 4 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green Q-6 QPI-4A
CN-139 6 QPI-A 5 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green N-5 QPI-5A
CN-140 6 QPI-A 6 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green N-4 QPI-6A
CN-141 4 RTD 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green R-5 RTD-1
CN-144 4 PO 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green P-2 PO-1
PO 2 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 PO-2
CN-145 6 AO 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Green J-3 AO-1
AO 2 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 AO-2
CN-146 6 COMMS 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Black N-3 COM-1
COMMS 2 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 COM-2
CN-147 4 ETHER 1 CAN-ARM-MSC-1 Black M-1 ETH-1
CN-148 3 MAINS INPUT 1 Internal/external Red A-3 MAINS-1
CN-149 3 MAINS INPUT 2 Internal/external Red A-2 MAINS-2
CN-150 6 COMMS 3 CAN-HMI-MSC Black L-2 COM-3
COMMS 4 CAN-HMI-MSC COM-4
CN-151 5 COMMS 5 CAN-HMI-MSC J-1 COM-5
CN-152 4 ETHER 2 CAN-HMI-MSC Black P-1 ETH-2
ID TYPE FUNCTION BOARD NAME

CN-160 subD15 HMI-LINK-1 CAN-HMI-MSC CN-160
CN-161 subD15 HMI-LINK-2 CAN-HMI-MSC CN-161
CN-162 subD25 BACKPLANE-LINK 1 ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC CN-162


CN-163 F48 PSF-BOARD 1 CAN-PSF-MSC-1 CN-163
CN-164 F48 ARM-BOARD 1-A CAN-ARM-MSC-1 CN-164
CN-165 F48 ARM-BOARD 1-B CAN-ARM-MSC-1 CN-165
CN-166 F48 IN-OUT-BOARD 1-A CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 CN-166
CN-167 F48 IN-OUT-BOARD 1-B CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-1 CN-167
CN-170 F48 FUSE-BOARD 1 MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD-1 CN-170
4.7.2.4 ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC
FIGURE 4-10 ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC

4.7.2.5 Floorplan
The following image illustrate the floorplan for ARM-2-BACKPLANE-

MSC board..
1 AI-8 3 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC

CN228 A11 CN218 C11 CN223 G11 2074296-D02
31 32 33 46 47 48 All primary wiring must be rated with insulation for
24V
C A H C H C H C H C H C H C minimum 300 V and with a max. temperature of at

least 105 °C [221 °F].
1 AI-9 3 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 DO-EMR 8 1 DO-EMR 8
CN229 A10 CN219 C10 CN224 G10 CN202 L10 CN201 Q10
34 35 36 49 50 51 25 26 27 28 21 22 23 24
24V
C A H C H C H C H C H C H C A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
1 AI-10 3 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 DO-EMR 8 1 DO-EMR 8

37 38 39 52 53 54 35 36 37 38 31 32 33 34
24V
C A H C H C H C H C H C H C A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 DO-SSR 8 1 DO-EMR 8
CN221 C8 CN226 G8 CN206 L8 CN205 Q8

40 41 42 55 56 57 21 22 29 30 39 40
H C H C H C H C H C H C F O N L F O N L A B A B A B A B
1 AI-11 3 1 DI-DC 6 1 DI-DC 6 1 DO-SSR 8 1 DO-SSR 8

43 44 45 58 59 60 25 26 23 24
24V
C A H C H C H C H C H C H C F O N L F B N L F O N L F O N L
1 AI-12 3 1 QPI-7 6 1 QPI-10 6 1 DO-SSR 8 1 DO-SSR 8

A B A B 29 30 27 28
24V
C A F O N L F O N L F O N L F O N L
12V
12V
12V
12V
C P C P C P C P
1 AI-13 3 1 AI-14 3 1 QPI-8 6 1 QPI-11 6 1 DO-SSR 8 1 DI-AC 4
CN233 A5 CN234 C5 CN236 F5 CN239 J5 CN211 N5 CN216 T5

A B A B 31 32
24V
24V
7-L
8-L
F O N L F O N L N 9-L
12V
12V
12V
12V
C A C A
C P C P C P C P
1 RTD-4 4 1 QPI-9 6 1 QPI-12 6 1 DO-SSR 8 1 DI-AC 4
CN241 C4 CN237 F4 CN240 J4 CN212 N4 CN217 T4

A B A B 33 34
10-L
11-L
12-L
S+
S-
C A F O N L F O N L
12V
12V
N
12V
12V
C P C P C P C P
1 RTD-5 4 1 AO 6 1 COM 6 1 DO-SSR 8 1 MAINS-3 3
CN242 C3 CN245 F3 CN246 J3 CN213 N3 CN248 T3

5 6 4 6 7 35 36
S+
S-
C A + - + - + - + - C + - C F O N L F O N L L N E
1 RTD-6 4 1 PO 4 1 DO-SSR 8 1 MAINS-4 3
CN243 F2 CN244 I2 CN214 N2 CN249 T2

3 4 37 38
S+
S-
C A HI LO HI LO F O N L F O N L L N E
2074296-D02
1 ETH-3 4 1 DO-SSR 8
CN247 I1 CN215 N1
39 40
R+
T+
R-
F O N L F O N L
T-
FIGURE 4-11 Blackplane arrangement of ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC

4.7.2.6 Connector Overview
The following table provides an overview of the ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC

connector.
CN-201 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 21 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-3 Yellow Q-10 DO-EMR-21
CN-202 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 25 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-3 Yellow L-10 DO-EMR-25
CN-204 8 DO-EMR-AC-DC 35 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-4 Yellow L-9 DO-EMR-35
CN-206 8 DO-SSR-AC 21 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Orange L-8 DO-SSR-21
CN-207 8 DO-SSR-AC 23 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Orange Q-7 DO-SSR-23
CN-209 8 DO-SSR-AC 27 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Orange Q-6 DO-SSR-27


CN-211 8 DO-SSR-AC 31 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Orange N-5 DO-SSR-31
CN-212 8 DO-SSR-AC 33 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-3 Orange N-4 DO-SSR-33
DO-SSR-AC 34 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-3 DO-SSR-34

CN-216 4 DI-AC 7 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-3 Red T-5 DI-AC-7
CN-217 4 DI-AC 10 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-4 Red T-4 DI-AC-10
CN-218 6 DI-DC 31 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-3 Green C-11 DI-DC-31


CN-223 6 DI-DC 46 CAN-IN-OUT-MSC-4 Green G-11 DI-DC-46
CN-228 3 AI 8 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green A-11 AI-8
CN-234 3 AI 14 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green C-5 AI-14
CN-235 6 QPI-A 7 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green C-6 QPI-7A
CN-236 6 QPI-A 8 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green F-5 QPI-8A
CN-237 6 QPI-A 9 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green F-4 QPI-9A
CN-238 6 QPI-A 10 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green G-6 QPI-10A


CN-241 4 RTD 4 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green C-4 RTD-4
CN-242 4 RTD 5 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green C-3 RTD-5
CN-243 4 RTD 6 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green F-2 RTD-6
CN-244 4 PO 3 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green I-2 PO-3
PO 4 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 PO-4
CN-245 6 AO 4 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Green F-3 AO-4
CN-246 6 COMMS 6 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Black J-3 COM-6
COMMS 7 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 COM-7
CN-247 4 ETHER 3 CAN-ARM-MSC-2 Black I-1 ETH-3
CN-248 3 MAINS INPUT 3 Internal/external Red T-3 MAINS-3
CN-249 3 MAINS INPUT 4 Internal/external Red T-2 MAINS-4

CN-260 subD25 BACKPLANE-LINK 2 ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC CN-260
CN-262 subD25 BACKPLANE-LINK 3 Program Interface CN-262
CN-263 F48 PSF-BOARD 2 CAN-PSF-MSC-2 CN-263
CN-264 F48 ARM-BOARD 2-A CAN-ARM-MSC-2 CN-264
CN-265 F48 ARM-BOARD 2-B CAN-ARM-MSC-2 CN-265
CN-270 F48 FUSE-BOARD 2 MSC-SHORTCUT-BOARD-2 CN-270
 The following measures are taken to adequately identify connections

with different functions. To avoid connector placement errors, use the
following functions.
• Different number of pins.
• In case of same number of pins with different functions, a
connector coding profile of insulating material is applied.
• For color codes of connectors, see the following table.
Color Function
Red High voltage input signals
Orange High voltage output signals

Color Function
Yellow High voltage or Low voltage output signals
Green Low voltage signals
Black Communication signals
Blue Ex i signals
4.7.3 General
CAUTION! IMPORTANT! All terminated cables must have

sufficient excess length to allow each PCB to be fully
withdrawn from the enclosure when the connectors
are still in place. This is performed to allow
connectors to be affixed to each board outside the
enclosure, before locating them inside, and to allow
each board to be fully withdrawn from the enclosure
before the connectors are removed. This negates the
requirement to attach and remove connectors inside
the enclosure and facilitates best practice for efficient
assembly and disassembly of the electronics stack.
4.7.3.1 Wire Sizes and Types
As there are no strictly prescribed wire sizes, the following guidelines

are recommended.
 All I/O terminals accept wires with a cross section, an area of 0.2 to
2.5 mm2 [AWG 24 to 14].
 For mains/high voltage wiring, 1.5 mm2 [AWG 16].
 For low voltage wiring (DI, PO, AI, AO, RTD, and so on), 0.75 mm2
[AWG 18] or 0.5 mm2 [AWG 20].
 The temperature rating of the field wiring must be at least 20 ºC [36
ºF] above the maximum operating temperature. Therefore, a rating of
85 °C [185 ºF] is suitable for the entire temperature range.
All primary wiring needs to be provided with insulation rated for
minimum 300 V, with a rated temperature of at least 105 °C [221 °F] and
with a conductor size of at least 0.75 mm2 [AWG 18].

4.7.4 Recommended Cables
Number
Cable type Function
of wires
XLPE/SWA/PVC 4C X 1.5MM 600/1000 V 3 230 VAC Mains Supply Input
BS5467
XLPE/SWA/PVC 4C X 1.5MM 600/1000 V 2 230 VAC Alarm Output
BS5467
XLPE/SWA/PVC 4C X 1.5MM 600/1000 V 4 230 VAC Permissive Input
BS5467
3C X 0.75 MM2 YYNR PVC 4 230 VAC Digital Controlled Valve Output
3C X 0.75 MM2 YYNR PVC 4 230 VAC VAC Solenoid Supply Output
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 2 12 VDC Switched Output
P1T2 PVC
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 2 12 VDC Switched Input
P1T2 PVC
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 2 Analog Output (maximum 24 V, 3.2-24 mA)
P1T2 PVC
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 4 Analog Input (maximum 24 V, 3.2-24 mA)
P1T2 PVC
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 2 Analog Output (maximum 24 V, 3.2- 24 mA)
P1T2 PVC
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 2 Pulse Output (maximum 12 V, 10 KHz)
P1T2 PVC
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 3 Pulse Input (maximum 12 V, 10 KHz)
P1T2 PVC
BS5308 1X4X0.5 MM COL SCREEN SWA 4 Analog input RTD (maximum 24 V, 1.5 mA)
P1T2 PVC
BELDEN 9842 2PAIR 24AWG LSNH/SWA, 4 RS-485 Serial Communication Interface
ni 120 
BELDEN 9842 2PAIR 24AWG LSNH/SWA, 4 RS-485 Serial Communication Interface
ni 120 
CAT5E-SWA-FTP-LSZH 24 AWG 4PAIR 4 10/100 Ethernet Communication Interface
CAT5E-SWA-FTP-LSZH 24 AWG 4PAIR 4 10/100 Ethernet Communication Interface
4.7.5 Wire Crimps

There are no strictly prescribed wire crimps.
However, it is advised to fit crimps (bootlace ferrules) to multi-strand
cable wires.
NOTE: Wire crimps are to reinforce the fine wire strands

when terminating a cable into a connector block.
Wire crimps are not required to be fitted for solid-core cable wires.

4.7.6 Internal Wiring diagram
4.7.6.1 AC Cable 1 (Gland 1)
FIGURE 4-12 AC cable 1 (gland 1)

4.7.6.3 DC cable 1 (Gland 3)
FIGURE 4-14 DC cable 1 (gland 3)


4.7.6.6 Analog Cable 1 (Gland 6)
FIGURE 4-17 Analog cable 1 (gland 6)

4.7.6.8 DC Cable 2 (Gland 8)



4.7.6.12 Comms Cable 1 (Gland 12)
FIGURE 4-23 Comms cable 1 (gland 12)

4.7.6.15 Comms Cable 2 (Gland 15)
FIGURE 4-26 Comms cable 2 (gland 15)

FIGURE 4-29 AC cable 6 (Gland 18)
4.7.6.19 DC Cable 10 (Gland 19)

4.7.6.20 DC Cable 11 (Gland 20)


4.7.6.23 Analog Cable 2 (Gland 23)
FIGURE 4-34 Analog cable 2 (gland 23)


4.7.6.25 AC Cable 10 (Gland 25)

4.7.6.26 DC Cable 12 (Gland 26)
4.7.7 Connecting MSC-L to NexWatch DR4208S Card Reader

2-Wire COM Port
MSC-L NexWatch DR4208S

Card Reader
Connector Pin
1 COM 6 (+) Green

S-NET A
2 COM 6 (-) White
6 S-NET B
3 COM 6 (c)
CN246
4 COM 7 (+)
7 Black Supply ground

5 COM 7 (-) S-NET DC Return
Red
6 COM 7 (c) Positive Supply
_ +
Connector Pin Power Supply

10.8 - 28 V DC
1 COM 1(+) (250 mA max)
1 2 COM 1(-)
3 COM 1(c)
CN146
4 COM 2(+)
2
5 COM 2(-)
6 COM 2(c)
Connector Pin
1 COM 5 (R+)
2 COM 5 (R-)
CN151 5 3 COM 5(T+)
4 COM 5(T-)
5 COM 5 (C)
4.7.8 ARM-1-BACKPLANE-MSC Terminal Assignment Guide

The following table provides information for the basic function
assignment to specific terminals. Majority of the MSC-L functions can
be assigned to multiple I/O.

To complete the installation, bind each function to its I/O within the
Configuration menu.
Floor plan Signal Typical
Terminal I/O Signal name Type
ID description functions
CN-101
1 DO-EMR-1 A EMR1_no Contact for Low frequency Alarm shutdown
External slow switching Alarm indication
Supply AC or DC output Pump start
control. Product block
2 DO-EMR-1 B EMR_common Contact for
valve
External load
Deadman callout
switching
Deadman bell
3 DO-EMR-2 A EMR2_no Contact for
External
Supply
External load
switching Secondary
5 DO-EMR-3 A EMR3_no Contact for interface for:
External Actuator output
Supply Additive solenoid

External load
switching
External
Supply
External load
switching


CN-102
valve
External load
Deadman callout
switching
Deadman bell
External
Supply
4 DO-EMR-6 B EMR_common Contact for Secondary
External load interface for:
switching Actuator output
5 DO-EMR-7 A EMR7_no Contact for Additive solenoid
External
Supply
External load
switching
External
Supply
External load
switching
CN-103


valve
External load
Deadman callout
switching
Deadman bell
External
Supply
Secondary
4 DO-EMR-12 B EMR_common Contact for interface for:
External load Actuator output
switching Additive solenoid
External
Supply
External load
switching
External
Supply
External load
switching
CN-104


valve
External load
Deadman callout
switching
Deadman bell
External
Supply
Secondary
External
Supply
External load
switching
External
Supply
External load
switching


CN-105
valve
External load
Deadman callout
switching
Deadman bell
External
Supply
Secondary
External
Supply
External load
switching
External
Supply
External load
switching
CN-106
1 DO-SSR-1 F SSR1_feed Feed High frequency, Actuator outputs
fast switching Additive solenoid
2 DO-SSR-1 O SSR1_sw Signal - Output
AC output Additive injection
3 DO-SSR-1 N N Neutral control. feedback
4 DO-SSR-1 L L A/C Live

5 DO-SSR-2 F SSR2_feed Feed
6 DO-SSR-2 O SSR2_sw Signal - Output Alarm shutdown
7 DO-SSR-2 N N Neutral Alarm indication
Pump start
8 DO-SSR-2 L L A/C Live Product block
valve
Additive blocking
valve
CN-107


1 DO-SSR-3 F SSR3_feed Feed High frequency, Actuator outputs
2 DO-SSR-3 O SSR3_sw Signal - Output
control. feedback
3 DO-SSR-3 N N Neutral
4 DO-SSR-3 L L A/C Live
5 DO-SSR-4 F SSR4_feed Feed
6 DO-SSR-4 O SSR4_sw Signal - Output Alarm shutdown
Pump start
8 DO-SSR-4 L L A/C Live Product block
valve
Additive blocking
valve


CN-108
1 DO-SSR-5 F SSR5_feed_ac Feed High frequency, Actuator outputs
2 DO-SSR-5 O SSR5_sw_ac Signal - Output
4 DO-SSR-5 L L Live
5 DO-SSR-6 F SSR6_feed_ac Feed
Alarm shutdown
6 DO-SSR-6 O SSR6_sw_ac Signal - Output Alarm indication
7 DO-SSR-6 N N Neutral Pump start
Product block
8 DO-SSR-6 L L Live valve
Additive blocking
valve
CN-109
control. feedback
4 DO-SSR-7 L L Live
5 DO-SSR-8 F SSR8_feed_ac Feed
6 DO-SSR-8 O SSR8_sw_ac Signal - Output Alarm shutdown
Pump start
8 DO-SSR-8 L L Live Product block
valve
Additive blocking
valve


CN-110
4 DO-SSR-9 L L Live
5 DO-SSR-10 F SSR10_feed_a Feed
c
Alarm shutdown
6 DO-SSR-10 O SSR0_sw_ac Signal - Output Alarm indication
Product block
Additive blocking
valve
CN-111
1 DO-SSR-11 F SSR11_feed_a Feed High frequency, Actuator outputs
c fast switching Additive solenoid
control. feedback
4 DO-SSR-11 L L Live
c Alarm shutdown
Alarm indication
6 DO-SSR-12 O SSR12_sw_ac Signal - Output Pump start
7 DO-SSR-12 N N Neutral Product block
valve
8 DO-SSR-12 L L Live Additive blocking
valve
CN-112
control. feedback
c Alarm shutdown
Alarm indication
valve
valve


CN-113
control. feedback
c Alarm shutdown
Alarm indication
valve
valve
CN-114
control. feedback
c Alarm shutdown
Alarm indication
valve
valve


CN-115
control. feedback
c Alarm shutdown
Alarm indication
valve
valve
CN-116
1 DI-AC-1, 2, N AC_NEUTRAL Neutral AC input control Programmable
3 inputs
ESD input
2 DI-AC-1 1-L AC1_L Live
CN-117
6 inputs
ESD input
CN-118
1 DI-DC-1 H DC1_hi Signal - Input DC input control Programmable
Inputs
2 DI-DC-1 C COMMON Common
ESD input
3 DI-DC-2 H DC2_hi Signal - Input


CN-119
Inputs
ESD input
CN-120
Inputs
ESD input
CN-121
Inputs
ESD input
CN-122
Inputs
ESD input


CN-123
Inputs
ESD input
CN-124
Inputs
ESD input
CN-125
Inputs
ESD input
CN-126
Inputs
ESD input


CN-127
Inputs
ESD input
CN-128
1 AI-1 24 V 24 V Power (active Analog input 4-20 mA input for
mode) control temperature
measurement.
2 AI-1 C 24 V common Common
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
3 AI-1 A Analog signal Signal - Input
(active +
passive mode)
CN-129
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-130
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)


CN-131
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-132
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-133
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-134
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)


CN-135
1 QPI-1A 12 V 12 V DC Power High frequency Additive flow
METER pulse input meter (single or
POWER control + dual)
external power Product flow meter
2 QPI-1A C COMMON Common
(single or dual
3 QPI-1A P PULSE A Pulse Signal - pulse)
Input A
4 QPI-1B 12 V 12 V DC Power
METER
POWER
5 QPI-1B C COMMON Common
6 QPI-1B P PULSE B Pulse Signal -
Input B
CN-136
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B
CN-137
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B


CN-138
(single or dual
3 QPI-4A P PULSE A Pulse Signal - pulse).
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B
CN-139
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B
CN-140
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B


CN-141
1 RTD-1 S- RTD S- Three wire Resistance Preferred: PT100
connection Temperature temperature
Detector input measurement
2 RTD-1 C RTD COM Neutral
control according to IEC
3 RTD-1 A RTD POS Signal - Input 60751.
4 RTD-1 S+ RTD S+ Four wire

connection
CN-142

connection
CN-143

connection
CN-144
1 PO-1 HI Po1_HI Feed Pulse output Real time pulse
control output, factored
2 PO-1 LO Po1_LO Signal - Output
pulse output.
3 PO-2 HI Po2_HI Feed Additive injection
feedback, Alarm
4 PO-2 LO Po2_LO Signal - Output shutdown,
Alarm indication,
Pump start,
Additive blocking
valve


CN-145
1 AO-2 + AO_a2 Signal - Output Analog output 4-20 mA output for
(+) control primary value
presentation:
2 AO-2 - AO_b2 Signal - Output
(-)
3 AO-3 + AO_a3 Signal - Output
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
CN-146
1 COM-1 + RS485_A_CH1 Receive RS485 Preferred interface
communication to:
2 COM-1 - RS485_B_CH1 Transmit
interface (2-wire) TAS,
3 COM-1 C RS485_Commo 0V Fusion4 Portal
n_CH1
4 COM-2 - RS485_A_CH2 Receive
5 COM-2 + RS485_A_CH2 Transmit
6 COM-2 C RS485_Commo 0V
n_CH2
CN-147
1 ETH-1 T+ ETHER_TXP Transmit Ethernet Preferred interface
positive communication to:
interface TAS,
2 ETH-1 T- ETHER_TXN Transmit
Fusion4 Portal
negative
3 ETH-1 R+ ETHER_RXP Receive
positive
4 ETH-1 R- ETHER_RXN Receive
negative
CN-148
1 MAINS-1 L Live Live Mains AC power External AC power
input for device
2 MAINS-1 N Neutral Neutral
operation.
3 MAINS-1 E Earth Earth


CN-149
1 MAINS-2 L Live Live Mains AC power Redundant
external AC power
for device
3 MAINS-2 E Earth Earth operation or Mains
AC power link to
second backplane
(ARM-2-
BACKPLANE-
MSC)
CN-150
communication to:
n_CH3
4 COM-4 + RS485_A_CH4 Receive
n_CH4
CN-151
1 COM-5 R+ RS485_A_CH5 Receive RS485 Preferred interface
2 COM-5 R- RS485_B_CH5 Receive
Fusion4 Portal
negative
3 COM-5 T+ RS485_Y_CH5 Transmit
positive
4 COM-5 T- RS485_Z_CH5 Transmit
negative
n_CH5
CN-152
interface TAS,
Fusion4 Portal
negative
positive
4 ETH-2 R- ETHER_RXN Transmit
negative

4.7.9 ARM-2-BACKPLANE-MSC Terminal Assignment Guide

The following table provides information for the basic function
assignment to specific terminals.
Majority of the MSC-L functions can be assigned to multiple I/O.
To complete the installation, bind each function to its I/O within the
Configuration Menu.
CN-201
1 DO-EMR-21 A EMR21_no Signal - Output Low frequency Alarm shutdown
slow switching Alarm indication
2 DO-EMR-21 B EMR_common Neutral
AC or DC output Pump start
3 DO-EMR-22 A EMR22_no Signal - Output control. Product block
valve
Deadman callout
4 DO-EMR-22 B EMR_common Neutral Deadman bell
5 DO-EMR-23 A EMR23_no Signal - Output

Secondary
8 DO-EMR-24 B EMR_common Neutral interface for:
Actuator output
Additive solenoid
CN-202
3 DO-EMR-26 A EMR26_no Signal - Output valve
Deadman callout
Secondary
Actuator output
Additive solenoid


CN-203
Deadman callout
Secondary
Actuator output
Additive solenoid
CN-204
Deadman callout
Secondary
Actuator output
Additive solenoid
CN-205
3 DO-EMR-30 A EMR30_no Signal - Output control. Product block
valve
4 DO-EMR-30 B EMR_common Neutral Deadman callout
5 DO-EMR-39 A EMR39_no Signal - Output Deadman bell

Secondary
Actuator output
Additive solenoid


CN-206
1 DO-SSR-21 F SSr21_feed_ac Feed High frequency, Actuator outputs
2 DO-SSR-21 O SSr21_sw_ac Signal - Output
5 DO-SSR-22 F SSr22_feed_ac Feed
6 DO-SSR-22 O SSr22_sw_ac Signal - Output Alarm shutdown
Pump start
valve
CN-207
control. feedback
Pump start
valve
CN-208
Pump start
valve


CN-209
control. feedback
Alarm shutdown
6 DO-SSR-28 O SSr28_sw_ac Signal - Output Alarm indication
Additive blocking
CN-210
Pump start
valve
CN-211
control. feedback
Pump start
valve


CN-212
Pump start
valve
CN-213
Alarm shutdown
6 DO-SSR-36 O SSr36_sw_ac Signal - Output Alarm indication
Additive blocking
CN-214
Pump start
valve


CN-215
control. feedback
Pump start
valve
CN-216
9 inputs
ESD input
CN-217
1 DI-AC-10, N AC_NEUTRAL Neutral AC input control Programmable
11, 12 inputs
ESD input


CN-218
inputs
ESD input
CN-219
inputs
ESD input
CN-220
inputs
ESD input
CN-221
inputs
ESD input


CN-222
inputs
ESD input
CN-223
inputs
ESD input
CN-224
inputs
ESD input
CN-225
inputs
ESD input


CN-226
inputs
ESD input
CN-227
inputs
ESD input
CN-228
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-229
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)


CN-230
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-231
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-232
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-233
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
3 AI-13 A Analog signal Sgnal - Input
(active +
passive mode)


CN-234
measurement.
Digital mode for
(passive
"digital input".
mode)
(active +
passive mode)
CN-235
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B
CN-236
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B


CN-237
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B
CN-238
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B
CN-239
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B


CN-240
(single or dual
Input A
METER
POWER
Input B
CN-241

connection
CN-242

connection
CN-243

connection


CN-244
1 PO-3 HI Po3_HI Feed Pulse output
control
3 PO-4 HI Po4_HI Feed
CN-245
1 AO-5 + AO_a5 Signal - Output Analog output
(+) control
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
CN-246
communication to:
interface (2-wire) TAS
n_CH6 Smart Additive
4 COM-7 + RS485_A_CH7 Receive

5 COM-7 - RS485_A_CH7 Transmit
n_CH7


CN-247
interface TAS
Fusion4 Portal
negative
Smart Additive
positive
4 ETH-3 R- ETHER_RXN Receive
negative
CN-248
1 MAINS-3 L Live Live Mains AC power (Redundant)
input external AC power
for device
3 MAINS-3 E Earth Earth operation.
CN-249
1 MAINS-4 L Live Live Mains AC power Redundant
external AC power
for device
3 MAINS-4 E Earth Earth operation or Mains
AC power link to
first backplane
(ARM-1-
BACKPLANE-
MSC)

Installation - Display Replacement Instructions
4.8 Display Replacement Instructions

MSC-L contains 8"inch RGB display and Honeywell can provide the
same as a spare part as per the customer demand/requirement.
Following are the instructions to replace the display in installed unit.
1. Open the MSC-L lid.
2. Remove the metal plate, which is attached to the CAN-HMI-BOARD.
3. Detach the 2-display interface FFC cables, which is attached to the
CAN-HMI board.
4. Remove the CAN-HMI board.

5. Remove the metal plate which is attached to the display.

6. Replace with a New 8" Hitachi/Power view Display MSC (2562800)

and peel-off the plastic cover by pulling up the white paper present at
the upper left corner.
7. Assemble the 8" Hitachi/Power view Display MSC as shown. Cable

orientation is important from assembly point of view.
8. Install Display on back of Glass Retainer as shown below.

9. Use the same fasteners to fix the display.
10. Assemble the Display module in to the MSC LID assembly.
11. Connect the 2-display cables to CAN-HMI board as shown below.

12. Fix the metal back cover on top of the HMI-BOARD

13. Close the LID.


Operation - General
CHAPTER 5 OPERATION
5.1 General
5.1.1 Introduction
This chapter provides the commissioning information for the MSC-L.
Commissioning the MSC-L is accomplished by configuring entities (or
parameters) to the required values. This is performed using the menu
options of the MSC-L. See section 5.4 - Menu and Navigation, for more
information.
5.1.2 Text Conventions

In contrast with the explanatory text, all instructions are preceded by a
(→).
All [Entity] and <entity-related> texts are in a recognizable format.
For example, the Entity is in the format [Units of additive volume] and the
entity-related text is in the format <Milliliter>.
5.2 Service Interfaces

The MSC-L can be configured through four interfaces as follows:
 The infrared interface with IR Controller.
 The wired Ex i interface with Local Access Device (LAD).
 The COMMS interface, which connects to the Fusion4 portal through
RS-485 or Ethernet.
 The Ethernet communication.
 The keyboard.
FIGURE 5-1 Service interfaces of the MSC-L

Operation - Service Tools
5.3 Service Tools
5.3.1 Fusion4 IR Controller

The Fusion4 IR Controller uses infrared (IR) signals to transmit the
ASCII characters to the MSC-L. This allows the operator to make
adjustments in programming the MSC-L without removing the cover of
the explosion proof enclosure on-site.
The infrared receiver on the MSC-L is designed to be unaffected by
interference from light sources other than the Fusion4 IR Controller. All
prompts requiring an operator response are clearly indicated on the
display of the MSC-L.
The Fusion4 IR Controller has all the infrared commands permanently
stored in its micro-controller. Due to this, if the batteries are drained, it
can be restored to complete operation by inserting a fresh set of
batteries. The Fusion4 IR Controller has a “sleep” mode to reduce
battery consumption. At first use, or after a period of inactivity of
approximately 30 seconds, the [ATTN] key must be pressed to “wake-up”
the Fusion4 IR Controller. Then the [SEND] light blinks, indicating that
the Fusion4 IR Controller is ready for operation.
The MSC-L uses seven of the Fusion4 IR controller buttons. These
buttons (^, v, <, >, OK, ESC) are provided in bold text in FIGURE 5-2
and are explained in detail in section 5.3.4.1 - Basic Navigation
(Fusion4 IR Controller + Fusion4 LAD).

FIGURE 5-2 The key functions of the Fusion4 IR Controller
NOTE:
 The IR controller range is limited to 3 m/10 ft.
 The switch on the right-hand side (if present) is not functional.

5.3.2 Fusion4 Local Access Device
5.3.2.1 General
The Local Access Device (LAD) is a hand-held controller used for

interfacing with the Fusion4 product family, allowing tasks such as
parameter adjustment, alarm resetting, and calibration.
The device facilitates two-way data communication between a parent
device and LAD (see section 5.2 - Service Interfaces).
The functions supported by LAD are as follows:
1. Rapid transfer of transaction data, configuration of files and cali-
bration of records.
2. Upgrade the firmware in the field.
FIGURE 5-3 LAD and its system overview
NOTE: The LAD connection is not recognized by the MSC-L

during an active IR Controller session. The LAD must
be disconnected and then connected again after the
IR Controller session is complete.

5.3.2.2 LAD Application Overview
Program MSC configuration Capture MSC configuration

- from SD card - stored on SD card
- per board - per device
Capture MSC recipe MSC menu/screen

- stored on SD card navigation
- configuration
- calibration
- diagnostics
- execute special function “F”
Program MSC recipe User feedback

- from SD card - LAD status
- MSC data transfer
- MSC I/O test
PC data exchange
Program MSC language - read and write data from SD card
pack
- from SD card
FP-LAD firmware upgrade

- firmware located on SD card
Capture MSC transactions
- stored on SD card
Capture MSC calibration MSC firmware upgrade

- per micro controller
records - MSC must be unsealed first
- stored on SD card
Capture MSC W&M (MID) sealing

event logs records - function enabled by embedded
- debug log license key
- W&M log - LAD for notified body and
- alarm log accredited service engineer
- stored on SD card
= Basic setup
= Advanced setup
MSC interface
- comms
- power
FIGURE 5-4 LAD application overview

5.3.3 Integrated Keyboard

The keyboard is used for navigating to the user display functions. It also
helps in providing inputs for the transaction work flow and the
diagnostics functionality.
The EX-IO-HMI-MSC-L board is an interface between the keyboard, the
LAD (outside the enclosure) and the HMI board. The keyboard contains
the following functions:
1. 16 keypad switches on the MSC-L enclosure. These switches are
connected to the enclosure.
2. A switch that is connected to the WnM slider on the MSC-L
enclosure.
3. An LAD connector (CN1) where field connections from the external
LAD module are connected.
4. A HMI connector (CN2), which is interfaced to the CAN-HMI-MSC
board.
See the following figure for more details.
FIGURE 5-5 Keyboard
The following table describes the functionality of the individual keys on

the keyboard.

Key name Image Description

ESC Select the ESC key to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE: Hold the ESC key to enter the

Service Technician logon screen.
DEL Select the DEL key to clear the values

entered.
OK Select the OK key to select the item in

focus and confirm the value.
NOTE: Hold the OK key to enter the

Service Technician logon screen and
check the alarms or stream details.
Numeric Keys (0 - 9) Select any of the numeric keys to enter

the numerical values.
START Select the START key to start a batch

after it is setup.
STOP Select the STOP key to stop all the

running batches.
Navigation buttons Select the navigation buttons to move left,

right, up, or down to configure parameter
Navigation
buttons
entities in the device.
NOTE: The Negative symbol can’t be configured through

keyboard. Use LAD to configure the same. Long
press 0 key to enter decimal point from keyboard.

5.3.4 Navigation with Fusion4 IR Controller and Fusion4 LAD
5.3.4.1 Basic Navigation (Fusion4 IR Controller + Fusion4 LAD)
The basic navigation of the Fusion4 IR Controller, the Fusion4 LAD, and
the Integrated keyboard are identical. See FIGURE 5-6.
Fusion4 IR Controller Fusion4 LAD Integrated Keyboard
^ = Up
v = Down
< = Left
> = Right
OK = Select
ESC = Back
DEL (keyboard) =Clear
FIGURE 5-6 Basic navigation (Fusion4 IR Controller + Fusion4 LAD + Integrated keyboard)

5.3.4.2 LEDs (Fusion4 IR Controller + Fusion4 LAD)
Fusion4 IR Controller Fusion4 LAD
Button Description Button Description

send blinking Fusion4 IR status (dual-color) • green = OK
controller is ready • red = Fault
for operation.
data (amber) ON = data transfer
NOTE: When the
LED is OFF, select Note: Do NOT
the ATTN key on disconnect during
the LAD to “wake data transfer.
up” the Fusion4 IR test (dual-color) • green = mapped
controller. I/O function has
good health and
is active.
• red = mapped
I/O is inactive.
• red (blinking) =
mapped I/O has
bad health.
• off = no I/O
mapping exists.

5.3.4.3 Special Function Key (Only LAD)
• User-defined LAD functions such as

transferring transactions to the LAD,
display of the diagnostics screen, and
calibration wizard process can be
mapped to the F key.
• You can configure the special function

key through the HMI of the Fusion4
device.
Note: The Fusion4 LAD special function

key may not be applicable for all Fusion4
devices.
5.3.4.4 SD Card
NOTE: Format the SD card before using it for the first time.
See section 5.25.6 - Format SD Card, for more infor-
mation about formatting the SD card.

The LAD contains an SD card slot, which is located at the top, front face
of the LAD. See FIGURE 5-7.
FIGURE 5-7 SD card location in LAD (lid opened)
 The SD card uses a FAT file system to allow interpretability with

Microsoft Windows platforms.
 The SD card is used for the storage of the following:
 LAD firmware
 LAD license key
 Generic recipes
 Configuration templates
 Device firmware
 Language packs
 Transaction data
 Calibration data
 Configuration data
 Recipes
 Alarm logs
5.3.4.4.1 Product Type Selection
The selection of an SD card for the LAD is important. Due to the

intrinsically safe design of the LAD, the power drawn by the SD card is
strictly limited. For this reason, commercially available SD cards are

NOT recommended, as the specification and construction of these

devices change frequently.
The following cards are recommended by Honeywell Enraf.
Manufacturer Series Type Capacity Part Number
SanDisk Industrial SD 2GB SDSDAA-002G
Swissbit S-200 SD 1GB SFSD1024L4BN2SA-E-D1-131-STD
Pretec Industrial SD 1GB SDS001GSBHP
Transcend Industrial SDHC 2GB TS2GSD80I
STEC Industrial SD 1GB SLSD1GBBSIU
TABLE 6-1 Recommended SD cards
You are allowed to use SD cards not included in TABLE 6-1, but they
must conform to the following specifications.
Type SD or SDHC
Operating temperature -20 °C to +65 °C [-4 °F to +149 °½F]
Maximum current 70 mA
NOTE: Honeywell Enraf does NOT provide support for any

cards not listed in TABLE 6-1. Contact Honeywell
Enraf for more information.
NOTE: The miniSD and the microSD cards fitted in an SD

adaptor must NOT be used in the LAD.

5.3.4.4.2 Directory Structure and File Organization
FIGURE 5-8 Directory structure and file organization of the MSC-L
5.3.4.4.3 Guidelines
 All files have *.xml-format and -extention (except Firmware and
License).
 File name identification (file-ID) are as follows:
 T = Transactions
 C = Calibrations
 A = Alarm logs
 W = W&M logs
 D = Debug logs
 R = for Recipes
 File name format for Transactions are as follows:
 <device-type>-<serial number>-<file-id>-<transaction-id>.xml
 Example: MSC-L-54639823-T-0123456789.xml
 File name format for Calibrations are as follows:
 <device-type>-<serial number>-<file-id>-<calibration-id>.xml
 Example: MSC-L-54639823-C-0123456789.xml
 File name format for Alarm logs are as follows:
 <device-type>-<serial number>-<file-id>.xml

 Example: MSC-L-54639823-A.xml
 File name format for Debug logs are as follows:
 <device-type>-<serial number>-<file-id>.xml
 Example: MSC-L-54639823-D.xml
 File name format for Recipes are as follows:
 <device-type>-<file-id>-<recipe-name>.xml
 Example: MSC-L-R-E20.xml
 File name format for Configurations are as follows:
 <user defined string>.xml
 Example: MY_CONTROLLER_1.xml
REMARKS: 1. Generic files built/edited in a computer envi-

ronment can differ from the previous format.
2. Generic files built/edited in a computer envi-

ronment MUST BE PLACED in the corresponding
"Generic" folders as mentioned previously,
otherwise they cannot be selected during the
MSC-L -LAD interaction.
3. Firmware files MUST be placed in the corre-

sponding folders for the LAD and the MSC-L,
otherwise they cannot be selected during the
MSC-L-LAD interaction.
5.3.4.5 Language Packs
NOTE: The procedure to build a language pack for the MSC-

L will be available in a later release.
5.3.4.5.1 Building a Local Language Pack for the MSC-L
NOTE: The procedure to build a custom language pack for

the MSC-L will be available in a later release.
5.3.4.5.2 Configuring a User Display Language for the MSC-L
NOTE: The procedure to configure a user display language

for the MSC-L will be available in a later release.

Operation - Menu and Navigation
5.4 Menu and Navigation
5.4.1 General
The menu-based Human Machine Interface (HMI) on the MSC-L, is
intuitive and informative. With the HMI interface you can operate,
configure, and service the MSC-L.
The Main Menu consists of colored icons and logically structured sub-
menus.
5.4.2 Key benefits of the HMI on the Main Menu

Following are the key benefits of the menu-based HMI of the MSC-L.
 Clean, intuitive, and informative user interface.
 It is not necessary to memorize parameter codes and enumeration
value.
 Wizard-based configuration for meter calibration.
 Flexible I/O configuration.
 Diagnostic screens.
 Record-based approach to transactions, recipes, and calibrations to
make reuse possible.
 Interoperable with Fusion4 IR Controller, Fusion4 LAD, and the inte-
grated keyboard.
 Graphical user interface for Fusion4 LAD.
The following sections provide a brief explanation of the main menu
items and aspects.
5.4.3 Navigation Rules for the Menu-based Screens

Following are the navigation rules for the menu-based screens of the
MSC-L.
 By default, the Diagnostics icon is selected.
 When an entity is selected, a white color focus rectangle appears
around it.
 When a single stream is selected, the values for the entities of a
single stream are displayed on the screen.
 When a single arm is selected, the values for the entities of a single
arm are displayed on the screen.
 When all the streams are selected, the values for the entities are
displayed only if the values are the same for all the streams,
otherwise ‘.......’ appears for the entities on the screen.

5.4.4 Main Menu

The following table provides detailed information for the main menu
items on the MSC-L. For more details on the main menu items, see
FIGURE 5-9.
Item Description
Title bar The title bar is the horizontal bar at the top of the screen
that shows the name or description of the screen. For
example, Main Menu.
Title Hierarchy The title hierarchy is an arrangement of a particular set
of entities. The entities are separated from each other
by a dot (.).
Selected icon (focus The focus rectangle is used as an indicator of the
rectangle) selected entity.
Status bar icons The status bar icons provides information of the
selected icon. It also provides information about the
TAS communication, sealing, actual time, and the lock
icon.
Title
Main Menu Icon
Selected Icon
(focus rectangle)
Only available
if LAD is connected
Name of the selected

icon
FIGURE 5-9 Main Menu screens

5.4.5 Stream Selection
5.4.5.1 Product Streams
For some of the entities available in the MSC-L, for example, the
<Accumulated totals>, a specific product stream needs to be selected.
When the entity is selected, the respective screen appears, on which
you can select the required stream.
See the following screen for an example of the product stream
selection.
FIGURE 5-10 Product Stream Selection screen
5.4.5.2 Additive Streams
<Accumulated totals>, a specific stream needs to be selected for the
additive stream.

See the following screen for an example of the additive stream

selection.
FIGURE 5-11 Additive Stream Selection screen
5.4.5.3 External Additive Streams
<Accumulated totals>, a specific stream needs to be selected for the
external additive stream.
See the following screen for an example of the external additive stream
selection.

5.4.6 Arm Selection

For some of the entities available in the MSC-L, for example, the <Arm
Configuration>, a specific arm needs to be selected.
When this menu is selected, the respective screen appears, on which
you can select the required arm.
See the following screen for an example of the arm selection.
FIGURE 5-12 Arm Selection screen

5.4.7 Text Input Screen

See FIGURE 5-13 for a sample text input screen.
Title bar
Single line
edit field
Selected letter
Action message
Letters grouped
Numbers grouped
FIGURE 5-13 Text Input screen

5.4.8 Numeric Input Screen

See FIGURE 5-14 for a sample numeric input screen.
Single line
edit button
Numeric buttons
Hyphen button
Point button
Backspace button
Confirm button
FIGURE 5-14 Numeric Input screen
5.4.9 Enumeration Input Screen

See FIGURE 5-15 for a sample enumeration input screen.
Focus rectangle
Action message
FIGURE 5-15 Enumeration Input screen

5.4.10 Status Bar

The Status Bar is always visible on all screens and provides the
following information.
 Context specific information/directions to the user.
 Status of the connectivity (for example, the LAD or the IR
controller).
 Status of TAS.
 Actual time.
Optionally, the status bar also displays a seal icon.
 The seal icon is displayed when the MSC-L is configured as W&M
intended and compliant for W&M custody transfer operations. See
FIGURE 5-16 for an example of the status bar displaying the seal
icon.
 The seal icon is displayed with a black strikethrough when the
MSC-L is configured as W&M intended but not compliant for W&M
custody transfer operations. See FIGURE 5-17 for an example of
the status bar displaying the seal icon with a strikethrough.
 The seal icon is not displayed when the MSC-L is not configured
as not intended for W&M custody transfer. See FIGURE 5-18 for
an example of the status bar not displaying the seal icon.
LAD icon
Lock icon
Message bar TAS icon

Seal icon
(without strikethrough)
FIGURE 5-16 Status bar displaying the seal icon
LAD icon
Lock icon
Message bar TAS icon

Seal icon
(with strikethrough)
FIGURE 5-17 Status bar displaying the seal icon with a strikethrough

Operation - Device Security
TAS icon
LAD icon
Lock icon
FIGURE 5-18 Status bar without the seal icon
5.5 Device Security

A security level based access controls the activities, which a user can
perform using the MSC-L.
The MSC-L user management takes care of the following actions:
 Identify (entering a pin or providing a card).
 Authorize (check pin/card ID against the database and provide
access to the system).
 Register (store the latest login date and time).
You can perform the following activities.
 Operational activities (for example, vehicle loading and inspecting
the running screens).
 Service activities (for example, Configuration, Monitoring the
Alarms).
 Advanced service activities (for example, Upgrade Firmware, Add
the users).
Security level is assigned to the users in the database based on the
activities which can be performed by that user. There are three security
levels SL1, SL2, and SL3.
1. SL1 users generally are truck drivers, bay operators, and so on.
2. SL2 and SL3 users can be managers, service technicians, notified
body engineers, and so on.
3. SL3 users can add users into the database. MSC-L provides a
default user database with one ADMIN created with security level 3
privileges. The default password is 1234.

5.5.1 Security Levels (SL)

The following table lists the activities which are supported for each
security level.
Privilege (activities) SL 1 SL2 SL3
Loading operations P P P
Monitor alarms P P P
Change configuration O P P
Alarm handling (reset, acknowledge) O / (P) P P
See Note
Meter calibration O P P
Dashboard O P P
Person database configuration O O P
Upgrade firmware O O P
Restore to factory defaults O O P
Clear all memory O O P
All other activities O P P
NOTE: SL1 contains the lowest level of privileges.
If Allow reset alarm by SL1 is disabled (default

configuration) SL1 user is not permitted to reset or
acknowledge any of the alarms.
Alarm handling privilege can be granted to SL1 user

by enabling ‘Allow reset alarm by SL1’. These alarms
will exclude device alarms like ESD alarm, power
failure.
5.5.2 Rules of Navigation

A user with SL1 access can perform loading operations and monitor
alarms by navigating through the operational screens by typing the
correct password at the password entry prompt.
From anywhere, holding ESC key displays a login prompt. Only a user
with level SL2 or higher can go to the Main Menu by typing the correct
password when prompted.
A padlock symbol on the bottom right of the status bar indicates the
device status. For SL1 it is closed, SL2 and higher it is open. For one
arm and two arm systems a person icon with a check is displayed in the
left pane.
Each logon event is registered in the events log.
A user with higher security level overwrites the current session. But
when the user logs out, the user with lower security level can still
access it.

For example, if an SL1 user has entered the system and SL2/SL3 logs
in to reset the alarm, then SL2/SL3 escapes from the Main Menu and
logs out, yet the SL1 user can access it.
Transaction
Transaction Batch New batch? overview/ time-out:
Welcome Login End Thank you to welcome
setup setup
transaction?
Yes No No Yes
OK If: no batches
ESC
where possible, running If: alarm From anywhere in the
ESC: go back 1 screen Progress occurs Truck Driver screens
OK
OK: new batch, to
Truck Driver Alarms
if alarms: alarm ESC previous
screens ESC
overview
Back to From
previous anywhere hold OK hold OK
ESC hold ESC ESC ESC
Login for Login for Login for

main menu stream details alarm overview
From anywhere in the

Service Engineer ESC
screens hold ESC Main Menu ESC Stream Alarm ESC
ESC Logout?
details overview
No Yes
ESC OK
Service Engineer
screens
ESC OK
FIGURE 5-19 Rules of Navigation
NOTE: If you forget the password, JP2 of SW1 must be set

to ON on the CAN-HMI-MSC (see FIGURE 5-20).
Holding ESC key on the keyboard, allows you to

Operation - Device Commissioning
directly login to the Main Menu as a "Power User".

The event is registered in the events log.
CN9
C11
CN3
U6
U8
CN8 CN7
C10
C12
SW2
ON
U19
C1
1 2 3 4
U26
U28
U21
U18
JP8
JP7
JP10
JP9
U11 U10
6
5
SW1
4
3
2
6
ON
5
CN
1
CN
CN2 U9
+
CN4
FIGURE 5-20 SW1 on CAN-HMI-MSC board
5.6 Device Commissioning
5.6.1 Using the Menu

Commissioning of the MSC-L is performed by its menu-based interface.
You can select various submenus by using the Fusion4 IR Controller,
the Fusion4 LAD, or the keyboard and by starting from the Main Menu.
In this way all entities can be reached and set.
5.6.2 Menu Structure

The following images provide an overview of all the entities and the
parameters.
For the complete description of all possible configuration settings, see
FIGURE 5-21 - Loading application overview.

System
Configuration
Device A
Bay
Stream
Configuration
Product streams
B
Additive streams
External additive stream
Arm Configuration
Arm Configuration -
Arm Selection Identification
Arm 1 I/O binding
Arm 2 Control settings C
Arm 3 Product stream selection
Arm 4 Additive stream selection
Arm 5 External additive stream
Arm 6 Recipes
Alarms
Logs
Transaction
Calibration
Alarm
Events
Load Profiles
= level 1
Diagnostics
= level 2
Alarms
= level 3 Dashboard
System health
Process data
= level 4
Accumulated totals F
Board info
Storage info
Comms info
Device tasks
Maintenance
Advanced
Calibration
Wizard
Manual D
Info
Device Info
Status legend E
Transfer
Transaction records
Configurations
Events / Logs G
Calibration records
Load profiles
Recipes
Language packs
LAD
Firmware update
Test LED H
Function key
LAD information
Format SD card

5.6.2.1 System Configuration
Device Configuration
General
System Configuration I/O binding
Communication
A I/O settings
A1
Alarms
Authorization
Base conditions
Workflow settings
RIT Panel
Bay Configuration
Identification
I/O binding A2
Alarms
Permissives
Weighbridge settings

Device Configuration -
General
Device Configuration Identification
A1 A1-1
Units
Display
Time
Settings
I/O Binding
Inputs A1-2
Outputs
Communication
Serial
Ethernet
A1-3
IR HHC
I/O Settings
DI
PI
RTD
AI
AO
PO
EMR
Alarms
Next scheduled service
Programmable alarms A1-4
Deadman status
Permissives
Fixed
Authorization
General setup
Databases
A1-5
Base Conditions
Base temperature
Base pressure
Workflow Settings
Options
Prompts
A1-6
RIT Panel
Lamp status idle
Lamp status authorization
Lamp state wait ack
Lamp state wait start
Lamp state loading
Lamp state error

Device Configuration - Device Configuration

General - General
- Identification
A1-1 Site name
Device name
Device address
WnM intended (reboot
required)
- General - Units
Units of preset
Units of volume
Units of additive volume
Units of temperature
Units of pressure
Units of density
Units of mass
Device Configuration - Device Configuration
I/O Binding - I/O Binding - Inputs
Device Configuration Emergency shutdown
- General - Display A1-2 TAS - stand alone switch
General settings
Operational screen
Device Configuration Device Configuration

- General - Time - I/O Binding -
Date display format
Time display format
Outputs
Date Emergency stop
Time
Alarm indication
- General - Settings
Bay type (reboot required)
Acc. totals reset allowed
Max. allowed meter factor
deviation
Emulation type
Max. interrupts per batch
allowed
Max. alarms per batch allowed
Save average meter factor
Loading type
Rail Loading
Loadspot alarm 1 type
Loadspot alarm 2 type
Drain line activation time
Arm clean repetition counts

Device Configuration - Device Configuration Device Configuration -

Communication Serial Comms Alarms Device Configuration
COM-1 Alarms - Next
A1-4
A1-3 COM-2 scheduled service
COM-6 alarm action
COM-7 Next scheduled service
COM-3
COM-4
COM-5
- Alarms -
Programmable
Device Configuration Alar
Alarms
- Ethernet Prog
Programmable alarm 1
Programmable
Prog alarm 2
ETH
ETH-1 Programmable alarm 3
ETH
ETH-3 Programmable alarm 4
ETH
ETH-2
- Alarms - Deadman
Device Configuration Status
- IR HHC Deadman status
Deadman indicator
Long IR access Deadman bell
IR access Deadman callout
Deadman refresh switch
- Alarms -
Permissives
Timeout
- Alarms - Fixed
Power supply fault
Loss of TAS comms
Emergency stop
Loss of NEDAP Comms.

Device Configuration - Device Configuration Device Configuration - Device Configuration

Workflow Settings - Workflow Settings -
Authorization - Authorization - Options
General setup A1-6 Max. simultaneous loads
A1-5 Authorization mode Multiple loads per arm
Batch start
Authorization type Workflow selection
TAS timeout
Workflow mode
Use RIT panel
Allow reset alarm by SL1
Arm level Start for remote loading
Device Configuration Use loadspot RIT panel
- Authorization - Max. loadspots per cluster
Databases
User database
Objects database
- Workflow Settings -
Prompts
User Identification
Carrier identification
Vehicle identification
Trailer identification
Load number identification
Compartment identification
Return quantity entry
Preset entry
Preset unloading entry
Contract identification
Batch details prompt
Driver number identification
Queuing
Manual density entry
Nitrogen purging to truck
Nitrogen purging to open air
Release pressure
Recirculation
Bay Configuration -
Bay Configuration
Identification
A2
Bay name
Bay number
Bay Configuration -
I/O binding
A2-1
Inputs
Outputs
Bayy Configuration -
Alar
Alarms A2-2
Prog
Programmable alarms
Weighbridge Alarms
Bay Configuration -
Per
Permissives
Gro
Grounding
Overfill
Ove
Vapour recovery
Bay Configuration -
Weighbridge settings
Loading type
Steady status time
Maximum flow rate

Bay Configuration - Bay Configuration -

I/O Binding - Inputs Bay Configuration - Bay Configuration -
I/O Binding Alarms - Programmable
Alarms
Gro
Grounding Alarms
A2-1 Ove
Overfill A2-2 Prog
Vap
Vapour recovery Prog
Prog
Prog
Prog
Prog
Programmable alarm 6 Weighbridge Alarms -
Weighbridge Tolerance
Alarm action
Tolerance limit
Bay Configuration - Tolerance time
Bay Configuration - Weighbridge Alarms
Wei
I/O Binding
B - Outputs Weig
WeighbridgeTolerance
Weig
Weighbridge Comms.
Bay active Weighbridge Alarms -
Drai
Draining valve Weighbridge Comms
Rec
Recirculation valve Loss of weighbridge
comms.
Communication Timeout.
For information regarding the parameter and entity details, see section
5.17 - System Configuration.

5.6.2.2 Stream Configuration
Stream Config. - Product Stream Config.

Stream Configuration
n Product Stream - Stream n
Selection
Stream 1 All streams Identification
B I/O binding B1
Control settings
Volume conversion
Alarms
Stream 12
Stream Config. - Additive Stream Config.

Additive Stream - Stream n
Selection
Stre
. I/O binding B2
. Control settings
. Alarms
.
Stre
Stream 24
Stream Config. - External Additive

External Additive Stream Config. - Stream n
Stream
. Alarms B3
.
.
.
Stream 24

Product Stream Config.-

.- Product Stream Config. -
Stream n Stream n - Identification
Product name
B1
Main product
Vapour return

Stream n - I/O Bindings
Inputs
Outputs B1-1
Product Stream Config. -

Stream n - Control
Settings
Product control
B1-2
Valve control

Stream n - Volume
Conversion
B1-3
Conversion options
Lab observation data

Stream n - Alarms
Leaking valve
No product
No pump
No hydraulic pump B1-4
Block valve
Blend tolerance
Preset overrun
Valve fault
Volume conversion
Vaporizing
Vaporizing risk
Fixed


Product Stream Config. - Product Stream Config. - Stream n - Product
Product Stream Config. - Stream n - Inputs Control
Stream n - I/O Bindings Stream n - Control Settings
Product stream meter B1-2 Dead band (kdb)
B1-1 Product temperature Feed forward (kff)
Product pressure Integral (ki)
Product density Output (kout)
Proportional (kp)
Pump feedback
Pump rum timeout
Tank low level switch Hydr. pump run timeout
Tank empty switch Factored pulse out
Hydraulic pump feedback Block valve activation time
Block valve feedback Factored pulse width
Block valve open feedback Back pressure control
Block valve closed Vapor pressure margin
Pressure control range
feedback
factor
Product vapour pressure Pressure control ramp time
Rest flow quantity
Rest flow rate
Pre-Cooling temperature
Recirculation temperature
Stream n - Outputs
NO DCV
NC DCV Product Stream Config.-
Low flow 2SV Stream n - Valve
High flow 2SV
Pump demand Valve type
Block valve control Valve closing quantity
Hydraulic pump demand DCV period
DCV minimum pulse width
Factored pulse output Recirculation valve mode
Recirculation NO DCV ACV non-linearity factor
Recirculation NC DCV Low flow 2SV in initial phase
Analog control valve Low flow 2SV in pre-stop phase
Product Selected (Loadspot 1) Low flow 2SV in full flow phase
Product Selected (Loadspot 2) High flow 2SV in initial phase
High flow 2SV in pre-stop phase
Nitrogen Purging valve
High flow 2SV in full flow phase

Stream n - Conversion
Stream n - Volume Conversion Options
B1-3
Commodity group
Compensation used
Density input used
Range options
Derive manual status
Thermal correction
Vapor pressure source

Stream n - Lab Data
Observed density
Observed temperature
Observed pressure
Thermal expansion coeff.
Density reading correction
Mixture percentage
Mixture calc. option


Stream n - Alarms Leaking Valve
Alarm action
B1-4 Leaking quantity limit
Leaking timeout period
No P
N Product
d t
Alarm action
No product timeout
No P
N Pump
Alarm action
Pump feedback timeout
No Hydraulic Pump
Alarm action
Block Valve
Block valve fault
Block valve opening fault
Block valve closing fault
Block valve feedback
fault
Blend Tolerance
Alarm action
Tolerance limit
Preset Overrun
Alarm action
Overrun quantity limit
Valve Fault
Alarm action
Valve fault timeout
Volume Conversion
VCF out of range
Non-convergence
Supercritical fluid
No reference fluids
Memory allocation
Temperature out of
range
Pressure out of range
Density out of range
Alpha60 out of range
No solution
Illegal argument
Pressure comp. not
support
Bad sensor health
Vapourizing
Alarm action
Alarm hysteresis
Vapourizing Risk
Alarm action
Alarm hysteresis
Fixed
Pulse hardware
Pulse phase
Tank low level
Tank empty
Temperature sensor
Low temperature
High temperature
Pressure sensor
Low pressure
High pressure
Density sensor
Low density
High density
Meter exceeded max
flow
Factored pulse out

Additive Stream Config. -

Additive Stream Config.-
g.-
Stream n - Identification
Stream n
B2 Additive name

Stream n - I/O Bindings
Inputs
Outputs
B2-1

Stream n - Control
Settings
Additive control B2-2
Solenoid

Stream n - Alarms
Leaking valve
No additive
No pump B2-3
Block valve fault
Deviation
Fixed
Additive Stream Config. - Additive Stream Config. - Additive Stream Config. -

Stream n - I/O Bindings Stream n - Inputs Stream n - Additive
Additive stream meter Additive Stream Config. - Control
B2-1 Pump feedback Injection queue length
Stream n - Control Settings Injection volume
Tank low level switch
Tank empty switch B2-2 Factored pulse out
Additive temperature Feedback mode
Block valve feedback Feedback pulse duration
Pump run timeout
Block valve location
Factored pulse width
Permissive command
repetition
Stream n - Outputs
Solenoid control Stream n - Solenoid
Block valve control
Number of retries
Injection feedback
Close delay
Pump demand
Dwell time
Factored pulse out

Additive Stream Config.

g. -
Stream n - Alarms Leaking Valve
Alarm action
B2-3 Leaking quantity limit
Leaking timeout period
No Additi
N Additive
Alarm action
No additive timeout
No Pump
Alarm action
Block Valve Fault

Alarm action
Feedback timeout
Deviation
Alarm action
Add. volume deviation
Num. cycles for alarm
Fixed
Control fault
Solenoid fault
Pulse hardware
Pulse phase
Factored pulse out
Temperature sensor
Tank low level
Tank empty
Additive MMQ not met
Additive flowrate too low
5.18 - Stream Configuration.

External additive Stream

External Additive
Config. - Stream n -
Stream Config.- Stream n
Identification
B3
External additive name
COM port
Stream address
External Additive Stream

Config. - Stream n - Alarms
Fixed
Device offline
B3-1
External Additive Stream

Config. - Stream n - Alarmss Fixed
B3-1 Leaking valve
Flush volume
No Activity
No Additive
No Pump
Add. Volume deviation
Control fault
Solenoid fault
Pulse hardware
Tank empty
Ext. add. device firmware failure
Ext. add. device program failure
Device offline
Power failure
License error
Service due reminder
Device
D i offline
ffli
Alarm action
Device offline timeout

5.6.2.3 Arm Configuration
Arm Configuration
n Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Identification
C Arm name
Arm address
Arm location
Arm cluster
Arm status
Progress bar color
Loadspot 1 name
Loadspot 2 name
Loadspot 3 name
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - I/O Bindings C1
Inputs
Outputs
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Control Settings
General
C2
Preload sequence
Straight with VRU
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Product
Stream Selection
Stream 1
.
.
.
Stream 12
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Additive
Stream Selection
Stream 1
.
.
.
Stream 24
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - External Additive
Stream
Stream 1
.
.
.
Stream 24
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Recipes
01
02
03
.
.
.
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Alarms
Flow rate
Programmable alarms
Block valve fault C3
Preset overrun
Clean arm underrun
Stop switch not covered
Fixed

Arm Configuration - Arm Configuration -

Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Inputs Arm n - General
Arm Configuration - Arm n - Control Setting
Batch preset quantity
Arm n I/O Bindings Alarm reset C2 Loading type
RIT ack Batch initial quantity
C1 RIT start Batch pre-stop quantity
Batch clean arm quantity
RIT stop Minimum preset quantity
Block valve feedback Maximum preset quantity
Arm Parked Initial flowrate
Bay 1 in position Full flowrate
Bay 2 in position Pre-stop flowrate Low flow rate
High flow rate
Stop flow switch Batch preset evaluation
Low flow switch Batch full flow resume time
High flow switch Batch lineup time
Initial flow time
Auto high flow time
Auto high flow hold time
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Outputs
Outlet Arm Configuration -
Block valve control
Arm n - Preload sequence
Alarm indication
Alarm shutdown Pre-load sequence
Pump demand turn on time
Pum
Loading active Control valve turn on time
Con
RIT red lamp Loading arm feedback timeout
Loa
RIT green lamp Inlet valve turn on time
RIT amber lamp Outlet valve turn on time
Ready lamp
Slow flow indication
High flow indication
Arm Configuration -
Prestop indication
Arm n - Straight with VRU
Top loading valve (Outlet SDV 1)
Bottom loading valve (Outlet SDV 2) Vapour line open mode
Vapour line close mode
Outlet SDV 3 Vapour line open cond. (time)
Vapour line open cond. (qty)
Vapour line closed cond. (time)
Vapour line closed cond. (qty)
Pre-cooling quantity
Pre-cooling timeout
Pre-cooling flowrate
Arm Configuration - Recirculation timeout
Arm Configuration - Recirculation flowrate
Arm n - Alarms Arm n - Flow Rate Alarms
Initia flow rate
Initial
C3
Full flow rate
Pre-stop flow rate
Pre-
Arm Configuration -
Arm Configuration - Arm n - Programmanble
Arm n - Programmanble alarms
alar
alarms I/O binding
Programmanble
Prog
g alarm 1 Alarm action
Alar
Programmanble
Prog
g alarm 2 Alarm name
Alar
Programmanble
Prog
g alarm 3 Response time
Res
Programmanble
Prog
g alarm 4 Alarm activation (Idle)
Alar
Programmanble
Prog alarm 5 Alarm activation (Running)
Programmanble
Prog alarm 6 Alarm activation (Pause)
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Block Valve
Fau
u Alarm
Fault
Alarr action
Alarm
Fee
Feedback timeout
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Alarms -
Pres
s Overrun
Preset
Preset
Pres
s overrun limit
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Alarms -
Cle
ea Arm Underrun
Clean
Alarr action
Alarm
Clean arm tolerance
Clea
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Alarms -
Sto
Stop switch not covered
Alar action
Alarm
Stop switch timeout
Stop switch auto clear
timeout
Arm Configuration -
Arm n - Alarms -
Fixe
Fixed
Arm parked alarm action
Invalid switch states
Inva
5.19 - Arm Configuration.

5.6.2.4 Calibration
Calibration - Calibration -
Wizard/Manuall Arm Selection
D Arm 1
.
.
Arm 6
Calibration - Arm n -
Stream Type Selection
Product stream selection D1

Additive stream selection
Calibration - Manual Calibration - Arm n -

Product stream selection Product Streams
Stream 1
D1
Stream 2
...
Stream n
Calibration - Stream n -
Meter Profile -
Man
Manual
Cali
Calibration No
Meter Factor
Met
Flowrate
Fl
Edit Meter Profile -
Manual
D1-1 Calibration - Wizard Calibration - Arm n -
Add
Delete
Product stream selection Product Streams
Update
Stream 1
Save D1
Stream 2
...
Stream n
Meter Profile - Wizard
Cali
Calibration No
Meter Factor
Met
Flowrate
Fl
Edit Meter Profile -
Manual
Add D1-1
Delete
Calibrate
Save

Calibration - Calibration - Arm n -

Product Streamss Stream n - Wizard
Enter preset volume (L)
Ente
D1-1 Ente
Enter flowrate (L/min)
Set sstart delay (s)
Ente
Enter actual volume
Ove
Overview of the calibra-
tion
Cali
Calibration - Arm n -
Stream n - Manual
Stre
Ente flowrate (L/min)
Enter
Ente
Enter meter factor
Ove
tion
Calibration -
Calibration - Calibration - Arm n -
Stream n - Wizard
ms Additive Streams
Additive Streams
Ente preset volume (ml)
Enter
D1-1 Stream 1
Set start delay (s)
Stream 2
Prog
Progress
Ente
Enter actual volume (ml)
....
New meter factor
Stream n
Ove
tion record
Cali
Calibration -
Stream n - Manual
Stre
Ente new meter factor
Enter
New meter factor
Ove
tion record
5.22 - Calibration.

5.6.2.5 Info (Device Information)
Info - Device Info

Device serial number
Production date
Sales code
License
Info
E Mod
Module Info
Mod
Module name
Boot version
Appl
Application firmware version
Appl
Application build version
Seria
Serial number
Info - Status Legend
5.23 - Info (Device Information).

5.6.2.6 Diagnostics
Diagnostics -
Alarms
All alarms 0 Reset Ack
Diagnostics
stics
F
Dia
Diagnostics -
Dashboard
Das
Digi input
Digital
Digi
Digital output
Puls
Pulse input
Puls
Pulse output
Ana
Analog I/O
Diag
Diagnostics - System
Hea
Health
FM-A
FM-ARM-1
FM-I
FM-IN-OUT-1
FM-I
FM-IN-OUT-2 F1
FM-A
FM-ARM-2
FM-I
FM-IN-OUT-3
FM-I
FM-IN-OUT-4
FM-H
FM-HMI
Diag
Diagnostics - Process Diagnostics - Process
Data - Arm Selection Data
Arm 1 Product name
Arm 2 Transaction GOV
Arm 3 Flow rate
Arm 4 Additive name
Arm 5 Transaction GOV
Arm 6 PPM
Dia
Diagnostics -
Acc
Accumulated Totals
Loa
Loading bay
Loa
Loading arms
Rec
Recipes
F3
Prod
Product streams
Additive streams
Add
Diag
Diagnostics - Board
Info
FM-A
FM-ARM-1
FM-I
FM-IN-OUT-1 F2
FM-IN-OUT-2
FM-I
FM-A
FM-ARM-2
FM-IN-OUT-3
FM-I
FM-IN-OUT-4
FM-I
FM-H
FM-HMI
Dia
Diagnostics - Storage
Info
Tota space
Total
Fre
Free space
Tran
Transaction records
Cali
Calibration records
Alar
Alarm records
Eve
Event records
Loa
Load profile records
Diag
Diagnostics - Comms
Info
Seria
Serial F4
Ethe
Ethernet
Diag
Diagnostics -
Dev
Device Tasks
Rese tasks
Reset F5
Exec
Execute tasks
Clear tasks
Clea
Diag
Diagnostics -
Mai
Maintenance
Swit count
Switch
Pow
Power supply info
Dia
Diagnostics -
Adv
Advanced
Loa profile
Load F6
W&M info
W&
General stream info
Gen

Diagnostics - Diagnostics -
Board info FM-ARM-1
System Health FM-ARM-1 F2 Last occured error
F1 RS
Last occured warning
JP1 - W & M Seal
JP2 - Password protection
Batch control JP3 - Unused
Additive stream JP4 - Unused
JP5 - Unused
Product stream JP5 - Unused
Pulse inputs
Digital outputs Name
Status
Pulse outputs Current
Module control Main
Min
RTD Max
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Ethernet FM-IN-OUT-1
Last occured error
JP1 - W & M Seal
JP3 - Unused
FM-IN-OUT-1 JP4 - Unused
JP5 - Unused
JP5 - Unused
DI-DC Name
DI-AC Status
DO-EMR Current
DO-SSR Main
Module control Min
Max
AO
FM-IN-OUT-2
Last occured error
FM-IN-OUT-2 JP1 - W & M Seal
JP3 - Unused
DI-DC JP4 - Unused
DI-AC JP5 - Unused
JP5 - Unused
DO-EMR
DO-SSR Name
Module control Status
Current
AO Main
Min
Max
FM-ARM-2
FM-
-ARM-2 FM-ARM-2
FM ARM 2
Last occured error
RS Last occured warning
Batch control JP1 - W & M Seal
Additive stream JP3 - Unused
Pulse inputs JP4 - Unused
Digital outputs JP5 - Unused
JP5 - Unused
Product stream
Module control Name
Status
RTD Current
Analog inputs Main
Analog outputs Min
Max
Ethernet
FM-IN-OUT-3
Last occured error
FM-IN-OUT-3 JP1 - W & M Seal
JP3 - Unused
DI-DC JP4 - Unused
DI-AC JP5 - Unused
DO-EMR JP5 - Unused
DO-SSR Name
Module control Status
AO Current
Main
Min
Max
FM-IN-OUT-4 FM-IN-OUT-4
Last occured error
DI-DC Last occured warning
DI-AC JP1 - W & M Seal
DO-EMR JP3 - Unused
DO-SSR JP4 - Unused
Module control JP5 - Unused
AO JP5 - Unused
Name
Status
Current
Main
Min
FM-HMI Max
RS
Device manager FM-HMI
Alarm manager Last occured error
Transaction manager Last occured warning
Display manager JP1 - W & M Seal
Authorization manager JP3 - Unused
Bay control JP4 - Unused
JP5 - Unused
Arm control JP5 - Unused
Transaction control
Name
LAD manager Status
Module control Current
Ethernet Main
Min
Max

Diagnostics - Accu. Totals Accumulated Totals

Diagnostics - - Product streams - Product Stream n
s
Accumulated Totals Transaction GOV
Stream 1 All streams Leak GOV
F3 . Calibration GOV
. Total GOV
Transaction GSV
Stream 12 Leak GSV
Calibration GSV
Total GSV
Transaction Mass
Leak Mass
Calibration Mass
Total Mass
Diagnostics - Accu. Totals Accumulated Totals -

- Additive streams Additive Stream n
Stream 1 All streams Transaction GOV
. Leak GOV
. Calibration GOV
Total GOV
Stream 24

- Ext. Additive streams Ext. Additive Stream n
Stream 1 All streams Transaction GOV
. Leak GOV
. Total GOV
Stream 24

- Loading bay Bay n
Bay 1 GOV
Bay 2 GSV
Mass

- Loading arms Arm n
Arm 1 GOV
Arm 2 GSV
Arm 3 Mass
Arm 4
Arm 5
Arm 6

- Recipes Arm n
Arm 1 GOV
Arm 2 GSV
Arm 3 Mass
Arm 4
Arm 5
Arm 6
Diagnostics - Diagnostics - Comms

Info - Serial
Comms Info
Port ID
F4 F4-1
Protocol
Received
Transmitted
Diagnostics - Comms
Info - Ethernet
Port ID F4-2
Received
Transmitted

Diagnostics - Diagnostics - Reset tasks

Device tasks Re-enable device
F5 Reset device
Reset to factory settings
Format all memory
Format NOVRAM
Clear all totals
Diagnostics - Execute Diagnostics - Arm n -

Task - Arm Selection Execute Tasks
Pause batch
Arm 1 Resume batch
Res
. Stop batch
. End transaction
.
Arm 6
Diagnostics - Clear tasks
Loading bay
Loading arms F5-1
Recipes
Product streams
Additive streams
Diagnostics - Load profile

Diagnostics - - Arm Selection
Advanced Arm 1
F6 Arm 2
Arm 3
Arm 4
Arm 5
Arm 6
W&M Information -
Product Stream n
Commodity group
Diagnostics - W&M info -
Tables reference
Stream Selection
Stre Base temperature
Stre
Stream 1 All streams Base pressure
. Com
Compensation used
. ...........................................
......
Obs
Observed temperature
Stre
Stream 12 Observed pressure
Observed density
...........................................
Base density
CTPL (VCF)
Dia
Diagnostics - General
stream info
stre General Stream info -
Stream Selection
- St Product Stream n
Stre
Stream 1 All streams
. Pulse phase
.
Stream 12

Diagnostics - COM-n - Diagnostics - ETH-n -

Settings Settings
Diagnostics - Comms Protocol Diagnostics - Comms IP address
Info - Serial Baudrate Info - Ethernet Subnet mask
Parity Gateway address
F4-1 Data bits F4-2 DNS address
Stop bits DHCP enabled
Link speed
Diagnostics - COM-n - Physical address
Status
Diagnostics - ETH-n -
Status Status
Packets received
Packets sent Status
Parity errors Packets received
Overrun errors Packets send
5.21 - Diagnostics.

5.6.2.7 Transfer
Transfer - Transaction
Transfer Records
G Range of records
Single record
Transfer -
Configurations
Install configuration
Retrieve configuration
Retrieve configuration &
databases
Retrieve device info
Transfer -
Events / Logs
Retrieve alarm logs
Retrieve event logs
Transfer -
Calibration Records
All records
Range of records
Single record
Transfer - Load Profiles

All records
Range of records
Single record
Transfer - Recipes
Install recipe
Retrieve recipes
Transfer - Language
Packs
Select File
5.24 - Transfer.

5.6.2.8 LAD Functions
LAD - Firmware
LAD Update
H Fusion4 device
LAD
LAD - Test LED

QPI
DO-SSR
PO
COM
RTD
AI
ETH
DI-DC
LAD - Function Key

None
Retrieve last 1000
transaction records
Retrieve all calibration
records
Retrieve alarm log
Reset device
Re-enable device
Screen capture
Long Hold ESC
Long Hold OK
LAD - LAD Information

Serial number
SD card memory
NVRAM memory
Voltage
Temperature
Hardware version
Application version
Bootloader version
LAD - Format SD card
NOTE: - The language settings are applicable at a workflow level and
are available for use after restarting the MSC-L device..

Operation - Loading Application Overview
5.7 Loading Application Overview

The typical usage of the MSC-L is for normal loading and the other
specific application types are described in the next chapters.
NOTE: FIGURE 5-21 illustrates the loading application for

each stream. This overview is also applicable for 6
Arms.
Load recipe
- IR remote/LAD
- comms
Alarm shutdown Alarm indication

- hard wired - hard wired
- comms - comms
Pump start Pump feedback

Analog Load, Blend, Load, Blend, Additive

Additive Volume Volume Output
Output -- hard wired
-- hard wired - comms
Hydraulic pump Hydraulic pump

feedback (HPP) start (HPP)
Pressure input Temperature input

- hard wired (AI) - hard wired (RTD, AI)
Density input W&M (MID) sealing

- hard wired (AI) - FlexConn jumper
- LAD
Volume conversion System interlock

- API tables (ESD, Dead man)
- mass calculation - hard wired
- manual density (IR
remote/LAD,comms
Permissive Programmable
- hard wired (AI) alarms
- comms - hard wired inputs and
alarm outputs
Strainer
St i status
t t Emergency stop
Blend flow pulses
- hard wired (S-PI, Q-PI)
Solenoid control
- hard wired (2 x DO)
Bay barrier Loading active
Main stream flow Additive flow pulses

pulses - hard wired (S-PI, Q-PI)
Bay active Bay light
- hard wired - hard wired (S-PI, Q-PI) Solenoid control - hard wired
Solenoid control - hard wired (DO)
- hard wired (2 x DO)
Loading arm parked Loading arm in

- hard wired
position
- hard wired
Tank
T k empty
t Tank low level
Block valve Block valve

control feedback
Alarm reset Dead man outputs

- comms
- Fusion4 IR contr./ LAD
FIGURE 5-21 Loading application overview

Operation - Unloading Application Overview
5.8 Unloading Application Overview

The Fusion4 MSC-L supports unloading (offloading) application.The
unloading assemblies cover a range of requirements, starting with
simple single-unit, standalone unloading skids for the emptying of road
tankers and transferring product from vehicle to site storage.
The MSC-L have a configuration parameter to configure the device for
unloading with preset or unloading without preset.
These systems can be fully automated with dual redundancy,
integrating multiple functions into the offloading process such as de-
aeration, denaturing, additivation or blending. Multiple metering
technologies can be utilized in these systems including positive
displacement and Coriolis for custody transfer, with both local and
remote data reconciliation. Ethanol and biodiesel offloading can be
facilitated from both road tanker and rail car, as can LPG.
During unloading operation, the MSC-L controls the centrifugal pump,
flow meter, direct control valve, high flow switch, low flow switch, stop
flow switch, and dry run switch. Refer to the figure 5-22 for unloading
product flow.
NOTE: when a centrifugal pump is used the flow rate may be

adjusted by using a digital control valve. But, when a
positive displacement valve is used the flow rate may
not be controlled by a DCV. However, by configuring
a two stage valve, the two provided control signal
may be used by device external to the MSC-L to
derive the proper frequency to control the pump.
Unloading product Ňow
Centrifugal NRV
Unloading Pump
by gravity
Inlet High Ňow switch
(upper)
Dry run
Switch Low Ňow switch
(middle)
Stop Ňow switch DCV

Flow meter NRV
(lower)
ConĮgure “Dry run switch” to a programmable
alarm that needs to be set to:
Outlet
- Alarm acƟvaƟon (idle) = AcƟve
- Alarm acƟvaƟon (running) = AcƟve
- Alarm acƟvaƟon (pause) = AcƟve MSC-L controls:
- Pump
- Flow meter Product storage tank
Air Eliminator - DCV
- High Ňow switch
- Low Ňow switch
- Stop Ňow switch
- Dry run switch
FIGURE 5-22 Unloading application overview

Operation - Unloading Application Overview
To configure a MSC-L device for unloading the product:

1. Configure device
System Configuration .Device. I/O Settings. PI . QPI-n [Minimum linear flow
rate] = <0.0>
System Configuration .Device. Workflow Settings. Options. [Multiple loads
per arm] <Disabled>
System Configuration .Device. Workflow Settings. Options. [Preset
Unloading Entry] <Disabled / mandatory> choice.
2. Configure Arm
Arm Configuration. Arm X.Control Settings [Loading type] = <Unloading>
Arm Configuration.Arm X.Control Settings [Low flow rate] = <300> (or as
required)
Arm Configuration. Arm X. Control Settings [High flow rate] = <1800> (or as
required)
Arm Configuration. Arm X.Control Settings [Batch initial quantity] = <1> (any
non zero value is required)
Arm Configuration.Arm X.Control Settings [Batch pre-stop quantity] = <0>
Arm Configuration.Arm X.Control Settings [Batch clean arm quantity] = <0>
Arm configuration .Arm X .IO binding .Input. [Stop flow switch] <DI-DC xx>
configure if used
Arm configuration .Arm X .IO binding .Input. [Low flow switch] <DI-DC xx>
configure if used
Arm configuration .Arm X .IO binding .Input. [High flow switch] <DI-DC xx>
configure if used
3. Configure Alarms
Stream Configuration. Product streams. Stream x . Alarms . No Product
[Alarm action] = <Disabled>
(If flow switches are not used, No product alarm can be set to Display
shutdown so that unloading can be stopped when flow is stopped.
Arm Configuration. Arm x. Alarms .Stop switch not covered. [Stop flow
switch auto clear time out] = <10>
Arm Configuration. Arm X . Alarms. Fixed.[Invalid switch states] = <Display
pause>
Refer section 5.19.3.1 for more details on Flow Switches.

Operation - LPG Loading Application Overview
5.9 LPG Loading Application Overview

Fusion4 MSC-L supports Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) road loading.
Liquefied petroleum gas or liquid petroleum gas (LPG or LP gas), also
referred to as simply propane (C3H8) or butane (C4H10), or a mixture of
those 2 propane and butane are flammable mixtures of hydrocarbon
gases used as fuel in heating appliances, cooking equipment and
vehicles.
MSC-L also supports loading a blend of propane and butane which may
be required over changing climatic conditions. A typical blend can
include 60-70% butane and 30-40% propane along with additives
(odorants like ethanethiol,l ethyl mercaptan) for leak detection. LPG has
a boiling point that depends on the vapour pressure, the temperature
and the composition of it. LPG evaporates quickly at normal
temperature and pressures so it must be kept pressurized, and a MSC-
L device helps you to control the vapour pressure.
FIGURE 5-23 Application overview - LPG loading
The pressure in the delivery line is monitored/controlled to be above the

vapour pressure to avoid LPG vaporization and, where possible, to
optimize truck loading time. Fusion4 MSC-L supports configuration with
independent external “back pressure” regulator valve (not shown) as
well as configuration where the “normal” flow control valve (DCV) is
used to prevent from LPG vaporizing by reducing prescribed flow rate
when pressure approaches vapour pressure.

FIGURE 5-24 LPG running screen
NOTE: If external “back pressure” regulator valve is to be

used, configure “Vapour pressure source” to
“Externally controlled” and “Vapour pressure margin”
to match the setting of the external pressure
regulator valve. In this case Fusion4 MSC-L back
pressure control will be disabled and “Vapour
pressure margin” (together with delivery line
pressure) will be used to derive vapour pressure.
When Fusion4 MSC-L is configured to perform back pressure control,
“Vapour pressure margin” functions as a safety margin, while “Pressure
control range factor” parameter is used to adjust “Maximum limit point”
and provides means to adjust range where “back pressure control” is
active.
The “Minimum limit point” is a calculated pressure value where it is
considered that the product may start vaporizing. The flow must
completely stop at this pressure level:
Minimum limit point = 1.0 * Vapour pressure (measured) + Vapour
pressure margin
Minimum limit point = 1.1 * Vapour pressure (calculated)+ Vapour
pressure margin
NOTE: The additional 10% ‘safety’ margin applies in the

case of ‘Calculated’ vapour pressure to cater for
potential errors disclosed in MPMS 11.2.5 standard
(used for deriving vapour pressure).

The “Maximum limit point” is the point where “back pressure control”
starts throttling down flow rate. This point is above the “Minimum limit
point” and it can be adjusted via “Pressure control range factor”
parameter:
Maximum limit point = Minimum limit point * (1.0 + Pressure control
range factor)
NOTE: If the product vapour pressure (required for back

pressure control) cannot be determined for some
reason, for example in case of ‘Calculated’ vapour
pressure configuration and VCF calculations raising
exception, the flow rate target will be adjusted to zero
for safety reasons.
Back pressure control is implemented by applying a 'Setpoint
Adjustment Factor' (calculated) to the product flow rate setpoint. When
target setpoint is switched and if back pressure control is active, the
effective setpoint will be gradually changing (converging) from previous
value to a new value during the configured 'Pressure control ramp time'
interval, therefore smoothing out flow/pressure dynamics. An example
of Load Profile showing ‘ramping’ up when back pressure control is
active is shown in the figure below.
FIGURE 5-25 Load Profile showing ‘ramping’ up when back pressure control is active
For safety reasons, Fusion4 MSC-L features a number of alarms.

Relevant alarms can be configured and triggered if the flow rate is
reduced below meter’s “Minimum linear flow rate”. There are also
configurable pressure alarms that warn you about dropping pressure
conditions. MSC-L devices also support configurable pressure alarm
hysteresis in order to avoid oscillation of an alarm around the alarm
threshold.

To configure a MSC-L device for LPG loading with no external ‘back

pressure’ regulator valve:
1. Enable [Back Pressure Control].
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream n . Control
settings . Product control . [Back Pressure Control] = <Enable>
2. Configure [Vapour pressure margin], [Pressure control range factor] and
[Pressure control ramp time]
Settings . Product Control . [Vapour pressure margin]
Settings . Product Control . [Pressure control range factor]
Settings . Product Control . [Pressure control ramp time]
3. Configure LPG as the commodity that’s delivered through a product
stream.
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream n . Volume
conversion . Conversion options . [Commodity group] = <TP27-07 (NGL &
LPG)>
4. Select <Temperature & pressure> as the type of compensation used
during the calculation of GSV and mass.
conversion . Conversion options . [Compensation used] = <Temperature
& pressure>
5. Select the [Vapour pressure source].
conversion . Conversion options . [Vapour pressure source] =
<Calculated> or <Measured>
If [Vapour pressure source] is configured as <Measured>, then additional
configuration item needs to be set:
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream n . I/O
bindings . Inputs . [Product vapour pressure] = <AI-x>
NOTE: The chosen AI will be used with vapour pressure

sensor and should be configured accordingly.
6. Enable mass loading and configure the mass flow rate.
NOTE: The vapour return line can only be used with a mass
flow meter to measure the quantity correctly. This
means that only loading by mass is supported when
using a vapour return line.
System Configuration . Device . I/O Settings . PI . QPI-xx . [Meter
Type] = <Mass>

System Configuration . Device . I/O Settings . PI . QPI-xx .

[Minimum linear flow rate] = <0.0 kg/min>.
NOTE: The vapour return line is not a controlled stream, but

only monitored.
7. Enable Vapour return
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream x . Identifi-
cation . [Vapour return] = <Enable>
8. Configure alarms
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream x . Alarms . No
Product . [Alarm action] = <Disabled>.
NOTE: A regular stream is used as vapour return line, which

means that all features that are part of a stream can
be used, like the block valve.
9. Configure a loading arm
Arm Configuration . Arm x . Control Settings . [Loading type] =
<Straight with VRU>
10. Select a recipe
Arm Configuration . Arm x . Recipes
NOTE: Add the vapour return line as blend 1 with the blend
ratio of zero percent in the recipe to enable the
feature.

Operation - LNG Loading Application Overview
5.10 LNG Loading Application Overview
5.10.1 About LNG Loading

Liquefied natural gas (LNG) is a natural gas composed predominantly
of methane (CH4) with some mixture of ethane (C2H6). It is used for
energy and power generation. LNG vaporizes very quickly and it has a
very low boiling point. So it is always stored in a highly cooled cryogenic
vessel and maintained at a temperature of about - 160 °C.
Fusion4 MSC-L supports LNG loading for single bay and dual bay
loading operation. LNG loading can be done stand alone (local loading)
or remotely by Terminal Automation System.
5.10.2 MSC-L Licenses

LNG loading can be used on the following MSC-L licenses:
 MSC-L1
 MSC-L1D
 MSC-L2D
 MSC-XL1
 MSC-XL2
5.10.3 LNG Loading using MSC-L

Special operations used for LNG Loading are:
 Nitrogen purging to truck
 Release truck pressure
 Recirculation
 Truck loading process
 Pre-cooling
 Normal loading (Initial, Full flow, Pre-stop flow)
 Nitrogen purging to open air

The following figure represents the LNG loading operations using MSC-
L.
7776
7 7
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ5 66ÿ78ÿ9:;:ÿ
)"ÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ<8ÿ=;8ÿ>8>:ÿ
*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ678ÿ?8=@ÿ>8>:ÿ
"*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿA B Cÿ?8=@ÿ>8>:ÿ
&*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿD:==C8;ÿ?8=@ÿ>8>:ÿ
.*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿE ÿ?8=@ÿ>8>:ÿ
*"ÿÿ*ÿ73ÿBCÿ678ÿ?8=@ÿ>8>:ÿ
"*" *""ÿ*ÿ73ÿBCÿA B Cÿ?8=@ÿ>8>:ÿ
"#$%ÿ&!'(
"#$%
ÿ
*"" "#$%ÿ12
ÿ!
ÿ
+'% !( ÿ,4
*"
3 3
*" ÿ12

ÿ
)"
2$ 3ÿ*ÿF:9Bÿ?:7:ÿ<GAÿ7ÿ678ÿBB:8:ÿ
&*" .*" 3ÿ*ÿH:66C:ÿ?:7:ÿ<GAÿ7ÿ678ÿBB:8:ÿ
ÿ*ÿA B ÿ;:9B:;C:ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%(ÿ+(! ÿIÿA B ÿB:66C:ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%( ÿ*ÿF:9Bÿ7;:ÿ7;:ÿ<GAÿ7ÿ678ÿBB:8:Jÿ
ÿIÿH:66C:ÿ7;:ÿ<GAÿ7ÿ678ÿBB:8:Jÿ
ÿ
.#+(ÿ+(! KÿFFL0ÿ ÿHFL0ÿ:ÿC6: ÿ7ÿ>:1FMNÿBCB 6:ÿ8Oÿ

.#+(ÿ/!#0! ÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿ
FIGURE 5-26 LNG loading using MSC-L

5.10.3.1 Nitrogen purging to truck
The following figure represents the operation of Nitrogen purging to

truck using MSC-L.
7776
77
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ@ ::ÿ=7ÿA9<9ÿ
6 )"ÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿB7ÿ;<7ÿC7C9ÿ
*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ678ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
"*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿF > 8ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
&*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿG9;;87<ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
.*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿH ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
*"ÿÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿ678ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
"*" *""ÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿF > 8ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
"#$%ÿ&!'(
"#$%
ÿ
*"" "#$%ÿ12
ÿ!
ÿ
+'% !( ÿ,4
*"
3 3
*" ÿ12

ÿ
)"
2$ 3ÿ*ÿI9A>ÿD9=9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
&*" .*" 3ÿ*ÿK9::89ÿD9=9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ*ÿF > ÿ<9A>9<89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%(ÿ+(! ÿLÿF > ÿ>9::89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%( ÿ*ÿI9A>ÿ=<9ÿ=<9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿLÿK9::89ÿ=<9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ
55ÿ6789ÿ79:ÿ ;<9ÿ=78 ÿ> ::ÿ<?8?ÿ<?9ÿ>>9:ÿÿ

.#+(ÿ/!#0! .#+(ÿ+(!
ÿ
FIGURE 5-27 LNG Loading - Nitrogen purging to truck
Before the truck loading process starts, gaseous nitrogen purging is

required to clean the vapour and loading arm line.
During the nitrogen purging to truck process, MSC-L opens the
[Nitrogen purging valve] in liquid line N2-LV and vapour line N2-VV.
NOTE: In the nitrogen purging to truck process, MSC-L

opens and closes N2-LV and N2-VV automatically,
but the driver/operator should take care to open and
close the purge valve that are in the truck until the
liquid and vapour arm are cleaned.

5.10.3.2 Release truck pressure
Generally, truck arrives at the loading station in warm condition with

higher pressure in the compartment than desired. So, it will need to
undergo release truck pressure’ operation to relieve the pressure.
The following figure represents the release truck pressure operation
using MSC-L
7 7776
77
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿH ::ÿ=7ÿA9<9ÿ
6 )"ÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿC7ÿ;<7ÿI7I9ÿ
*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ678ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
"*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿE ? 8ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
&*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿK9;;87<ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
.*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿL ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
*"ÿÿ*ÿ73ÿ?8ÿ678ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
"*" *""ÿ*ÿ73ÿ?8ÿE ? 8ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
"#$%ÿ&!'(
"#$%
ÿ
*"" "#$%ÿ12
ÿ!
ÿ
+'% !( ÿ,4
*"
3 3
*" ÿ12

ÿ
)"
2$ 3ÿ*ÿ@9A?ÿB9=9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ??979ÿ
&*" .*" 3ÿ*ÿF9::89ÿB9=9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ??979ÿ
ÿ*ÿE ? ÿ<9A?9<89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%(ÿ+(! ÿGÿE ? ÿ?9::89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%( ÿ*ÿ@9A?ÿ=<9ÿ=<9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ??979ÿ
ÿGÿF9::89ÿ=<9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ??979ÿ
ÿ
55ÿ6789ÿ79:ÿ ;<9ÿ=78 ÿ=7ÿ<>8>ÿ<>9ÿ??9:ÿÿ

.#+(ÿ/!#0! .#+(ÿ+(!
ÿ
FIGURE 5-28 LNG Loading - Release truck pressure
MSC-L releases the truck pressure by opening the vapour line valve (V-
V). Vapour present in the truck shall pass through the vapour return line
block.
NOTE: MSC-L does not record the vapour return quantity in

the release truck pressure state.
5.10.3.3 Recirculation
If the LNG truck filling operation is not taking place for a longer period of
time, generally LNG line will get warmed up, so LNG needs to
recirculate from the storage tank to the metering skid and back to the
tank to maintain the flow meter at a suitable cryogenic temperature to
prevent loss of accuracy.

The following figure represents the LNG recirculation operations using

MSC-L
7777 7

6
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ@ ::ÿ=7ÿA9<9ÿ
)"ÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿB7ÿ;<7ÿC7C9ÿ
*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿ678ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
"*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿF > 8ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
&*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿG9;;87<ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
.*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿH ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
*"ÿÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿ678ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
"*" *""ÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿF > 8ÿD7;EÿC7C9ÿ
"#$%ÿ&!'(
"#$%
ÿ
*"" "#$%ÿ12
ÿ!
ÿ
+'% !( ÿ,4
*"
3 3
*" ÿ12

ÿ
)"
2$ 3ÿ*ÿI9A>ÿD9=9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
&*" .*" 3ÿ*ÿK9::89ÿD9=9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ*ÿF > ÿ<9A>9<89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%(ÿ+(! ÿLÿF > ÿ>9::89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%( ÿ*ÿI9A>ÿ=<9ÿ=<9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿLÿK9::89ÿ=<9ÿBJFÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ
55ÿ6789ÿ79:ÿ ;<9ÿ=78 ÿ> ::ÿ<?8?ÿ<?9ÿ>>9:ÿÿ

.#+(ÿ/!#0! .#+(ÿ+(!
ÿ
FIGURE 5-29 LNG Loading - Recirculation
If the LNG line temperature (TT#1) is warmer (more than [Recirculation

temperature]), MSC-L gives the user an option to start the recirculation
until desired temperature is reached.
During the recirculation mode, [Recirculation valve] (R-V) is opened,
and Liquid line valve (L-V) is closed to recirculate the LNG from the
storage tank to the metering skid and back to the tank.
MSC-L controls the flow control valve (FCV) with configured
[Recirculation flowrate] throughout the recirculation state. The
recirculation batch gets completed when the LNG line temperature is
cooled to [Recirculation temperature] or below.
When the recirculation batch is started/resumed, the recirculation timer
is started. If the LNG line temperature (TT#1) is still more than
[Recirculation temperature] even after [Recirculation timeout] is
elapsed, the ‘Recirculation temp. not reached’ alarm is raised.

After resetting the alarm, you can resume or stop the recirculation
batch.
MSC-L records the recirculation batch as a separate batch in the
transaction record. This batch record shall have a Recirculation field
with its value set to True.

5.10.3.4 Truck loading process
The following figure represents the LNG truck loading operations using
MSC-L
7777 7

6
)"ÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿC7ÿ;<7ÿI7I9ÿ
"*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿE > 8ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
*"ÿÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿ678ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
"*" *""ÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿE > 8ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
"#$%ÿ&!'(
"#$%
ÿ
*"" "#$%ÿ12
ÿ!
ÿ
+'% !( ÿ,4
*"
3 3
*" ÿ12

ÿ
)"
2$ 3ÿ*ÿ@9A>ÿB9=9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
&*" .*" 3ÿ*ÿF9::89ÿB9=9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ*ÿE > ÿ<9A>9<89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%(ÿ+(! ÿGÿE > ÿ>9::89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%( ÿ*ÿ@9A>ÿ=<9ÿ=<9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿGÿF9::89ÿ=<9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ
55ÿ6789ÿ79:ÿ ;<9ÿ=78 ÿ> ::ÿ<?8?ÿ<?9ÿ>>9:ÿÿ

.#+(ÿ/!#0! .#+(ÿ+(!
ÿ
FIGURE 5-30 LNG Loading - Truck Loading Process
From the start of the truck loading process, MSC-L enters a pre-cooIing
state if the ‘Pre-cooling flowrate’ is set to non-zero value. Pre-cooling is
a truck filling process where a very low flowrate is maintained until
loading arm and vapor arm are in proper temperature range. This is
done in order to reduce the vaporization and enable better accuracy for
the flowmeter reading.
After the pre-cooling state, normal loading process is followed (initial
flowrate, full flowrate, pre-stop state).
Pre-cooling state is based on:
 Quantity, or
 Temperature

Pre-cooling – Quantity Based

If configured [Pre-cooling quantity] is a non-zero value and configured
[Pre-cooling temperature] of both LNG and vapour streams are zero
values, pre-cooling is done based on the quantity as follows:
 Start loading with ‘Pre-cooling flowrate’
 Continue with Pre-cooling flowrate (pre-cooling state) until delivered
quantity reached [Pre-cooling quantity]
Pre-cooling – Temperature Based
If the configured [Pre-cooling temperature] of either the LNG stream or
the vapour stream is a non-zero value, pre-cooling is done based on
temperature as follows:
 Start loading with [Pre-cooling flowrate]
 Continue with [Pre-cooling flowrate] (pre-cooling state) until both the
LNG and the vapour streams are cooled to a temperature less than
or equal to their configured [Pre-cooling temperature] values.
When a batch is started, the pre-cooling timer starts with configured
[Pre-cooling timeout] value. If the LNG line temperature (TT#1) or
vapour line temperature (TT#2) is still more than [Pre-cooling
temperature] even after the pre-cooling time is elapsed, MSC-L raises
Pre-cooling temp. not reached alarm.
If [Pre-cooling timeout] is set to zero value, MSC-L does not check or
raise the Pre-cooling temp. not reached alarm and continues loading
with [Pre-cooling flowrate].
After the pre-cooling state, the normal load profile state (initial flowrate,
full flowrate, and pre-stop flowrate) is followed until the delivered
quantity reached the preset quantity.

The following figure represents the load profile graph for LNG truck
loading operations using MSC-L
ÿÿ

6

)*$$ÿÿ
)$&!
-.44ÿ/101
%&$ÿ
-04)$ 10&!1
4ÿ/
!"# $ÿ
-5.)$ 10&!1
4ÿ/

!"# $ %&$
-.4ÿ/1 -044ÿ/1 -04!4"+&
ÿ/,1 '!(&ÿ)$
-.4ÿ/1
FIGURE 5-31 LNG Loading - Load profile
When the [Vapour line open mode] and [Vapour line close mode]
parameters are set to <Pressure based (LNG)>, the loading operation is
done as follows:
 If Vapour pressure (PT#2) is in between [L alarm threshold] and [HH
alarm threshold]
 Continue normal loading operation
 Operate Flow Control Valve (FCV) based on target flowrate
 Keep LNG line valve (L-V) open
 Keep Vapour return valve (V-V) open
 If Vapour pressure (PT#2) is less than [L alarm threshold]

 Continue normal loading operation
 Operate Flow Control Valve (FCV) based on target flowrate
 Keep LNG line valve (L-V) open
 Close Vapour return valve (V-V)
 If Vapour pressure (PT#2) is less than [LL alarm threshold]

 Pause the loading batch and raise alarm
 Close Flow Control Valve (FCV)
 Close Liquid line valve (L-V)
 Close Vapour return valve (V-V)

 If vapour pressure (PT#2) is more than [HH alarm threshold]

 Pause the loading batch and raise alarm
 Keep Vapour return valve (V-V) open
 In pause state, MSC-L monitors Vapour line pressure (PT#2) and
keeps Vapour return valve (R-V) open until the Vapour pressure
(PT#2) falls below [H alarm threshold].
 If Vapour pressure (PT#2) is more than LNG line pressure (PT#1)
 Pause the loading batch and raise ‘Vaporizing’ alarm
 Close Vapour Return Valve (V-V)
5.10.3.5 Nitrogen purging to open air
The following figure represents the operation of Nitrogen purging to

open air using MSC-L.
7776
7 7
)"ÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿC7ÿ;<7ÿI7I9ÿ
"*"ÿÿÿÿÿÿ*ÿE > 8ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
*"ÿÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿ678ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
"*" *""ÿ*ÿ73ÿ>8ÿE > 8ÿB7;JÿI7I9ÿ
"#$%ÿ&!'(
"#$%
ÿ
*"" "#$%ÿ12
ÿ!
ÿ
+'% !( ÿ,4
*"
3 3
*" ÿ12

ÿ
)"
2$ 3ÿ*ÿ@9A>ÿB9=9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
&*" .*" 3ÿ*ÿF9::89ÿB9=9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ*ÿE > ÿ<9A>9<89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%(ÿ+(! ÿGÿE > ÿ>9::89ÿ
&!*)+,-#'+%( ÿ*ÿ@9A>ÿ=<9ÿ=<9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿGÿF9::89ÿ=<9ÿCDEÿ=ÿ678ÿ>>979ÿ
ÿ
55ÿ6789ÿ79:ÿ ;<9ÿ=78 ÿ> ::ÿ<?8?ÿ<?9ÿ>>9:ÿÿ

.#+(ÿ/!#0! .#+(ÿ+(!
ÿ
FIGURE 5-32 LNG Loading - Nitrogen purging to open air

After the truck loading process is complete-, the loading arm line can be
cleaned by purging gaseous nitrogen.
When user chooses to proceed with the process of Nitrogen putging to
open air, MSC-L opens the nitrogen purge valve in the LNG line (N2-
LV). Operation drain line (D-V) is as follows:
 If [Drain line activation time] or [Arm clean repetition counts]
parameters are non-zero values, MSC-L will close and open the
drain line valve (D-V) repeatedly. The number of repetitions is
determined by [Arm clean repetition counts] parameter. The duration
for which the D-V stays open/close is determined by the [Drain line
activation time].
5.10.4 LNG Loading Configuration

The following section describes the configurations required for LNG
loading.
1. Configure workflow prompts [Nitrogen purging to truck], [Nitrogen
purging to open air], [Release pressure] and [Recirculation]
System Configuration . Device . Workflow Settings . Prompts .
[Nitrogen purging to truck] = <Enable/Disable>
[Nitrogen purging to open air]= <Enable/Disable>
[Release pressure] = <Enable/Disable>
[Recirculation] = <Enable/Disable>
2. Configure [Draining valve] (D-V) and [Recirculation valve] (R-V)

System Configuration . Bay x . I/O Bindings, Outputs. [Draining
valve] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>

System Configuration . Bay x . I/O Bindings, Outputs. [Recircu-

lation valve] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>
Draining valve and recirculation valve are separately configured for

each bay in the case of dual bay loading operation.
3. Configure [Drain line activation time] and [Arm clean repetition
counts]
Stream Configuration . Device . General settings . [Drain line acti-
vation time] = <15 sec>
Stream Configuration . Device . General settings . [Arm clean
repetition counts] = <0 to 9>
4. Enable mass loading and configure the mass flow rate.

NOTE: The vapour return line can only be used with a mass
flow meter to measure the quantity correctly. This
means only loading by mass is supported when
using a vapour return line.
System Configuration . Device . I/O Settings . PI . QPI-xx . [Meter
type] = <Mass>
System Configuration . Device . I/O Settings . PI . QPI-xx . [Minimum
linear flow rate] = <0.0 kg/min>.
NOTE: The vapour return line is not a controlled stream, but

can only be monitored.
5. Enable Main product for LNG product stream
cation . [Main product] = <Enable>
6. Enable Vapour return

cation . [Vapour return] = <Enable>

7. Configure Alarms
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream x . Alarms . No
Product . [Alarm action] = <Disable>.
NOTE: As a regular stream is used as vapour return line, all

the features (like a block valve) that are part of a
stream can be used.
8. Configure a Loading arm
Arm Configuration . Arm x . Control Settings . General . [Loading
type] = <Straight with VRU>
9. Select a Recipe
Arm Configuration . Arm x . Recipes
NOTE: Add the vapour return line as blend 1 with the blend
ratio of zero percent in the recipe to enable the
feature.
10. Configure [Pre-cooling quantity], [Pre-cooling timeout], [Pre-cooling
flowrate], [Recirculation timeout] and [Recirculation flowrate]
Arm Configuration . Arm x . Control Settings . Straight with VRU
. [Pre-cooling quantity] = <50.00 kg>
. [Pre-cooling timeout] = <60 sec>
. [Pre-cooling flowrate] = <150.00 kg/min>
. [Recirculation timeout] = <10 min>
. [Recirculation flowrate] = <100.00 kg/min>

11. Configure [Vapour line open mode] and [Vapour line close mode]
. [Vapour line open mode] = <Pressure based (LNG)>
. [Vapour line close mode] = <Pressure based (LNG)>
12. Configure [Block valve control]
bindings . Outputs . [Block valve control] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-
EMR-x>
[Block valve control] output of LNG and vapour stream used for LNG
line valve (L-V) and vapour line valve (V-V) respectively.
13. Configure [Nitrogen purging valve]
bindings . Outputs . [Nitrogen purging valve] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x,
DO-EMR-x>

For flow control, any one among Digital Control Valve (DCV), Analog
Control Valve (ACV), Two-stage valve can be used.
14. Configure [Pre-cooling temperature] and [Recirculation temperature]
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream n . Product
control . [Pre-cooling temperature]
Stream Configuration . Product streams . Stream n . Product
control . [Recirculation temperature]

5.10.5 LNG Loading Operations

This section describes the local loading sequence on MSC-L for LNG
loading.
NOTE: In remote loading, except start prompt, all the

prompts shall be taken care by TAS by sending
workflow prompt commands.
To perform the LNG loading:
1. On the MSC-L Welcome screen, press OK.
2. The Select arm screen appears.

3. Press OK. The Select recipe screen appears.
4. Press OK. The Enter preset screen appears.

5. Enter the quantity of the product that must be loaded into the LNG
truck trailer and then press OK.
If [Nitrogen purging to truck] workflow prompt enabled, the Nitrogen
purge to truck screen appears.
6. Select Yes to proceed for Nitrogen purging to truck.

The Nitrogen purging to truck active screen appears.

7. Press OK to complete Nitrogen purging to truck.

If [Release pressure] prompt enabled, the Release pressure screen
appears.
8. Select Yes to proceed for release truck pressure.

The Pressure release active screen appears.

9. Press OK to complete the Release truck pressure.

If [Recirculation] workflow prompt enabled and LNG line temperature
(TT#1) > [Recirculation temperature] (default -160°C), the Recircu-
lation screen appears.

10. Select Yes, the Press START for Recirculation screen appears.
In the recirculation, max preset quantity configured in the arm control

setting is considered as preset quantity for the recirculation batch.
The recirculation batch is automatically stopped when the desired
temperature is reached.
11. Press START to proceed for recirculation.
The Recirculation Progress screen appears.
“Recirculation Progress” indicates that recirculation batch is in

progress.
12. After the recirculation batch is completed, the Load another
compartment screen appears.

13. Select Yes if you wish to load LNG to the truck.
14. Press START to proceed with LNG filling to truck.

The LNG Load progress screen appears.

Long press OK to see the process data details.
15. After the filling is completed, Load Another compartment (Yes/No)

prompt appears. On selecting No, the transaction details screen
appears.

The first batch shows the recirculation batch details and the second
one is the normal truck loading batch.
16. Press OK to complete the transaction.
If [Nitrogen purging to open air] workflow prompt enabled, the
Nitrogen purge to open air screen appears.
17. Select Yes to proceed for [Nitrogen purging to open air].

The Nitrogen purge to open air active screen appears.

18. Press OK to complete the [Nitrogen purging to open air].

The transaction is successfully completed.

Operation - Dual Bay Loading Application Overview
5.11 Dual Bay Loading Application Overview
5.11.1 About Dual Bay Loading

Fusion4 MSC-L has a dual bay loading feature. This feature enables
multiple users to use the load computer at the same time to load two
different trucks simultaneously; where for each bay/ truck, a transaction
is running/active.
A single operator or a maximum of two truck drivers can use an HMI
and an MSC-L device to perform dual bay loading. However, the two
truck drivers must sequentially operate the device (entering the input
data, setting up batches, and so on). Since multiple batches can be
started at the same time, two transactions run in parallel/simultaneously.
A dual loading bay supports fixed arms and swing arms. A swing arm
can be used on both bays by swinging the arm from one bay to another.
A fixed arm that is fixed to one side of the bay can also be used to
realize dual bay loading. A maximum of 4 arms are supported; where
the arms are either swing arms or fixed arms or a mix of them.
Dual bay loading can be done stand alone or remotely by Terminal
manager.

Following are the licenses for MSC-L to enable dual bay loading:
 MSC-L1D
 MSC-L2D
 MSC-L3D
 MSC-XL1
 MSC-XL2
 MSC-XL3
 MSC-XL4
NOTE: You cannot perform dual bay loading if the license is

for 5 or 6 arms.
5.11.3 Dual Bay Loading using MSC-L

The following figure represents the dual bay loading operations using
MSC-L.

FIGURE 5-33 Dual Bay Loading using MSC-L
5.11.4 Authorization Modes supported for Dual Bay Loading

The following modes of authorization are supported for dual bay
loading:
 Two card readers - a card reader for each bay
 A common card reader for both the bays
 A PIN per user entered using the MSC-L keyboard
5.11.5 Dual Bay Configuration

The following section describes the configurations required for dual bay
loading.
To configure dual bay, perform the following:
1. On the System Configuration. General screen, select Settings.
2. On the System Configuration. General. Settings screen, select
Bay type (reboot required).

For more information on the entities, refer to chapter 5.17.1.1.5 "System

Config . Device . Settings"
The following screen appears.
3. Select the bay type as Dual Bay.

4. After you change the bay type, restart the device manually for the
changes to take effect.
After the device is restarted, the two bays are displayed in the user
interface.
5. Select the required bay.

6. Press OK to select the required bay, and continue configuring the
bay.

7. On the System Configuration . Bay . n . Bay screen, select Identi-

fication.
8. Select the System Configuration. COM-n . Authorization. The

following screen appears.

9. On the System Configuration. COM-n. Authorization screen,

select Loading Bay.
10. On the System Configuration . COM-n . Loading Bay screen,

select one of the following:
 Bay 1: If the integrated card reader is applicable only for Bay 1.
 Bay 2: If the integrated card reader is applicable only for Bay 2.
 None: If the integrated card reader is common to both Bay 1 and
Bay 2.
11. Select the Main menu . Arm Configuration . Arm .n .
12. On the Arm Configuration . Arm . n . screen, select Identification.

13. On the Arm Configuration . Arm . n . Identification screen, select

Arm Location.
14. On the Arm Config. Arm . n . Arm Location screen, select one of
the following:
 Bay 1: If the selected arm is associated to Bay 1
 Bay 2: If the selected arm is associated to Bay 2.
 None: If the selected arm is a swing arm.
NOTE: If any arm is selected as a swing arm, then perform

steps 15 to 17.
15. Select the Main menu . Arm Configuration . Arm . n . I/O bindings.
Inputs. The following screen appears.

16. On the Arm Configuration . Arm . n. I/O bindings. Inputs screen,

select Bay 1 in position.
17. Select the required I/O binding for the selected bay.
If Bay 1 in position is Active, then the arm is in position at Bay 1; else,
the arm is not in position at Bay 1. Similarly, if Bay 2 in position is Active,
then the arm is in position at Bay 2; else, the arm is not in position at
Bay 2.
The following table describes the various arm statuses based on the
values configured for Bay 1 in position is Active and Bay 1 in position is
Active parameters.
Bay 1 in Bay 2 in
Arm Status
position position
Active Active This scenario cannot occur.
An alarm “Swing arm invalid position” is
displayed
Not Active Active Loading can begin at Bay 2
Active Not Active Loading can begin at Bay 1
Not Active Not Active The loading arm is parked or in transition.

18. On the Diagnostics screen, select Accumulated totals.

The Diagnostics. Accumulated Totals screen appears.
19. On the Diagnostics. Accumulated Totals screen, select Loading

bay.

20. On the Diagnostics. Accumulated Totals . Loading bay screen,

select Bay 1.
The following details are displayed.

 GOV: The Gross Observed Volume of the product.
 GSV: The Gross Standard Volume of the product.
 Mass: The mass of the product.
21. On the Main Menu screen, select Logs. The Logs screen appears.
22. On the Logs screen, select Events and then select OK on the IR
controller or the LAD. The Logs. Event Log screen appears.
All the event logs are displayed.

The configurations required for the dual bay loading are successfully
completed.

5.11.6 Dual Bay Loading Operations

Fusion4 MSC-L has a dual bay loading mechanism. Dual bay loading
enables multiple users to use the load computer at the same time.
NOTE: You cannot perform dual bay loading if the license is

for 5 to 6 arms.
To perform dual bay loading:
The Select bay screen appears.
2. Select the required bay and then press OK.

The Select arm screen appears.

3. Select the arm that must be used for loading and then press OK.
The Select recipe screen appears.
4. Select the recipe that must be loaded and then press OK.
The Enter preset screen appears.

5. Enter the quantity of the product that must be loaded into the
compartment and then press OK.
The following details are displayed on the right pane.

 Recipe name: The name of the product that is being loaded into
the compartment.
 Compartment: The compartment to which the product is being
loaded.
 Arm name: The name of the arm that is being used for loading the
product.
 Preset: The quantity of the product to be loaded.
6. Press Confirm. The following screen appears.

7. Press Start. The loading starts and the following screen appears.
8. If you want to load another compartment, press Yes. Repeat steps

from 2 to 7.
Or
If you do not want to load another compartment, press No.
9. Select the loading bay and then press OK.
The following details are displayed on the right pane.

 Compartment: The compartment to which the product is being
loaded.
 Recipe name: The name of the product that is being loaded into
the compartment.
 Load GSV: The gross standard volume of the product loaded.
 Mass: The mass of the product loaded.

 Load GOV: The gross observed volume of the product loaded.

After the transaction is complete, the Transaction details screen
appears.
10. If you want to end the transaction, press Yes. The transaction is
successfully completed.
NOTE:
 Permissives per bay: Grounding, Overfill, Vapour (DI).
 Transaction records are created simultaneously per bay.
 Fusion4 Portal prints the first finished transaction first.
 The workflow is identical for each bay. However, the workflow is
executed independent from each other.
 The STOP button on the keyboard pauses all running arms on both
bays with the ability to stop or resume the arms per “HMI bay focus”.

Operation - Weighbridge Loading Application Overview
5.12 Weighbridge Loading Application Overview
5.12.1 About Weighbridge Loading

A weighbridge is used to weigh road vehicles. The load carried by the
vehicle is determined by calculating the difference between its laden
weight and unladen (tare) weight.

Weighbridge loading is supported on all licenses of MSC-L. Loading
can be done on one Arm per bay.
5.12.3 MSCL loading using weighbridge

MSCL supports weighbridge-based mass loading with no blend or
additive. MSC-L currently supports communication with Mettler Toledo
weighbridge controllers using ‘Standard Continuous Output’ protocol via
serial communication (RS-485) when configured to output weight in
Kilograms.
Weighbridge is supported in both single and dual bay operation with
one weighbridge per bay. Weighbridge can be configured to act as
either the primary or secondary measuring device. When configured as
primary, the mass measured by the weighbridge is the one used for
loading and recorded as mass in the transaction record. When both
weighbridge and pulse-based mass flowmeter are available, the device
can be configured to generate an alarm when the difference between
the mass measured by the weighbridge and the flowmeter vary by more
than the configured amount. In this case, Weighbridge can be
configured as either the primary or secondary measuring device. When
configured as secondary, the reading from the pulse-based mass
flowmeter shall be used for loading and recorded as mass in the
transaction record.

The following figure represents the operation of MSC-L loading using

weighbridge.
01223 &'()*+,(-)'
./ ,.##',

!" !"

ÿ

#$%$
&4$567$54
FIGURE 5-34 MSC-L loading using weighbridge
5.12.4 Weighbridge configuration

The following section describes the configuration required to use
Weighbridge based loading:
1. On the Main Menu screen, select the Device Configuration icon.
Select Communication, Serial and COM-n where COM-n is the port
to which Weighbridge is connected to.
2. On the Device Configuration . COM- n screen, select Setup.
3. Set the [Communication protocol] as <Weighbridge>.

4. Set and match each of the communication parameter ([Baud rate],

[Parity], [Data bits] and [Stop bits]) values with the weighbridge that is
connected to the same COM port.
5. On the System Configuration . Communication . Serial . COM- n.
Authorization screen, select the [Loading bay] as <Bay 1>. (For Dual
bay you can assign <Bay 1> or <Bay 2> as applicable)
NOTE: In dual bay operation, the two weighbridges on each

bay shall be connected to separate COM ports. Care
must be taken to ensure the right bay number is
assigned to the Loading bay parameter. Having
same bay number assigned to multiple COM ports
with Weighbridge protocol selected can lead to unde-
sirable behavior.

6. On the System Configuration . General . Units screen, select the

[Units of preset] as <Mass>.
7. On the System Configuration . Bay-n . Weighbridge Settings

screen, set Weighbridge [Loading type], [Steady status time] and [Maximum
flowrate]. When only weighbridge is available, the [Loading type] must be
set to <Primary>. When both weighbridge and mass flowmeter are
available, the [Loading type] for weighbridge may be set to <Primary> or
<Secondary> Before starting to load, weighbridge should be in steady
state for a certain period which has to be configured as weighbridge
[Steady status time].
In Stream Configuration . Product - n . Inputs, set [Product stream

meter] as <QPI> when mass flowmeter is available. If only weighbridge
is used, set it to <None>.

8. On the System Configuration . Bay . Bay-n . Alarms Screen,

Select Weighbridge Alarms.
9. Select Weighbridge tolerance alarm. In the screen that appears,

set the desired value for [Alarm action], [Tolerance limit] and [Tolerance time].
When both weighbridge and mass flow meter are available for mass
measurement, this alarm shall be raised when the difference
between the two measurements exceeds the configured tolerance
value for the configured duration of time.

10. In System Configuration. Bay. Bay-n. Alarms. Weighbridge

alarms screen, select Weighbridge comms. In the screen that
appears, set the desired value for [Alarm action] and [Communication
timeout]. This alarm shall be raised when there is no packet published

by the weighbridge for the configured duration of time.
11. In System Config . Device . General . Display . Operational

screen, <Tare weight> and <Truck weight> are available among
parameters that can be displayed in the dynamic labels.

12. In System Config . Device . Workflow settings . Prompts, set

[Compartment identification] to <Disable> as only one compartment is used
when loading with weighbridge.

13. In System Config . Device . Workflow settings . Options, set

[Multiple loads per arm] to <Disable>.
5.12.5 Weighbridge Loading Operations

To perform Weighbridge loading operation:
2. The Select arm screen appears.

3. Select the arm that must be used for loading and then press OK. The
Select recipe screen appears.
4. Select the recipe that must be loaded and press OK.

The Enter preset screen appears.

5. Enter the quantity of product that must be loaded and Press OK.
6. If the Batch details prompt is enabled, the Batch details screen will
appear as below.
7. Press Confirm. If the Weighbridge status is unstable (moving), the

Waiting for steady state screen shall be shown until the weigh-
bridge status becomes stable.

The weighbridge is determined to be in steady state if the corre-

sponding bit in the weighbridge publish message indicates steady
state for a duration of time set in the [Stady status time] parameter.
8. Once the Weighbridge state becomes steady, the Press START
screen appears. This screen shall also show the batch details in
case the batch details prompt is disabled. At this stage, the weight
indicated by the weighbridge is saved as the Tare weight.
9. Press START to start the loading and Load progress screen

appears.

10. If both weighbridge and mass flow meter are used and the difference
between the mass measured exceeds the configured [Tolerance limit]
for the duration of [Tolerance time], then the [Weighbridge tolerance
exceeded] alarm is generated which appears as shown below.
11. If there are no output packets from the weighbridge received for the
configured [Communication timeout], The [Weighbridge comms failure] alarm
is generated which appears as shown below.

12. Once the load is complete, the Transaction details screen appears
Press Yes to End the transaction

13. The Tare weight, Truck weight (at the end of loading) and the Weigh-
bridge loading type can be viewed in the batch record.

Operation - Interfacing With External Additive Controller
5.13 Interfacing With External Additive Controller

Starting from release R340 (A2420), MSC-L supports interface to
external additive controller like MSC-A over RS485. This enables usage
of external additive streams in MSC-L batches.
FIGURE 5-35 MSC-L to MSC-A interface over RS485

5.13.1 Connecting External Additive Controllers

This section provides information about connecting external additive
controllers like the MSC-A.
5.13.1.1 Topology and Wiring
To connect the external additives,

 Loading arms running on Arm board 1 of MSC-L can use COM1 or
COM2 ports. External additive streams 1-12 are on Arm Board 1.
 Loading arms running on Arm board 2 of MSC-L can use COM6 or
COM7 ports. External additive streams 13-24 are on Arm board 2
The communication uses FMC Smith protocol that needs to be
configured on the COM ports of both devices.
FIGURE 5-36 Block Diagram for MSC-L to MSC-A interface communication

5.13.2 Configuring External Additive Controller

This section describes how to configure the External Additive Injectors
of MSC-A to interface with MSC-L. Other external additive controllers
like SSC-A, MP6 or MP3000 can be configured in a similar way.
5.13.2.1 Device Configuration - Communication
To perform the device configuration - communication

1. On the Main Menu screen, select the Device Configuration icon.
The Device Configuration screen appears, which displays the
functions available for device configuration.
2. On the Device Configuration - COM-n screen, select <Setup>.

3. Set the <Communication protocol> entity value as <FMC Smith>.

4. Select and match the each entity (Baud rate, Parity, Data bits &
Stop bit) values with MSC-L port at the other end of line.

5.13.2.2 Stream Configuration
To perform the stream configuration

1. On the Main Menu screen, select the Stream Configuration icon.
The Stream Configuration screen appears, which displays the
functions available for stream configuration.
5.13.2.3 Stream Configuration - Stream n
5.13.2.3.1 Stream Configuration - Stream n - Identification

1. On the Stream Configuration - Stream n screen, select
<Identification>.
CAUTION! When the MSC-A stream is used as external additive

stream on the MSC-L, care needs to be taken to
ensure the same address is configured on the MSC-L.

2. On the Identification screen, set the <Stream address> entity value

matching with the external additive stream address entity value in
MSC-L.
5.13.2.3.2 Stream Configuration - Stream n - I/O Bindings

1. On the Stream Configuration - Stream n - I/O Bindings screen,
select <Inputs>.
2. Set <Pacing source> and <Permissive> entity values as <Comms>.

3. Set <Additive stream meter> entity value that is used.
5.13.2.3.3 Stream Configuration - Stream n - Control Settings

1. On the Stream Config - Stream n - Control Settings screen, select
<Additive Control>.

2. On the Stream Config - Stream n - Additive Control screen, set

<Additive mode> entity value as <Smart>.
5.13.2.3.4 Stream Configuration - Stream n - Alarms
It is recommended to choose the alarm action on MSC- A as display

and choose the required action on MSC L. This will cause the action to
apply to whole batch and the streams that it contains and not just the
additive stream.
When any alarm is cleared from MSC-A, it will automatically be cleared
from MSC-L screen as well. If a no activity timeout alarm on the MSC-A is
cleared from the MSC-L, a disable permissive command shall be sent to
that stream if there is no batch with that stream running on the MSC-L.
5.13.3 Configuring MSC-L

This section describes how to configure the MSC-L to interface with
External Additive Injector.
To connect the external injectors,
 Use COM1 or COM2 ports for External Injectors 1 - 12.
 Use COM6 or COM7 ports for External Injectors 13 - 24.
5.13.3.1 System Configuration
To perform the system configuration

1. On the Main Menu screen, select the System Configuration icon.
The System Configuration screen appears, which displays the
functions available for system configuration.
2. On the System Configuration screen, select <Device> to configure

the MSC-L.

3. On the System Config - COM-n screen, select <Communication

protocol>. The following screen appears.
4. Set Communication protocol as <FMC Smith>.
5.13.3.2 External Additive Stream Configuration
See chapter 5.18.3 "Stream Configuration - External Additive streams"

for more information on configuring external additive streams.
5.13.3.3 Arm Configuration
See chapter 5.19 "Arm Configuration" for more information on

configuring external additive streams.
In the Recipe Configuration, external additives can be selected just like
Internal additives.
The additives available for recipe will now list all the external and
internal additives associated with the arm.
Selecting the external additive for an arm triggers polling of that external
additive stream. Communication status can be checked in Comms. Info
in the diagnostics menu.
See, chapter 5.19.7 "Arm Configuration . Arm n . Recipes" for more
information.
The injection offset for external additive as well as internal additive is
fixed as 50%. This means the very first injection will start at half of the
pacing quantity followed by a gap of pacing quantity. The injection offset
setting in the external additive controller is not used when used as
external additive on MSC-L.

5.13.4 Loading
When a recipe that includes external additive streams is selected during
batch planning, MSC-L writes the additive injection volume and volume
per inject cycle to the external additive controller. The injection volume
and number of injections required are calculated using clean arm
volume for the arm and pacing volume and ppm for the additive stream
from the selected recipe.
By pressing START button on MSC-L, it starts the load on MSC- L and
also starts transaction on the external additive controller for the injectors
that are part of current load.
The loading screen remains same for batches with external additive.
5.13.4.1 Process Data
Process data screen lists all the streams in the transaction. Transaction
volume of each stream is listed here.
Long press OK button shows process screen while loading. The MSC-L
polls the transaction data for MSC-A streams while loading and
updating process details.
The external additive streams are listed along with internal additive
streams in process data.
The additive transaction volume and ppm values can be viewed on
Process data screen. The visible value can have an error of +/- 1 ml as
decimal part of the volume on the external additive controller is not
available to the MSC-L over Comms.

The details of transaction data and injection history can be seen in

detailed screen of each additive stream.
Display of external additive flow-rate and temperature on MSC-L is not

supported.
The Additive Progress screen of MSC-A is shown below. The Load
value shown on MSC- A is not measured from pulses received by the
MSC-A. It is calculated based on the number of ‘inject now’ commands
received (Load Volume = No. of ‘inject now’ commands * Volume per
inject cycle). It does not account for clean line volume. The ppm value
shown in MSC-A is also based on the calculated load volume. Other
external additive controllers like SSC-A or MP6 shall have progress
screens that show similar information.

5.13.4.2 Transaction Details
The transaction logs structure is not changed and the external additive
stream data is available in the transaction log as shown in the below
screens.
In Batch details, the loaded quantity for each external additive and
respective PPM calculation is listed.
In Stream details section, the additive name, accumulated start and stop
GOV, stream GOV, PPM and Deviation % can be viewed.

To calculate ppm, MSC-L uses the ratio of delivered additive volume

sent by external additive controller to the total delivered product load
volume. The deviation % is computed based on the deviation between
the delivered additive volume and the expected additive volume till the
point where the batch was stopped.
5.13.4.3 Alarm Handling for External additive streams
Alarms from external additive controller will be polled by MSC-L and

displays on MSC-L. When an alarm occurs, a batch which is in progress
pauses or stops based on the alarm action set on the MSC-L. The alarm
parameters like “No activity timeout”, “deviation %” and “No additive
timeout” to be set on the external additive controller.
5.13.4.3.1 Setting Alarm Actions

 Alarms on external additive controller can be reset from MSC-L. All
alarms related to the stream can be cleared at once.
 The alarm will reappear if the alarm condition still persists.
 The MSC-L sends Disable Injector and Clear Alarm commands
before starting transaction.
 Alarm action on external additive controller should be set as Display.
The MSC-L will have the required action (like, Display pause or
Display Shutdown).
NOTE: If injection command rejected alarm is configured

with an alarm action of display pause, desired
additive qty may not be met for the batch if this alarm
occurs and batch is resumed.

5.13.4.3.2 External Additive Alarms Generated by MSC-L
5.13.4.3.2.1 Device offline alarm
The device offline alarm occurs if the external additive controller does
not respond to any commands sent for that stream for the configured
timeout. When this alarm is cleared, a disable permissive command is
sent to the external additive controller if the alarm action is configured to
Display shutdown. If Permissive command repetition is disabled in
external additive controller, then it can generate Injector command
rejected alarm while clearing the device offline alarm if there is no
transaction in progress for that stream on the external additive
controller. This alarm can be cleared.
The device offline alarm will also be raised when communication can be
established with external additive within given time. This alarm will not
be generated if the external additive is not associated with any of the
arms.
5.13.4.3.2.2 Injector command rejected alarm
When external additive controller does not recognize the command sent
by MSC-L or it is not in correct state to execute the command, it rejects
the command with an error code resulting in injector command rejected
alarm on MSC-L. For more information on Error Code, refer chapter
“FMC Smith Protocol” in “Fusion 4 Communication Manual”.
Example: If disable injector command is sent when no transaction is in
progress, the external additive controller rejects the command. The
error code for the command rejection can be viewed in alarm log.
5.13.4.3.2.3 Batch additive deviation alarm
Batch additive deviation alarm is generated only at the end of the batch.
The alarm is generated if there is a deviation of more than half of
injection volume between the actual additive quantity delivered and the
expected additive quantity to be delivered for the entire batch.
5.13.4.3.3 Mapping of Alarms on External Additive Controller
Refer to the table below for alarm mapping between alarms on the
MSC-A to alarms that appear on the MSC-L device for external additive
streams. Alarms on other external additive controllers shall have their
own mapping to alarm bit masks.
MSC-A Alarm External Additive Alarm on MSC-L Alarm Mask
Power failure Power failure 0x0800
License key failure License key failure 0x0200
Communication Ext. add. device program failure 0x0010
failure
HMI fatal error Ext. add. device program failure 0x0010

Stream board Ext. add. device program failure 0x0010

missing
Option board Ext. add. device program failure 0x0010
missing
Batch permissive Ext. add. device program failure 0x0010
failure
Service due Service due reminder 0x4000
reminder
Control failure Control fault 0x0400
No activity No activity 0x0020
Solenoid fault Solenoid fault 0x0080
Stream start fault Ext. add. device program failure 0x0010
Pulse phase error Pulse hardware error 0x1000
Pulse hardware Pulse hardware error 0x1000
error
Leaking valve Leaking valve 0x0004
Flush volume Flush volume 0x0040
No pump No pump 0x0100
Block valve fault Solenoid fault 0x0080
Factored pulse Control fault 0x0400
fault
No hydraulic pump No pump 0x0100
Tank low level Tank empty 0x2000
Tank empty Tank empty 0x2000
Low volume Add. volume deviation 0x0001
deviation
High volume Add. volume deviation 0x0001
deviation
No additive No additive 0x0002
General fail alarm/ Ext. add. device firmware failure 0x0008
any other alarm
not listed above

Operation - Sequential Blending Overview
5.14 Sequential Blending Overview

Sequential blending is defined in chapter 3.1.3.4 "Sequential Blending".
This section describes how this functionality can be achieved using
MSC-L. Only product streams can be sequentially blended and share
common flow meter, temperature, pressure and density inputs and
control valve outputs. Each product shall be loaded one at a time and
hereafter be called a minibatch.
5.14.1 Configuration
The following parameters need to be set to achieve Sequential
blending.
1. In the Arm where Sequential Blending is needed, Assign the desired
streams to the loading Arm and Set
 Arm Configuration. Arm x. Control settings. [Loading type] =
<Sequential blending>
 Arm Configuration. Arm x. Control settings. [Batch lineup time] =
<0 - 99 s>
Only streams belonging to same Arm board should be assigned to
loading arm on the same board for Sequential Blending loading type.
e.g Stream 1-6 are on Arm board 1 and Streams 7-12 on Arm Board
2. With XL6 license, Loading Arms 1-3 shall be on Arm board 1 and
Loading Arms 4-6 on Arm board 2. So, if we need Sequential
blending on say loading Arm 5 which is on Arm board 2, only the
streams 7-12 which are on same board should be assigned to this
loading Arm.
2. In one of the Streams being Sequentially Blended, Set
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Inputs. [Flow
meter] = <QPI-x> .
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Inputs.
[Temperature] = <AI-x, RTD-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Inputs. [Pressure]
= <AI-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Inputs. [Density]
= <AI-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Outputs | [NO
DCV] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Outputs. [NC
DCV] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Outputs. [Low
Flow 2SV] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Outputs. [High
Flow 2SV] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>

 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Outputs. [Recir-

culation NO DCV] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Outputs. [Recir-
culation NC DCV] = <DO-SSR-x, PO-x, DO-EMR-x>
 Stream Configuration. Stream y. I/O bindings. Outputs. [ACV]
= < AO-x>
3. Control Settings.Valve Control needs to be set on the stream with
the shared bindings
4. Settings in 2 and 3 must be left unconfigured in other streams
sharing the Flow meter
5. Other stream Level settings including Pump Demand, Block Valve
and Control Settings.Product Control needs to be set at individual
stream level.
All the shared bindings (temperature, pressure, density, valve outputs)
need to be assigned to the same stream to which the shared flow meter
is assigned.
NOTE: It is preferred to set the common bindings on the

stream which will be used the most in the Arm.
NOTE: If multiple streams have flow meter assigned for an

Arm whose loading type is sequential blending, any
stream that has no flow meter assigned shall pick the
parameters listed in 1 and 2 above from the first
stream (i.e with the lowest value for n, where n is the
stream number) which has flow meter assigned
among the streams assigned to the same arm.
5.14.2 Load Order

Main product (first product in the recipe) is loaded last for clean arm
operation
For sequential blending, load order is determined by the position within
the recipe and shall be delivered in the following order
1. Blend stream 3 (where configured)
4. Main stream
The loading screen shall show information at batch (blend product
level). Individual stream level flow rates and quantities can be viewed
using the Process Data screen accessible by Long pressing OK button
or from Menu->Diagnostics->Process Data.

5.14.3 Inter mini batch behavior

After load is finished for one of the products, a configurable delay is
provided before starting the next product to account for various factors
like time needed to close the valve and for the product flow to
completely stop. So after the loading for one of the products is finished,
the batch shall be paused. It (the batch) shall resume and start loading
of the next product (minibatch) when:
 [Batch lineup time] expires (OR)
 User resumes manually from Pause state
If [Batch lineup time] is configured to 0 (zero), the device shall wait for user
to resume the Batch manually before starting the next minibatch.
When STOP key is pressed during loading, current product being
loaded for each arm will get paused and can be resumed to continue
the loading. If STOP key is pressed during lineup time, the batch shall
be resumed only after being manually resumed by the user.
5.14.4 Flow Profile

Each stream load (minibatch) shall follow the flow rates and quantities
configured at the Arm level for the Initial, Full and the pre stop flow
phases.
5.14.5 Batch record

One batch record shall be created for all products which are delivered
sequentially in the batch recipe. Only the product stream level totals are
usable for W&M purposes. Like ratio blending, the blend product level
GOV shall have and uncertain and GSV a bad status in case the recipe
has more than one product.
5.14.6 Alarms
If any common binding related alarms occur when not loading, e.g.
leaking valve, it shall appear on the stream to which the Common IO is
configured as the responsible stream cannot be uniquely identified due
to having shared flow meter, control valve etc.
5.14.7 Calibration
Each stream can be calibrated individually and shall have a dedicated
meter factor. The streams sharing common Flow meter shall have a
single k factor. The Calibration process is described in chapter 5.21
"Diagnostics". In case of wizard mode, the calibration of streams
sharing common IO binding shall be done by loading the desired
quantity of that product using its dedicated flowmeter/pump demand
and shared flow meter/valve. In manual mode, the meter factor shall be
individually set

Operation - Rail Loading Application Overview
NOTE: If the user desires to have same meter factor for all
the sequential loading arms, wizard or manual cali-
bration can be done on the main stream and the
same meter factor needs to be set manually on the
other streams. As the meter factor is not shared
among streams, default value (1) shall be used when
not set by wizard or manual calibration for that
stream
WARNING! All the streams assigned to the Arm need to be reca-

librated when Loading type is changed. If loading
type is sequential, all configuration listed in Configu-
ration section above need to be completed and the
streams assigned to the Arm before Calibration is
done.
5.15 Rail Loading Application Overview
5.15.1 About Rail Loading

Fusion 4 MSC-L supports Rail wagon loading feature. This feature
enables to load of one or more wagons using same metering skid by
loading one wagon at a time.
The railway engine with wagons is called a Rake. Each side of the
platform is called a ‘spur’ where rake is positioned for loading. Load
spot is the place where a single wagon gets loaded with loading arm in
the spur. Cluster is a group of load spots (loading points).
ÿ
4 2 0
!"#$%& '

( ÿ ( ÿ
4 2 0
ÿ 9)4 9)2 9)0 9)4 9)2 9)0 ÿ+ÿ6 ÿ
9)ÿ+ÿ9 6 ÿ), -ÿ
ÿ
.)/+9ÿ2 12-1 ÿ-ÿ- ÿ2834-14ÿ7-0ÿ-011ÿ86 ÿ4, -4ÿ1620
ÿ
4 2 0
!"#$%& '

4 2 0
ÿ 9)4 9)2 9)0 ( ÿ9)4 9)2 9)0 ÿ+ÿ6 ÿ
9)ÿ+ÿ9 6 ÿ), -ÿ
.)/+9ÿ7-0ÿ 1ÿ2834-1ÿ0657 ÿ- ÿ86 4, -4 ÿ
FIGURE 5-37 Application overview – Rail loading


Rail loading can be used on the following MSC-L licenses:
 MSC-L1
 MSC-L2
 MSC-L3
 MSC-XL1
 MSC-XL2
 MSC-XL3
 MSC-XL4
 MSC-XL5
 MSC-XL6
These are supported for single bay operation only.
5.15.3 Rail Loading using MSC-L

In a device having n arms, MSC-L supports upto n clusters with upto 3
loadspots per cluster. By default, all arms are assigned to Arm cluster
#1. 1 to n arms can be assigned to each cluster and each arm can be
assigned to only one cluster.
Number of arms that can be simultaneously loaded in each cluster is
either the number of arms assigned to that cluster or max loadspots per
cluster (configurable), whichever is lower. For e.g, if a device has 6
arms with 3 arms assigned to cluster # 1 and 3 arms assigned to cluster
#2 and max loadspots per cluster is set to 2, then 2 arms among Arms
1, 2 and 3 can be loaded to the 2 loadspots in cluster 1 and similarly 2
arms in cluster 2.

The following figure represents the rail loading operations using MSCL.

6

6

6
01

67 67 67
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ !"#
$9%&'ÿÿÿÿÿ$8(#ÿ%)!#ÿ& ÿ'68*(
+9%&'ÿÿÿ+!#8(#ÿ%)!#ÿ& ÿ'68*(
9%ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ9 6 ÿ%, #ÿ 67 67 67
$-.9ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ$#(8"/
01ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ08ÿ1(#(
02'ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ08ÿ2 #8ÿ'68*( 8 8 8
..ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ.(3,(6#!(ÿ.6 437##(
.ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ(44!(ÿ.6 437##(
&.ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ&( 47#5ÿ.6 437##(
FIGURE 5-38 Rail loading using MSC-L
Each loading arm on MSC-L has a metering skid (flowmeter, control

valves). One or more (up to 6) product streams can be associated to
one loading arm. Product streams assigned to an arm can share a
metering skid (flowmeter, control valves). Only one product stream
associated to the arm is used at a time for the loading operation. Each
product stream has individual Inlet Shut Down Valve (ILSDV). MSC-L
opens selected product stream’s ILSDV and closes ILSDV of other
product streams associated to the arm. To check ILSDV’s open
feedback, ‘Block valve feedback’ in product stream can be used.
One or more (up to 3) load spots can be used with a single arm to load
fuel into the corresponding wagon. Each load spot has individual Outlet
Shut Down Valve (OLSDV). Only one load spot associated to the arm
can be used at a time for the loading operation. MSC-L opens only the
selected load spot’s OLSDV and close others load spot’s OLSDV those
are associated to the arm. MSC-L supports two interlocks per load spot.
Interlocks can be used for Loading Arm Position Sensor (LAPS),
Overspill Sensor, OLSDV feedback, or any other feedback. Arm level
programmable alarms are used as interlocks for the load spot.
As some operations like valve opening can take time, an optional
preload sequence is available at the start of loading operation which
allows configurable time delays for each step, like turning on ILSDV,
OLSDV, control valves as well as checking interlock states.

Some Rail loading use cases with different combinations of arms,

clusters and load spots are illustrated below.
Use case #1: Three load spots allocated to a cluster
The use case of all 6 arms in device assigned to same cluster which
has 3 loadspots is illustrated in FIGURE 5-39. Out of six available arms,
three can be loaded at a time (one to each wagon)
ÿ
4 2 0
!42 0
!44
!
!0
!2
()&)7 ÿ ()&)7 ÿ ()&)7 ÿ
*7ÿ+4 *7ÿ+2 *7ÿ+
!4 ,-ÿ4 ,-ÿ2 ,-ÿ
!ÿÿÿ#ÿ! $%&ÿ
ÿÿ#ÿ6 ÿ
9 ÿ#ÿ9 6 ÿ' &ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
4 2 0
ÿ 94 92 90

FIGURE 5-39 Rail loading – Three load spots in a cluster

In FIGURE 5-40 below, Product 1 in Arm 1, Product 4 in Arm 2 and

Product 12 in Arm 6 are being loaded in Wagon 1, Wagon 2 and Wagon
3 respectively.
ÿ
5 3 0 2
!53
!55
!2
!0
!3
()&)8ÿ ()&)8ÿ ()&)8ÿ
*8ÿ+5 *8ÿ+3 *8ÿ+
!5 ,-ÿ5 ,-ÿ3 ,-ÿ
!ÿÿÿ#ÿ! $%&ÿ
ÿÿ#ÿ7 ÿ
ÿ#ÿ 7 ÿ' &ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
5 3 0
ÿ 5 3 0

FIGURE 5-40 Rail loading – Three load spots in a cluster loading at a time

Use case #2: Two load spots allocated to a cluster

The use case of two clusters with two load spots each is illustrated in
FIGURE 5-41.
All four arms can load simultaneously to different wagons.
ÿ 5 3
5 3 0 2
000
000000
5 '(ÿ5 '(ÿ3
+,%,8ÿ
-8ÿ.5
3
0
+,%,8ÿ
2
-8ÿ.3

+,%,8ÿ

-8ÿ.0
*
+,%,8ÿ
-8ÿ.2
) '(ÿ0 '(ÿ2
ÿÿÿ"ÿ #$%ÿ
ÿÿ"ÿ7 ÿ
ÿ"ÿ 7 ÿ& %ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
5 3 0 2
ÿ/ 0 2 0

FIGURE 5-41 Rail loading – Two clusters with two load spots each

In FIGURE 5-42 loading of two clusters with two load spots each is
shown.
In Cluster 1, Product 1 assigned to Arm 1 and Product 4 assigned to
Arm 2 are being loaded on Loadspot 1 (W3) and Loadspot 2 (W4)
respectively. In Cluster 2, Product 6 assigned to Arm 3 and Product 5
assigned to Arm 4 are being loaded on Loadspot 1 (W3) and Loadspot
(W4) respectively.
ÿ
5 3 0 2
777
777777
5 '(ÿ5 '(ÿ3
+,%,8ÿ
-8ÿ.5
3
0
+,%,8ÿ
2
-8ÿ.3

+,%,8ÿ

-8ÿ.0
*
+,%,8ÿ
-8ÿ.2
) '(ÿ0 '(ÿ2
ÿÿÿ"ÿ #$%ÿ
ÿÿ"ÿ7 ÿ
ÿ"ÿ 7 ÿ& %ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
5 3 0 2
ÿ/ 5 3 0

FIGURE 5-42 Loading of two clusters with two load spots each
NOTE: Fusion4 MSC-L rail loading supports only single

product recipe without additive and blend.
5.15.4 Rail Loading Configuration

The following section describes the configuration required for rail
loading.
1. Enable [Rail loading]
System Configuration . Device . General . Settings . [Rail loading] =
<Enable>

2. To share common metering skid by multiple product streams asso-

ciated to an arm, configure
Arm Configuration . Arm n . Control settings . General . [Loading
type] = <Sequential>
3. Configure cluster
Arm Configuration . Arm n . Identification . [Arm cluster] =
<1 to 6> (default = 1)
4. Configure loadspot name
Arm Configuration . Arm n . Identification . [Loadspot 1 name]
Same name to be set for loadspots among arms assigned to same
cluster.
5. Configure [Outlet SDV 1], [Outlet SDV 2], [Outlet SDV 3]
Arm Configuration . Arm n . I/O bindings . Outputs . [Top Loading
Valve (Outlet SDV1)] = <EMR x/SSR x>
Arm Configuration . Arm n . I/O bindings . Outputs . [Top Loading
Valve (Outlet SDV2)] = <EMR x/SSR x>
Arm Configuration . Arm n . I/O bindings . Outputs . [Outlet SDV3] =
<EMR x/SSR x>
6. Configure [Inlet SDV]
Stream Configuration . Product . Product n . I/O bindings .
Outputs . [Block valve control] = <EMR x/SSR x>
7. Configure loadspot level alarms
System Configuration . General . Settings [Loadspot alarm 1 type] =
<Feedback / Interlock /Interlock (selected only)>
System Configuration . General . Settings [Loadspot alarm 2 type] =
<Feedback / Interlock /Interlock (selected only)>
If arm programmable alarms (in rail loading) are configured with alarm
activation Idle, Running and Pause as None, then they will be used as
loadspot level alarms based on [Loadspot alarm 1(2) type]
configuration.
Arm programmable Alarms 1, 2 and 3 are used as loadspot alarm 1 for
Loadspots 1, 2 and 3 respectively, similarly programmable alarms 4, 5
and 6 are used as loadspot alarm 2.
Arm n . Alarms . Programmable alarms . Programmable alarm n .
[I/O bindings] = <DI-DC-n>
[Alarm action] = <Display pause>
[Alarm name] = <LS01 Arm position>
(The configured alarm will appear in preload sequence as well as alarm
display when the alarm occurs)
[Response time] = <1s>
[Alarm activation (Idle)] = <None>

[Alarm activation (Running)] = <None>

[Alarm activation (Pause)] = <None>
Expected alarm input state for normal operation is shown in the table
below:
Selected input Not selected input
Input type
Preload Loading Preload Loading
Feedback Inactive Active Inactive Inactive
Interlock Active Active Inactive Inactive
Interlock (Selected Active Active NA NA
only)
NOTE: To use alarms as Arm programmable alarms, at least

one of the two alarm activation i.e. Alarm activation
(Idle) or Alarm activation (Running) should be set to
an action other than none.
8. Configure Pre load sequence
Arm Configuration . Arm n . Control settings . Pre-load
sequence . [Control valve turn on time]
sequence . [Loading arm feedback timeout]
sequence . [Inlet valve turn on time]
sequence . [Outlet valve turn on time]
The Pre load sequence is the sequence of opening of the desired
load selection valve, waiting for the feedback input if enabled, and
then delays for digital control valve actuation. If pre-load sequence
enabled, after pressed start key to start of the loading, load
beginning with the Pre load sequence.

9. Configure Maximum simultaneous loads

System Configuration . Device . Workflow . Options . [Max. simul-
taneous loads]
Max simultaneous loads to be set as per number of loadspots in the
system.
Example: With 6 arms and 2 clusters (3 arms assigned to each) and
2 LS per cluster, Max simultaneous loads needs to be set to 4 (2
Clusters * 2 LS per cluster)
10. Configure maximum loadspots per cluster
System Configuration . Device . Workflow . Options . [Max.
loadspots per cluster]
11. Enable loadspot level RIT panel
System Configuration . Device . Workflow . Options . [Use loadspot
RIT panel] = <Enable>
5.15.5 Rail Loading Operation

The local loading screens used only in Rail loading are shown below.
Permissive check and user authorization are same as normal loading
operation.
1. MSC-L asks for rake registration number. Enter rake registration
number.

Enter maximum 20 alphanumeric characters rake registration number.

This is recorded in the transaction record.
2. The Select arm screen appears

3. Press OK. Select product screen appears
Configure recipe with 100% blend ratio for each product separately.
Select product (recipe) assigned to the selected arm.
4. Press OK. Select loadspot screen appears
Select available loadspot.

5. Enter wagon number prompt appears.
Enter maximum 20 alphanumeric characters wagon number. This is

recorded in the batch record.
6. The Enter preset screen appears
Enter the quantity of the product that must be loaded into the wagon
and then press OK.
7. If the Batch details prompt is enabled, entering preset takes you to
the batch details screen. If batch details screen is disabled, start
prompt with batch details appears as below

8. After pressing the start button, preload sequence is started as below:

1. Pump is turned on.
2. Inlet valve is tuned on after [Inlet valve turn on time]. Product stream's
block valve is used as inlet valve.
3. Alarm 1 input for not selected loadspots from the same cluster are
checked. If any of not selected input is in incorrect position,
countdown starts for [Valve feedback timeout]. If the input is not in correct
position even after [Valve feedback timeout], alarm is raised.

NOTE: This step is skipped if

 The programmable alarms 1, 2 and 3 are not configured for rail inputs as
described in section - 5.15.4
 [Loadspot alarm 1 type] is interlock selected only
 [Valve feedback timeout] is set to zero.
 [Max. loadspots per cluster] is configured as 1.
4. Selected alarm 1 input is checked, if in incorrect position, countdown

starts for [Valve feedback timeout] . If the input is not in correct position
after [Valve feedback timeout] , alarm is raised.

described in section 5.15.4

5. Alarm 2 input for not selected loadspots from the same cluster are
checked. If any of not selected input is in incorrect position,
countdown starts for [Valve feedback timeout] . If the input is not in
correct position after [Valve feedback timeout] , alarm is raised.

 [Loadspot alarm 2 type] is interlock selected only
 [Max. loadspots per cluster] is configured as 1.
6. Selected alarm 2 input is checked, if in incorrect position countdown

starts for [Valve feedback timeout] . If the input is not in correct position
after [Valve feedback timeout] , alarm is raised.


7. Turn on Outlet Solenoid Valve (OLSDV) after [Outlet valve turn on time].
8. Turn on Control valve (DCV) after [Control valve turn on time].
At the end of preload sequence, DCV is turned on and loading is

started.
Load progress screen is displayed as below.
5.15.6 Transaction and Batch record

Rake registration number is added at the end of transaction record and
wagon number is added at the end of batch record.


Operation - 1010 Emulation
5.16 1010 Emulation
5.16.1 1010BJ
5.16.1.1 License type and constraints

 For loading operation, MSC-L L1 and L2 licenses are supported.
 No blending and additive supported.
5.16.1.2 Assumption
 Product 1 is assigned to Arm1 and Product 2 is assigned to Arm2.
 Device Programmable alarm 1 is used as TAS permissive.
 Recipe 1 is used for each arm.
5.16.1.3 Configuration
 System. Device. General. Settings. Loading type = <Top/Bottom>
 System. Device. Alarms. Programmable Alarms. Programmable
alarm 1. I/O bindings
Programmable alarm 1. Alarm action = <Display pause>
Programmable alarm 1. Alarm name = <TAS Permissive>
Programmable alarm 1. Response time = <1s>
Programmable alarm 1. Alarm activation Idle = <None>
Programmable alarm 1. Alarm activation (Running) = <None>
 Arm. Arm n. I/O bindings. Outputs. Top loading valve control
 Arm. Arm n. I/O bindings. Outputs. Bottom loading valve control
 Arm 1. Alarms. Programmable Alarms. Programmable alarm 1. I/
O bindings
Programmable alarm 1. Alarm name = <Top valve feedback>
 Arm 1. Alarm. Programmable Alarms. Programmable alarm 1 | I/
O bindings
Programmable alarm 1. Alarm name = <Bottom valve feedback>

5.16.2 1010RD
5.16.2.1 License type and constraints

 For loading operation use MSC-L L2 license (two arms) and for
unloading use MSC-L L1 license (single arm).
 Blending and additive are not supported.
5.16.2.2 Assumptions
 Assign Product 1 to Arm 1 and Product 2 to Arm 2.
 No permissive is common to both arms.
 Arm1 permissive and Arm2 permissive are independent of each
other.
 RFID reader can be used for Vehicle identification.
 Recipe 1 is used for each arm.
5.16.2.3 Configurations Required

Loading Configurations
 Use Arm 1 Programmable Alarm 1 for Arm 1 permissive.
Arm 1. Alarms. Programmable Alarms. Programmable alarm 1
IO bindings = <DI-DC-n>
Alarm name = <Alarm 1 Permissive>
Response Time = <1 sec>
Alarm activation idle = <None>
Alarm activation running = <Deactivate>
Alarm activation pause = <Deactivate>
 Use Arm 2 Programmable Alarm 1 for Arm 2 permissive.
Arm 2. Alarms. Programmable Alarms. Programmable alarm 1
IO bindings = <DI-DC-n>
Alarm name = <Alarm 1 Permissive>
Response Time = <1 sec>
Alarm activation idle = <None>
Alarm activation running = <Deactivate>
Alarm activation pause = <Deactivate>
 Device. Configuration. workflow settings. Prompts. Load
number identification = <Mandatory>
 Device. Configuration. workflow settings. Prompts. Queuing =
<Enable/Disable>
 Device| Configuration| workflow settings. Prompts. Driver iden-
tification = <Mandatory>

 Device. Configuration. workflow settings. Prompts. User identi-

fication = <Mandatory>
 Device. Configuration. workflow settings. Prompts. Vehicle
identification = <Mandatory>
 Device. Configuration. workflow settings. Prompts. Manual
Density Entry = <Enable/Disable>
 Arm. Arm n. I/O bindings. Outputs. Ready lamp (Indicates
Interlock status)
 Arm. Arm n. I/O bindings. Outputs. Slow Flow indicator
 Arm. Arm n. I/O bindings. Outputs. High Flow indicator
 Arm. Arm n. I/O bindings. Outputs. Pre-stop Flow indicator
Unloading configuration
 System. Device. I/O Settings. PI. QPI-n [Minimum linear flow rate] =
<0.0>
 System. Device. Workflow Settings. Options. Multiple loads per
arm. Disabled
 System. Device. Workflow Settings. Options. Preset Unloading
Entry. Disabled or mandatory
 Arm. Arm 1. Control Settings. [Loading type] = <Unloading>
 Arm. Arm 1. Control Settings. [Loading type] = <as required>
 Arm. Arm 1. Control Settings. [High flow rate] = <as required>
 Arm. Arm 1. Control Settings. [Batch initial quantity] = <[1] (non- zero value is
required)
 Arm | Arm 1. Control Settings | [Batch pre-stop quantity] = [0]
 Arm | Arm 1. Control Settings | [Batch clean arm quantity] = [0]
 Arm | Arm 1. I/O bindings | Inputs | Stop flow switch
 Arm | Arm 1. I/O bindings | Inputs | Low flow switch
 Arm | Arm 1. I/O bindings | Inputs | High flow switch
NOTE: Use all three of above or only High flow switch as air
eliminator input in unloading.
 Arm. Arm n. Alarms. Stop switch not covered. [Stop flow switch auto
clear time out] = <10>
 Arm. Arm n. Alarms. Fixed. [Invalid switch states] = <Display pause>
 Stream. Product streams. Stream n. Alarms. No Product. [Alarm
action] = <Disable>
5.16.2.4 Transaction Record
Transaction record in 1010 RD Emulation has Driver number, Tanker

number as well as source of tanker number (R if read by card reader
and M if Manually entered)

Operation - System Configuration
5.17 System Configuration

To perform the System Configuration
1. On the Main Menu screen, select the System Configuration icon.
The System Configuration screen appears, which displays the
functions available for system configuration.
2. On the System Configuration screen, select either <Device> or <Bay>

to configure the MSC-L.

5.17.1 Device Configuration

 On the System Configuration screen, select Device.
The System Config . Device screen appears, which displays the
functions available for the device configuration.
5.17.1.1 Device Configuration . General

1. On the Device Configuration screen, select General.
The System Config . Device . General screen appears.
2. On the System Config . Device . General screen, select each entity

to configure the MSC-L.

5.17.1.1.1 System Config . General Identification
The System Config . Device . General screen, select Identification.

The following entities are displayed on the System Config . General .
Identification screen.
Entity Description Value range
[Site name] The name of the site at which the MSC A text string of maximum 20 characters.
is located.
[Device name] The name of the MSC-L. This entity A text string of maximum 8 characters.
specifies a unique identification of the
device by a text string.
[Device Address]
[WnM intended (reboot This entity denotes if the MSC-L is <True> - W&M compliant (default)
required)] W&M intented. <False> - Not W&M compliant
Note: You need to restart the MSC-L
after changing the entity.
[Application Type] Fusion 4 MSC-XL6
5.17.1.1.2 System Config . General . Units
On the System Config . Device . General screen, select Units.

The following entities are displayed on the System Config . General .
Units screen.
[Units of preset] With this entity you can select the <GOV> (default)
engineering units for preset. <GSV>
<Mass>
[Units of volume] With this entity you can select the <Liter> (default)
engineering units for volume. <Cubic Meter>
<Cubic Centimeter>
<Cubic Decimeter>
<US Gallons>
<Gallons Imperial>
<Barrel>
[Units of additive volume] With this entity you can select the <Milliliter> (default)
engineering units for additive volume. <Cubic Centimeter>
[Units of temperature] With this entity you can select the <Degree Celsius> (default)
engineering units for temperature. <Degree Fahrenheit>
[Units of pressure] With this entity you can select the <Pascal> (default)
engineering units for pressure. <Kilo Pascal>
<Pounds per Square Inch>
<PSI large
<Bar>


[Units of density] With this entity you can select the <Kilogram per Cubic Meter> (default)
engineering units for density. <Degrees API>
<Pounds per Cubic Feet>
<Relative Density at 60 F>
<Kilogram per liter>
[Units of mass] With this entity you can select the <Kilogram> (default)
engineering units for mass. <Metric ton>
<Pound>
<Long ton (UK)
<Short ton (US)
The following table lists the units that are displayed on the device
screen.
Description Name Unit Range min Range max Format
Transaction volume Liter L 0 999999.99 6 [ds] 2
(General + MSC-L BoL) Cubic meter m3 0 999.99999 3 [ds] 5
Cubic centimeter cm3 0 999999990 9
Cubic decimeter dm3 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
US Gallons gal 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
Gallons imperial gal 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
Barrel bbl 0 9999.9999 4[ds]4
Transaction volume Liter L 0 99999999 8
(MSC-L running / idle Cubic meter m3 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
screens) Cubic centimeter cm3 0 99999999000 11
Cubic decimeter dm3 0 99999999 8
Barrel bbl 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
Accumulated total volume Liter L 0 9999999999 10
Cubic meter m3 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
Cubic decimeter dm3 0 9999999999 10
Barrel bbl 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
Transaction additive Milliliter ml 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
volume Cubic centimeter cc 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
Accumulated total additive Liter L 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
volume Cubic meter m3 0 99.999999 2[ds]6
Cubic decimeter dm3 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
Barrel bbl 0 999.99999 3[ds]5
Mass Kilogram kg 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
Metric ton ton 0 999.99999 3[ds]5
Pound lb 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
Long ton (UK) long ton 0 999.99999 3[ds]5
Short ton (US) US ton 0 999.99999 3[ds]5

Description Name Unit Range min Range max Format

Temperature Celsius °C -300.00 300.00 3[ds]2
Fahrenheit °F -400.0 572.0 3[ds]1
Density Kilogram per cubic kg/m3 0 9999.9 4[ds]1
meter
Degrees API °API -50.0 600.0 3[ds]1
Pounds per cubic lb/ft3 0 999.99 3[ds]2
feet
Relative density at RD60 0 9.9999 1[ds]4
60°F
Kilogram per Liter kg/L 0 9.9999 1[ds]4
(MSC)
Pressure Bar bar 0 999.99 3[ds]2

Pascal Pa 0 99999000 8
Kilo Pascal kPa 0 99999 5[ds]0
PSI RANGE 100 psi_r100 0 999.9999 3[ds]4
(SSC)
PSI RANGE 1000 psi_r1000 0 999.999 3[ds]3
(SSC)
PSI (MSI) psi 0 999.9999 3[ds]4
Ratio Percentage % 0.00 99.99 2 [ds] 2
Parts per million ppm 0 999999 6
Expansion coefficient Inverse 10-7/°F 00000 99999 5
Fahrenheit
Inverse Celsius 10-7/°C 00000 99999 5
Flow rate Liter per minute L/min 0 999999.99 6 [ds] 2
Cubic meter per m3/min 0 999.99999 3 [ds] 5
minute
Cubic centimeter cm3/min 0 999999990 9
per minute
Cubic decimeter dm3/min 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
per minute
US Gallons per gal/min 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
minute
Gallons imperial gal/min 0 99999.999 5[ds]3
per minute
Barrel per minute bbl/min 0 9999.9999 4[ds]4
Additive Flow rate Milliliter per ml/min 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
minute
Cubic centimeter cc/min 0 999999.99 6[ds]2
per minute
5.17.1.1.3 System Config . General . Display

1. On the System Config . Device . General screen, select Display.

The System Config . General . Display screen appears.
2. On the System Config . General . Display screen, select each

entity to configure the display for the MSC-L.
5.17.1.1.3.1 System Config . Display . General Settings
On the System Config . General . Display screen, select General

setting. The following entities are displayed.
[Display brightness] With this entity you can enter the <0> % (low) ... <100> % (high)
brightness of the display. The (default = <75> %)
brightness is controlled by the backlight
of the display.
[Auto brightness adjustment] With this entity you can enable the auto <Enable> (default)
brightness feature. When enabled, the <Disable>
ambient light sensor on the HMI senses
the ambient light and automatically
adjusts the brightness of the display.
[Session timeout value] With this entity you can enter the time <10> s ... <600> s
in seconds between the last key (default = <300> s)
pressed on the IR Controller and the
moment the display switches back to
one of the running screens.


[User display language] With this entity you can select the <English UK>
display language for the running <English US> (default)
screens. <French>
<German>
<Dutch>
<Spanish>
<Chinese>
<Japanese>
<Polish>
<Portuguese>
<Italian>
<Thai>
<Local Language>
[Large font date and time] With this entity you can enable or <Enable>
disable the large font date and time <Disable> (default)
feature.
[Process data screen timeout With this entity you can configure the <0> s ... <600> s
value] Process data screen timeout value. (default = <300> s)
[Rail loading] With this entity you can enable or <Enable>

disable the Rail loading functionality <Disable> (default)
[Loadspot alarm 1 type] This entity sets the input type for <Feedback>
programmable alarms 1 to 3 for <Interlock>(default)
Loadspots 1 to 3 respectively. <Interlock (Selected only)>
[Loadspot alarm 2 type] This entity sets the input type for <Feedback>
programmable alarms 4 to 6 for <Interlock>(default)
Loadspots 1 to 3 respectively. <Interlock (Selected only)>
[Drain line activation time] This entity sets the time duration for <0> s ... <300> s
which draining valve will be on while (default = <15> s)
purging to air.
[Arm clean repetition counts] This entity sets the number of <0> s ... <15> s
repetitions for switching the draining (default = <3> s)
valve.
Draining valve is on for activation time
and off for the same duration. This is
counted as one repetition.
After the set repetitions valve is turned
off and draining is complete.

5.17.1.1.3.2 System Config . Display. Operational Screen
On the System Config . General . Display screen, select Operational

screen. The following entities are displayed.
[Dynamic label 1], [Dynamic With this entity you can select the <Preset >
label 2], and [Dynamic label 3] values which are required to appear on <Load GOV>
the Load progress screen.
<Load GSV>
<Remaining time>
<Flow rate>
<Mass>
<Accumulated GOV>
<Accumulated GSV>
<Accumulated mass>
<Remaining quantity>
<Temperature>
<Pressure>
<Density>
<Main GOV>
<Blend 1 GOV>
<Blend 2 GOV>
<Blend 3 GOV>
<Main GSV>
<Blend 1 GSV>
<Blend 2 GSV>
<Blend 3 GSV>
<Main ratio>
<Blend 1 ratio>
<Blend 2 ratio>
<Blend 3 ratio>
<Main mass>
<Blend 1 mass>
<Blend 2 mass>
<Blend 3 mass>
<Additive 1 PPM>
<Additive 2 PPM>
<Additive 3 PPM>
<Base temperature>
<Base pressure>
<Vapour return>
<Tare weight>
<Truck weight>

5.17.1.1.4 System Config . General . Time
On the System Config . Device . General screen, select Time.

The following entities are displayed.
[Date display format] With this entity you can select the <DD-MM-YY> (default)
format of the date. <MM-DD-YY>
<YY-MM-DD>
Note: The local site time must be
<DD-MM-YYYY>
configured (synchronized) in the MSC-
L, to have all the transactions and the <MM-DD-YYYY>
alarms being timestamped correctly in <DD/MM/YYYY>
the local time. <MM/DD/YYYY>
The MSC-L does not support Daylight Note: Only the first three selections are
Saving Time. completely visible on the MSC-L screen.
[Time display format] With this entity you can select the <12-hour>
format of the time. <24-hour> (default)
Note: Only the 24-hour selection is
completely visible on the MSC-L screen.
[Date] With this entity you can select the <Year>

actual date that is used for time <Month>
stamping of transactions, calibrations,
<Day>
and alarms.
Note: By default, the current date appears.
To change the default date, enter the year,
month, and day.
[Time] With this entity you can select the <Hour>

actual time that is used for time <Minute>
stamping of transactions, calibrations, <Second>
and alarms.
Note: By default, the current time appears.
To change the default time, enter the hour,
minute, and second.
5.17.1.1.5 System Config . Device . Settings
On the System Config . Device . General screen, select <Settings>. The

following entities are displayed.
[Bay type (reboot required)] With this entity you can select the <Single bay>
necessary bay <Dual bay>.
[Acc. totals reset allowed] With this entity you can enable / disable <No> (default)
the ability to reset accumulator totals <Yes>.


[Max. allowed meter factor With this entity you can select the <+/- 0.0%> (default)
deviation] maximum deviation between any two
adjacent meter factors.
During product meter calibration
(manual or wizard), the configured
meter factor deviation is checked
between the adjacent meter-factors.
If the meter factor deviation is set to
0%, it means there is no deviation
check required.
This entity has a W&M seal protection.
[Emulation Type] With this entity you can configure the <None> (default)
type of device that you want to <1010BJ>
emulate. <1010CJ>
<1010CB>
<1010RT>
<1010RD>
<Accuload>
[Max. interrupts per batch With this entity you can configure that
allowed] maximum number of batch
interruptions.
[Max. alarms per batch With this entity you can configure that
allowed] maximum number of alarms that can
be configured for a batch.
[Save average meter factor] With this entity you can configure <Disable> (default)
maximum meter of a batch. <Enable>
[Loading type] With this entity you can configure the <Top> (default)
loading type for a batch. <Bottom>
To emulate a 1010 device, the [Emulation Type] selected here must be

relevant to the Serial Port configured in the System Config . COM-n
screen. Refer to chapter 5.17.1.3.1.1 "Setup"
Refer to the table below to select the appropriate communication
protocol over the a Serial COM interface to emulate a device.
Emulation Type Communication protocol
1010BJ SLIP
1010CJ
1010CB
1010RT
1010RD
Accuload Minicomp Host
Accuload Terminal Host

5.17.1.2 System Config . Device . I/O Binding

1. On the System Configuration screen, select IO bindings.
The System Config . Device . I/O Binding screen appears.
2. On the Device Configuration . I/O Binding screen, select each

entity to configure the MSC-L.
5.17.1.2.1 System Config . I/O bindings . Inputs
On the System Config . Device. I/O Binding screen, select Inputs.

The following entity is displayed.
[Emergency shutdown] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-
physical input of the emergency n, AI-n, or None.
shutdown input. The default value is <None>.
[TAS - stand alone switch] With this entity users can select work Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-
flow to be local (Enable) or remote n, AI-n, or None.
(Disabled) The default value is <None>.
5.17.1.2.2 System Config . I/O bindings . Outputs
On the System Config . Device . I/O Binding screen, select Outputs.

The following entity is displayed.
[Emergency stop] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DO-SSR, DO-EMR, PO,
physical output of the emergency stop. or None.
The default value is <None>.
[Alarm indication] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DO-SSR, DO-EMR, PO,
physical output indicating emergency or None.
stop Alarm. The default value is <None>.

5.17.1.3 System Config . Device . Communication

1. On the System Config . Device screen, select Communication.
The System Config . Device . Communication screen appears.
2. On the System Config . Device . Communication screen, select

each entity.
The Serial, Ethernet, or IR HHC communication entities can be
configured.
The built-in communication monitoring in the MSC-L are as follows:
 Up to seven 485 communication ports.
 Up to three Ethernet ports.
5.17.1.3.1 Serial
1. On the System Config . Device . Communication screen, select
Serials.
The System Config . Communication . Serial screen appears and
displays 5 COM ports.

Select a COM port and the System Config . COM-n screen

appears.
The following sections provide the entities that are available for the
Serial communication.
5.17.1.3.1.1 Setup
On the System Config . COM-n screen, select Setup.

The System Config . COM-n . Setup screen appears with the following
entities.
[Communication protocol] With this entity you can select the <FlexConn> (default)
protocol for the communication port. <Modbus RTU>
<Snet>
<Nedap CR/LF>
<SLIP>
<Minicomp Host>
<Terminal Host>
<FMC Smith>
<Weighbridge>
[Baudrate] With this entity you can select baud <Baudrate 1200>
rate for the communication port. <Baudrate 2400>
<Baudrate 4800>
<Baudrate 9600> (default)
<Baudrate 19200>
<Baudrate 38400>
<Baudrate 57600>
<Baudrate 115200>
<Baudrate 128000>


[Parity] With this entity you can set the parity <Odd> (default)
for the communication port. <Even>
<None>
[Stop bits] With this entity you can configure the <One> (default)
number of stop bits for the <Two>
communication port.
[Turn around delay] With this entity you can enter the time <0> ms ... <1000> ms
between when the request is received (default = <100> ms)
by MSC from the client and the
moment the answer is sent (ms).
[Write access password] This configuration entity defines the Alphanumeric string of maximum 6
write access password that external characters.
applications must use before they are (Default = ENRAF2)
allowed to write to the FlexConn
entities.
NOTE: If the communication protocol selected is SLIP make

sure that the emulation type selected is 1010BJ,
1010CJ, or 1010CB.
NOTE: If the communication protocol selected is Terminal

Host or Minicomp Host, make sure that the emulation
type selected is Accuload.
5.17.1.3.1.2 FlexConn
On the System Config . COM-n screen, select FlexConn.

The System Config . COM-n . FlexConn screen appears with the
following entities.
[FlexConn address] With this entity you can enter the <0>...<1900>
device address for the FlexConn (default = <0>)
protocol.
[Datastream max gap time] With this entity you can enter the time- <0>...<10000>
out between the characters in one (default = <1000> ms)
single record (ms).
5.17.1.3.1.3 SLIP
On the System Config . COM-n screen, select Slip.

The System Config . COM-n . SLIP screen appears with the following
entities.
[Slip unit address] With this entity you can enter the default = <123>
starting unit address. This entity is only
applicable in case the protocol is Slip
[No. of 1020 devices] With this entity you can select No. of default = <1>
devices connected to MSC-L

5.17.1.3.1.4 Modbus
On the System Config . COM-n screen, select Modbus.

The System Config . COM-n . Modbus screen appears with the
following entities.
[Modbus byte order] With this entity you can select the byte <Little endian> (default)
order used for the data when Modbus <Big endian>
protocols are used.
[Optimized modbus address] With this entity you can select to use <Disable> (default)
Optimized Modbus Map. <Enable>
Note: When Optimized Modbus
address is enabled, only the optimized
map and UDI can be used to access
modbus parameters. Standard device
map can not be used. This feature
presently supports parameters for
loading arms 1 and 2.
5.17.1.3.1.5 Authorization
On the System Config . COM-n screen, select Authorization.

The System Config . COM-n . Authorization screen appears with the
following entities.
[Database selection] With this entity you can select the <User> (default)
authorization database used to <Object>
authorize users or objects connected to <Users and objects>
this device.
[Attribute] Applicable if the database selected is

<object>. With this entity you can add
an attribute to the selected object.
[Loading bay] With this entity you can enable the <Bay1> (default)
required loading bay <Bay2>
<None>
5.17.1.3.2 Ethernet
The following table lists the entities available for the Ethernet
communication on the System Config . ETH-n screen.
[DHCP status] With this entity you can enable the <Disable> (default)
DHCP to use a dynamic IP address. <Enable>
[DNS server IP address] With this entity you can configure the default = <0.0.0.0>
DNS server IP address.
[Static IP address] With this entity you can assign static IP default = <192.168.1.100>
address to the MSC-L when the DHCP
is disabled.


[Gateway IP address] With this entity the default gateway IP default = <0.0.0.0>
address can be entered.
[Subnet mask] With this entity the subnet mask can be default = <255.255.0.0>
entered.
[Modbus byte order] With this entity you can select the byte <Little endian> (default)
representation of the information <Big endian>
retrieved by the modbus protocol:
Little endian: the LSB is sent first.
Big endian: the MSB is sent first.
[FlexConn address] With this entity, the unit address for <0 to 999>
flexcon protocol can be entered. (default = <0>)
[FlexConn TCP port] With this entity you can configure the <55598>
port used to communicate over
Fleconn TCP port
[Write Access password] With this entity, password used to <******>

enable the write protected entities
[Optimized modbus address] With this entity you can select to use <Disable> (default)
Optimized Modbus Map. <Enable>
Note: When Optimized Modbus
address is enabled, only the optimized
map and UDI can be used to access
modbus parameters. Standard device
map can not be used. This feature
presently supports parameters for
loading arms 1 and 2.
5.17.1.3.3 IR HHC
The following table lists the entities available for the IR HHC
communication on the System Config . Communication . IR HHC
screen.
[Long IR access] Disabling this entity (default) uses the <Long IR disabled>
short login sequence of pressing only <Long IR enabled> (default)
the [ATTN] key.
Enabling this entity makes the

controller require the long login
sequence of four buttons being
pressed, [ATTN], [F1], [F2], and [F3].
[IR access] With this entity you can enable the <IR disabled> (default)
IR interface, if it is turned off. <IR enabled>
NOTE: In a few installations of Honeywell Enraf controllers, it

is reported that sunlight or any strong artificial light-
sources can "unlock" the infrared port the same way
as pressing the ATTN key on the Hand-Held
Controller. If this occurs, parameter values may acci-

dentally be changed.
Note that this is an EXTREMELY rare possibility.
NOTE: The Long Infrared access parameter enables or

disables an extended login sequence of characters
for the infrared communications port on the bezel of
the MSC-L. Using an extended login character
sequence raises the odds of a random pattern of
interference matching the correct login sequence to
astronomical levels.
5.17.1.4 System Config . Device. I/O Settings

1. On the System Config . Device screen, select I/O Settings.
The System Config . Device . I/O Settings screen appears.
2. On the System Config . I/O Settings screen, select the available

entities.
Entity Available I/Os
[DI] DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n
[PI] QPI-1A, QPI-1B, QPI-2A, QPI-2B, QPI-3A, QPI-3B, QPI-4A, QPI-

4B, QPI-5A, QPI-5B, QPI-6A, QPI-6B, QPI-7A, QPI-7B, QPI-8A,
QPI-8B, QPI-9A, QPI-9B, QPI-10A, QPI-10B, QPI-11A, QPI-11B,
QPI-12A, QPI-12B
[RTD] RTD-1, RTD-2, RTD-3, RTD-4, RTD-5, RTD-6
[AI] AI-1, AI-2, AI-3, AI-4, AI-5, AI-6, AI-7, AI-8, AI-9, AI-10, AI-11, AI-
12, AI-13, AI-14
[AO] AO-1, AO-2, AO-3,AO-4, AO-5, AO-6
[PO] PO-1, PO-2, PO-3, PO-4
[EMR] DO-EMR-n

5.17.1.4.1 DI (for both AC# and DC#)
On the System Config . Device . I/O settings screen, select the

available Digital Inputs (DIs), and then select a DI. The following entities
are displayed on the System Config . DI-DC-1 screen.

[Hysteresis time] With this entity you can set the active 250 ms (default)
time in milliseconds (ms) of the input
signal before accepting it as a valid
input signal. Hence, the time between
two signal transitions must be greater
than the [Hysteresis time].
[Logic State] With this entity you can configure the <Negative>
active input signal to low or high <Positive>

5.17.1.4.2 PI
On the System Config . Device . I/O Settings screen, select the

available Pulse Inputs (PIs), and then select a QPI-n(A/B). The
following entities are displayed on the System Config . QPI-nA screen.

[Meter type] With this entity you can select type of <Volume> (default)
meter connected to a stream. <Mass>
[K-factor] With this entity you can set the K-factor The K-factor must be the number of pulses
of the flow meter supplied by per liter (gallon), regardless of the
the vendor, in pulses per [Units of configured unit of volume selection.
volume] or [Units of mass]. (default = <750.000 pulses/L>)
[Meter integrity check] With this entity you can select the pulse <Enable> = dual pulse (quad)
type of the flow meter. <Disable> = single pulse (default)
[Pulse phase relationship] With this entity you can select pulse <inverted>
phase difference which is considered to <reverse>
be correct for flow meter. When set to
<forward>
forward, only forward gives no alarm
and all other result gives pulse phase
alarm.
[MMQ] With this entity you can set the smallest default = <0.00> L
quantity specified for which the flow
meter is capable of measuring within
the applicable prescribed limit of error.
The preset value entered is validated
against the MMQ. If the value is less
than the MMQ, then a batch cannot be
started.
[Minimum linear flow rate] With this entity you can program the default = <200.00> L/min
minimum linear flow rate for the flow
meter installed.
[Maximum flow rate] With this entity you can set the default = <2000.00> L/min
maximum allowed flow rate.


[Flow rate range margin] With this entity you can set a band default = <5.00> %
around the minimum linear meter flow
and the maximum meter flow that
ensures a certain amount of margin is
used above the minimum and under
the maximum flow rates.
The margin is defined as the
percentage of the range between the
minimum linear meter flow rate and the
maximum meter flow rate and is
applied to both limits. That is, the range
of the meter is effectively reduced by
twice the amount of the factor in terms
of the loading profile.
[Meter error threshold] With this entity you can enter the default = <3>
maximum number of quad pulse errors
permitted for every 1000 pulses. If
more than the specified number of
pulses are missing in a batch of
1000 pulses, then a pulse hardware
error is generated, if the pulse integrity
check is configured.
Missing pulses that occur when the
pulse input frequency is below the
meter cutoff frequency are not counted
towards the pulse hardware alarm. A
quad pulse
phase error also increments the pulse
hardware error count.
[K-factor type] With this entity you can specify if the <Linear> (default)
meter is configured to use a linear or <Non-Linear>
non-linear K-factor. This setting affects
the calculation of the effective K-Factor
entity.
[DI hysteresis time] With this entity you can set the active default = <250> ms
time in milliseconds (ms) of the input
signal before accepting it as a valid
input signal. The time between two
signal transitions must be greater than
the [Hysteresis time].
[Flow meter serial #] With this entity you can program the
manufacturer serial number of the
flowmeter.

5.17.1.4.3 RTD
On the System Config . Device . I/O settings screen, select an

available RTD. The following entities are displayed on the System
Config . RTD-n screen.

[RTD serial #] With this entity you can enter the serial Alphanumeric string of maximum 8
number of the connected PT100 characters.
temperature probe.
[Temperature offset] With this entity you can insert a default = 0.00 ..°C
certified thermometer near the RTD
and adjust the MSC-L to read the same
temperature. The temperature offset is
for calibration of the RTD.
[RTD wiring] With this entity you can set the wiring <3 wire>
configuration of the RTD. <4 wire> (default)
<Unknown>


[HH alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the high NOTE: The entity is blank (empty) by
high temperature alarm threshold. default.
When exceeded, a temperature alarm
occurs.
[H alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the high
temperature alarm threshold. When
exceeded, a temperature alarm occurs.
[L alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the low
[LL alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the low low
[Alarm hysteresis] With this entity you can set the

hysteresis around the alarm levels.
This hysteresis is used for avoiding
alarm ON/OFF-toggling situations at an
alarm level.
• A High (High) alarm occurs when the
value becomes higher than [HH/H
Alarm Threshold].
• A Low (Low) alarm occurs when the
value becomes lower than [LL/L
Alarm Threshold].
• A High (High) alarm disappears
when the value becomes lower than
[HH/H Alarm Threshold] - [Alarm
Hysteresis], and a Low (Low) alarm
disappears when the value becomes
higher than [L/LL Alarm Threshold] +
[Alarm Hysteresis].

5.17.1.4.4 AI
On the System Config . I/O settings . AI screen, select the available

Analog Inputs (AIs). The following entities are displayed on the System
Config.AI-n screen.

[PV value @20mA] With this entity the process value at default = 100.00
20 mA can be configured.
[PV value @4mA] With this entity the process value at default = 0.00
4 mA can be configured.
[AI threshold] With this entity the analog input default = 0.00
threshold value defines the range for 0
or 1.
For example, 0 or not active from 4-12
mA and 1 or active from 12 mA to 20
mA.
[AI logic state] With this entity you can determine how <Negative> (default)
the injector controller uses the analog <Positive>
input signal.
• <Positive>: 0 or inactive from 4-[AI
threshold] mA and 1 or active from
[AI threshold] to 20 mA.
• <Negative>: 1 or active from 4-[AI
threshold] mA and 0 or inactive from
[AI threshold] to 20 mA.
[AI serial #] With this entity you can enter the serial Alphanumeric string of maximum 8
number of the connected analog input characters.
device or transmitter.


[HH alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the high NOTE: The entity is blank (empty) by
high PV alarm threshold. When default.
exceeded, a PV alarm occurs.
[H alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the high PV
alarm threshold. When exceeded, a PV
alarm occurs.
[L alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the low PV
alarm threshold. When exceeded, a PV
alarm occurs.
[LL alarm threshold] With this entity you can set the low low
PV alarm threshold. When exceeded, a
PV alarm occurs.
[Alarm hysteresis] With this entity you can set the

hysteresis around the alarm levels.
This hysteresis is used for avoiding
alarm ON/OFF toggling situations at an
alarm level.
• A high (high) alarm occurs when the
value becomes higher than [HH/H
Alarm Threshold].
• A low (low) alarm occurs when the
value becomes lower than [LL/L
Alarm Threshold].
• A high (high) alarm disappears when
the value becomes lower than [HH/H
Alarm Threshold - Hysteresis] and a
low (low) alarm disappears when the
value becomes higher than [L/LL
Alarm Threshold + Hysteresis].

5.17.1.4.5 AO

available Analog Outputs (AOs). The following entities are displayed on
the System Config . AO-n screen.

[Operational mode] With this entity you can select between <Explicitly driven> (default) - The output
two modes for the analog output. value is set by the application (for
If AO is assigned to ACV valve type, example, valve control).
keep operational mode as <Explicitly <Follow PV> - The output reflects one of
driven>. the Primary Values measured by the
MSC-L.
<Calibrate Low>
<Calibrate High>
[Follow PV source] With this entity you can select the <None> (default)
process variable to be mapped on the <Batch GOV>
analog output (4-20 mA). <Batch GSV>
<Batch mass>
<Batch Flow rate>
<Batch instant. temp>
<Batch instant. pressure>
<Batch instant. density>
[Upper boundary] With this entity you can select the PV default = 0.00
value at 20 mA. For units, see Value range of [PV address].
For the actual current value linear Note: The Upper boundary values are set
interpolation is used between [Lower as per the units selected in the [PV
boundary] and [Upper boundary]. address] entity.
[Lower boundary] With this entity you can select the PV default = 0.00
value at 4 mA. For units, see Value range of [PV address].
For the actual current value linear Note: The Lower boundary values are set
interpolation is used between [Lower as per the units selected in the [PV
boundary] and [Upper boundary]. address] entity.


[Burn out value] default = 3.60
5.17.1.4.6 PO

available Pulse Outputs (POs). The following entities are displayed on
the System Config . PO-n screen.
Entity Available I/Os

[Pulse output selection] None, any of the QPIs, FPO
PO-1 : None, any of the QPIs on Arm Board 1 (QPI 1A-6A,QPI 1B – 6B), FPO
PO-2 : None, any of the QPIs(Channel B) on Arm Board 1 (QPI 1B – 6B), FPO
PO-3 : None, any of the QPIs on Arm Board 2 (QPI 7A - 12A, QPI 7B – 12B), FPO
PO-4 : None, any of the QPIs(Channel B) on Arm Board 2 (QPI 7B – 12B), FPO
default = None

5.17.1.4.7 EMR

available EMRs. The following entities are displayed on the System
Config . DO-EMR-n screen.

[Relay mode] With this entity you can configure the <Energized>
default mode of the EMR output. <De-energized> (default)
5.17.1.5 System Config . Device . Alarms

1. On the System Config . Device screen, select Alarms.
The System Config . Device . Alarms screen appears.
Alarms can have the following alarm actions.

 <Disabled>:
The alarm is ignored.
 <Display>:
 The alarm appears on the display.
 The alarm-indication output is set to ON.
 <Display shutdown>:
 The alarm-shutdown output is set to ON.
 Running batch is stopped.
 <Display pause>:
 The alarm is shown on the display.
 The alarm-indication output set to ON.
 Running batch is paused.
2. On the System Config . Alarms screen, select each entity to
configure the alarms.
5.17.1.5.1 System Config . Alarms . Next scheduled service
On the System Config . Device . Alarms screen, select <Next scheduled

service>. The following entities are displayed on the System Config .
Alarms . Next scheduled service screen.
[Alarm action] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
alarm behavior, in case this particular <Display> (default)
alarm occurs. <Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Next scheduled service] With this entity you can select the date <Year>
when the next service activities should <Month>
take place for the MSC-L. It is handled
<Day>
similar to an alarm and can be
configured to a required alarm behavior
Note: By default, 01-01-25 appears.
(Disable, Display, Display shutdown, or
However, to change the default date enter
Display pause).
the year, month, and day.
5.17.1.5.2 System Config . Alarms . Programmable Alarms
On the System Config . Device . Alarms screen, select <Programmable

alarms>. The following entities are displayed on the System Config .
Alarms . Programmable Alarms screen.
The MSC-L contains four device programmable alarms [Programmable
alarm 1], [Programmable alarm 2], [Programmable alarm 3], and [Programmable
alarm 4].
When any of the device programmable alarm arises, the MSC-L stops
or pauses all the running batches based on the configuration. To clear

the programmable alarm, the programmable input must be connected/

disconnected based on the expected input state configured. Then, the
alarm disappears and the MSC-L resumes. However, it is not required
to reset the condition with normal alarms.
NOTE: You can configure Emergency Stop as the MSC-L

programmable alarm.
[IO binding] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused QPI-n, AI-n, DI-AC-n,
physical input source for the DI-DC-n, or None.
programmable alarm function. The default value is <None>.
[Alarm action] With this entity you can configure the <Disable>
alarm behavior, in case this particular <Display>
alarm occurs. <Display Shutdown>
<Display pause> (default)
[Alarm name] With this entity you can configure the A maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters
name of the alarm. are allowed for configuration.
[Response time] With this entity you can set the time in <0> s ... <255> s
seconds, which is the time required for (default = <1> s)
the input to change from one state to
other.
[Alarm activation (Idle)] With this entity you can set the state of <None> (default)
the input when the MSC-L is in idle <Active>
state for the alarm function. The MSC-L <Deactive>
state is in idle when the transactions
are not started for loading process.
<None>: The alarm is ignored.

<Active>: Alarm occurs when the input
state is active.
<Deactive>: Alarm occurs when the
input state is deactive.
[Alarm activation (Running)] With this entity you can set the state of <None> (default)
the input when the MSC-L is in running <Active>
state for the alarm function. After <Deactive>
successful authorization and
permissives gets connected to start a
loading process, the MSC-L is in the
running state and continues to be in
this state till all the permissives are
disconnected after the transactions are
complete.
• <None>: The alarm is ignored.

• <Active>: The alarm occurs when
the input state is active.
• <Deactive>: The alarm occurs when
the input state is deactive.
5.17.1.5.3 System Config . Alarms . Deadman

1. On the System Config . Device . Alarms screen, select Deadman.

The System Config . Alarms . Deadman screen appears. The

deadman function of the MSC-L allows the loading process to be
monitored to ensure the operator's attention and safety during the
loading operation.
2. On the System Config . Alarms . Deadman screen, the following
entities are displayed.
5.17.1.5.3.1 Deadman Status

[Deadman status] With this entity you can <Enable> or <Enable>
<Disable> deadman alarm function. <Disable> (default)
If enabled, the operator/driver must
repeatedly (within the settable timeout
period) press a key on the keyboard of
the MSC-L or press deadman refresh
switch to prevent the deadman function
from being triggered.
5.17.1.5.3.2 Deadman Indicator

[Output] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DO-SSR, DO-EMR, PO,
physical output for the deadman or None.
indicator function. The default value is <None>.
[Timeout] With this entity you can set the time in <10> s ... <999> s
seconds in which the operator must (default = <150> s)
press a key or refresh the deadman
switch in an interval of [Deadman
indicator timeout] to prevent the
deadman indicator (warning) lamp from
being activated and deadman bell
(siren) start the beep.
5.17.1.5.3.3 Deadman bell

physical output for the deadman bell or None.
function. The default value is <None>.
seconds in which after the deadman (default = <30> s)
indicator output activates, the operator
must press a key or deadman switch
refresh to prevent the batch from being
paused and deadman bell activate
continuously.

5.17.1.5.3.4 Deadman callout

physical output for the deadman callout or None.
function. The default value is <None>.
seconds in which after the batch (default = <30> s)
pauses the operator must press a key
or deadman switch refresh to prevent
the batch to stop and the deadman
callout out output activates.
If the batch is stopped by the activation
of the deadman callout, the deadman
alarm raises.
5.17.1.5.3.5 Deadman refresh switch

[Deadman refresh switch] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused QPI-n, AI-n, DI-AC-n,
physical input source for the deadman DI-DC-n, or None.
refresh function. The default value is <None>.
5.17.1.5.4 System Config . Alarms . Permissives

1. On the System Config . Device . Alarms screen, select
Permissives.
The System Config . Alarms . Permissives screen appears.
2. On this screen the following entity is displayed.

[Timeout] With this entity you can configure the <10> s ... <999> s
permissive timeout. (default = <300> s)

5.17.1.5.5 System Config . Alarms . Fixed

1. On the System Config . Device . Alarms screen, select Fixed.
The System Config . Alarms . Fixed screen appears.
2. On this screen the following entity is displayed.

[Power supply fault] With this entity you can configure an <Disabled>
alarm that is triggered when there is a <Display> (default)
power supply fault. <Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Loss of TAS Comms.] With this entity you can configure an <Disabled>
alarm that is triggered when there is a <Display> (default)
loss in TAS Comms. <Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Emergency stop] With this entity you can configure alarm <Disabled>
action for Emergency Stop alarm. <Display>
<Display shutdown> (default)
<Display pause>
[Loss of NEDAP Comms.] With this entity you can configure alarm <Disabled>
action for Nedap communication. <Display> (default)
<Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
5.17.1.6 System Config . Device . Authorization

 On the System Config . Device screen, select Authorization.

The System Config . Device . Authorization screen appears.
5.17.1.6.1 System Config . Authorization. Setup
On the System Config . Device . Authorization screen, select

General Setup. The following entities are displayed on the System
Config . Authorization . Setup screen.
[Authorization mode] With this entity the authorization for the <No verification>
MSC-L is provided. <Local verification> (default)
<Remote verification>
With this entity you can configure the
authorization modes for users, carriers,
vehicles, trailers and contracts.
<User>
<Carrier>
<Vehicle>
<Trailer>
<Contract>


[Authorization type] With this entity you can configure <None>
the authorization mechanism for <PIN> (default)
users, carriers, vehicles, trailers or <NexWatch>
contracts.
<Nedap>
<User>
<Carrier>
<Vehicle>
<Trailer>
<Contract>
This configuration defines the input

device for all the authorization screens
used in the workflow. PIN indicates a
value entered directly by the user
through the MSC-L keyboard.
NexWatch and Nedap refer to two
different types of external reader
devices. When configured for
NextWatch or Nedap the user must
present a card/RFID tag to the reader
as a means of entering the
authorization data.
5.17.1.6.2 System Config . Authorization. Databases

1. On the System Config . Device . Authorization screen, select
Databases. The System Config . Authorization . Databases
screen appears with the following entities.
5.17.1.6.2.1 User Database

1. On the System Config . Authorization . Databases screen, select
User databases.

The System Config . Databases . User database screen appears,

which displays the Index, Person name, PIN, and Security level.
2. Select any one of the databases and then select OK on the IR

controller or the LAD.
The System Config . User database . Change database screen
appears, on which the user database details can be entered.
[Name] With this entity you can configure the A text string of maximum 16 characters.
name of the user.
[PIN] With this entity you can configure the A numeric string of maximum 10 digits.
password associated with the user
account.
[Security Level] With this entity you can configure the <Security level 1>
security level associated with the user <Security level 2>
account.
<Security level 3>
5.17.1.6.2.2 Objects Database

1. On the System Config . Authorization . Databases screen, select
Objects database.

The System Config . Databases . Objects database screen

appears, which displays the Index, Object name, PIN, and Object
Type.
2. Select any one of the databases and then select OK on the IR

The Device Configuration . Change DB screen appears, on which
the objects database details can be entered.
[Name] With this entity you can configure the A text string of maximum 16 characters.
name of the object.
[PIN] With this entity you can configure the A numeric string of maximum 10 digits.
password associated with the object.
[Object Type] With this entity you can configure the <Unknown>
attibute of the object. <Vehicle>
<Carrier>
<Trailer>
<Contract>
5.17.1.7 Device Configuration . Base Conditions

1. On the System Configuration . Device screen, select Base
conditions.

The System Config . Device . base conditions screen appears.
2. On the System Config . device .base conditions screen, select

each entity to configure the MSC-L.
[Base temperature] With this entity you can configure the [Value]
temperature at which the standardize default = <15>
volume is calculated. [Units]
<Degrees Celsius> (default)
<Degrees Fahrenheit>
[Base pressure] With this entity you can configure the [Value]
pressure at which the standardize default = <0>
volume is calculated. [Units]
<Pascal>
<Kilo Pascal> (default)
<PSI large>
<Bar>
5.17.1.8 Device Configuration . Workflow Settings

1. On the System Config . Device screen, select <Workflow settings>.

The System config . device . Workflow settings screen appears.
2. On the System config . device . Workflow settings screen, select

each entity to configure the MSC-L.
5.17.1.8.1 System Config . Options
On the System Config . Device . Workflow settings screen, select

Options. The following entities are displayed.
[Max. simultaneous loads] Allows you to configure the maximum default = <0>
number of batches that can be loaded
simultaneously using different arms.
[Multiple loads per arm] Allows you to enable or disable the <Enable> (default)
functionality to perform multiple <Disable>
batches on an arm in the same
transaction.
[Batch start] When configured as remote, the batch <Local> (default)

can be started remotely through TAS. <Remote>
When configured as local, the batch
can only be started using the START
key.


[Workflow Selection] This configuration selects which <Default> (default)
workflow is started when the device is <Custom>
powered up. The MSC-L can support
two independent workflow
configurations (Default and Custom).
One of these two configurations
(Default) is programmed in the factory
and contains sufficient functionality to
perform compartment loading without
any TAS interaction. The MSC-L
prompting configuration settings enable
and disable certain specific prompts
used in this default workflow. The
custom workflow can be initialized by
first changing the workflow selection
setting to custom and then applying a
custom workflow XML file through the
LAD. The device must be restarted for
this workflow to take effect. After
changing the workflow selection
setting, the device should always be
reset to restart the desired workflow.
Refer to 5.17.1.8.1.1 to run local and
remote loading in MSC-L for 1010
emulation.
[TAS timeout] With this entity you can select the TAS <10s> (default)
request timeout duration.
[Workflow Mode] Select this entity to operate MSC-L in <Local> (default)

either standalone or operate with TAS <Remote with Local fallback>
<Local> <Remote>
MSC-L device will operate in
standalone mode
<Remote with Local fallback>
MSC-L will be controlled by TAS, and in
case of communication failure, it will
switch back to stand alone operation
<Remote only>
MSC-L will always be controlled by
TAS
When using emulation type as

Accuload, make sure that the
[Workflow Mode] is <Remote only>.
[Use RIT Panel] With this entity you can enable or <Enable>
disable the RIT panel <Disable>(default)
[Allow Reset Alarms by SL1 With this entity, you can allow SL1 user <Enable>
User] to reset all alarms except those at <Disable> (default)
device level.


[Arm level Start for remote With this entity you select to use Arm <Enable>
loading] level Start for remote loading. When <Disable> (default)
enabled, the device supports multiple
batch planning commands (remote
loading) sent for different arms with
operator selecting and determining
which arm to start.
[Use loadspot RIT panel] With this entity you can select to use <Enable>
loadspot level RIT panel. <Disable> (default)
Also enable the [Use RIT panel] to use
this feature.
[Max. loadspots per cluster] With this entity you define the <1>.to. <3>
maximum number of loadspots used in (default = <1>)
each cluster.
Load spot RIT panel:

When [Use loadspot RIT panel] is enabled, RIT is used to control operations
at load spot level instead of at arm level. The Input and output bindings
of the nth loadspot RIT is to be assigned to nth arm of same cluster.The
number of load spot level RITs usable in each cluster is either equal to
the number of arms in the cluster or number of load spots in the same
cluster whichever is lower. The numer of loads
Example:
Consider Arms 1, 3, 5 and 6 are in cluster 1 with 3 load spots The
Bindings for RIT at first second and third load spots are to be assigned
to arms 1, 3 and 5 respectively.
5.17.1.8.1.1 Workflow Installation and Configuration settings for MSC-L 1010 Emulation
To configure a MSC-L device to run Local and Remote loading, you

should install two workflows as given below:
 1010xxLocal.xml workflow to run in local mode.
 1010xxRemote.xml workflow to run in remote mode.
(xx here stands for emulation type e.g. RD, BJ you intend to use)
Copy only the required workflows in LAD at \Honeywell\MSC-
L\Generic\Configurations
Steps:
1. Main Menu | System | Device | Workflow settings | Options |
Workflow selection = <Default>
2. Install default workflow 1010xxLocal.xml.
3. After Installation is compete, press "OK" to reboot.
Workflow selection = <Custom>
5. Install 1010xxRemote.xml.

6. After Installation is compete, press "OK" to reboot.

Workflow selection = <Default>
Workflow mode = <Remote>
9. Main Menu | System | Device | General | Settings | Emulation type =
<1010xx>
10. Reboot device

5.17.1.8.2 System Config . Prompts
On the System Config . Device . Workflow settings screen, select

Prompt. The following entities are displayed.
[User identification] Alllows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
user identification prompt <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Carrier identification] Alllows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
carrier identification prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Vehicle identification] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
vehicle identification prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Trailer identification] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
trailer identification prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Load number identification] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
load number prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Compartment identification] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
compartment number prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Return quantity entry] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
return quantity prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Preset entry] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
preset entry prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Preset unloading entry] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
preset unloading entry promt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Contract identification] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled>
contract identification prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Batch details prompt] Allows you to enable or disable the <Enable>
Batch details promt. <Disable>
[Driver number identification] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled> (default)
Diver number identification prompt. <Optional>
<Mandatory>
[Queuing] Allows you to enable or disable <Disabled>
Queuing. <Enable>


[Manual density entry] Allows you to enable or disable the <Disabled> (default)
manual density entry prompt in local <Optional>
loading.
<Mandatory>
[Nitrogen purging to truck] This entity allows you to enable <Enable>
Nitrogen purging to truck prompt in <Disable> (default)
LNG workflow.
[Nitrogen purging to open air] This entity allows you to enable <Enable>
Nitrogen purging to open air prompt in <Disable> (default)
LNG workflow.
[Release pressure] This entity allows you to enable release <Enable>

pressure air prompt in LNG workflow. <Disable> (default)
[Recirculation] This entity allows you to enable <Enable>
recirculation prompt in LNG workflow. <Disable> (default)
NOTE: Marked used only 1010 RD emulation
5.17.1.9 Device Configuration . RIT Panel

1. On the System Config . Device screen, select RIT Panel.
The System Config . Device . RIT Panel screen appears.

2. On the System Config . Device . RIT Panel screen, select each

[Lamp status idle] With this entity you can select the lamp <All off>
status on the Remote Interaction <Red steady> (default)
Terminal, when idle. <Red flashing>
<Amber steady>
<Amber flashing>
<Green steady>
<Green flashing>
[Lamp status authorization] With this entity you can select the lamp <All off>
status on the Remote Interaction <Red steady>
Terminal during authorisation.
<Red flashing>
<Amber steady> (default)
<Amber flashing>
<Green steady>
<Green flashing>
[Lamp state wait ack] With this entity you can select the lamp <All off>
Terminal, when waiting for
<Red flashing>
acknowledgement.
<Amber steady>
<Amber flashing> (default)
<Green steady>
<Green flashing>
[Lamp state wait start] With this entity you can select the lamp <All off>
Terminal, when waiting for start.
<Red flashing>
<Amber steady>
<Amber flashing>
<Green steady>
<Green flashing> (default)
[Lamp state loading] With this entity you can select the lamp <All off>
Terminal, when loading.
<Red flashing>
<Amber steady>
<Amber flashing>
<Green steady> (default)
<Green flashing>
[Lamp state error] With this entity you can select the lamp <All off>
Terminal, when in an error. <Red flashing> (default)
<Amber steady>
<Amber flashing>
<Green steady>
<Green flashing>

5.17.2 Bay Configuration

On the System Configuration screen, select Bay.
The System Config . Bay screen appears, which displays the functions
available for device configuration.
5.17.2.1 System Config . bay . Identification

 On the System Config . Bay screen, select Identification.
The following entities are displayed on the System Config . Bay .
Identification screen.
[Bay name] With this entity you can configure the A text string of maximum 20 characters.
name of the bay. Use maximum 7 characters to view the
complete name on the MSC-L screen.
[Bay number] With this entity you can assign a unique A numeric string of maximum 20
number that can be used to identify the characters.
bay. Use maximum 7 characters to view the
complete name on the MSC-L screen.

5.17.2.2 Bay Configuration . I/O Binding

1. On the System Config . Bay screen, select I/O bindings. The
System Config . Bay . I/O bindings screen appears.
2. On the System Config . Bay . I/O bindings screen, select each

5.17.2.2.1 Bay Configuration . I/O Binding . Inputs
On the Bay Configuration . I/O binding screen, select Inputs. The

following entities are displayed on the Bay Configuration . I/O Binding
. Inputs screen.
[Grounding] With this entity you can configure the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-
physical source for the grounding input. n, AI-n, or None.
[Overfill] With this entity you can configure the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-
physical source for overfill protection n, AI-n, or None.
input. The default value is <None>.
[Vapour recovery] With this entity you can configure the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-
physical source for the vapour recovery n, AI-n, or None.
input. The default value is <None>.
5.17.2.2.2 Device Configuration . I/O Binding . Outputs
On the Bay Configuration . I/O binding screen, select <Outputs>. The

following entities are displayed on the Bay Configuration . I/O Binding
Outputs screen.
[Bay active] With this entity you can configure the Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
output, which indicates the bay active. PO-n, or None.


[Draining valve] With this entity you can configure the Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
output, which is used for the draining PO-n, or None.
valve. This is used during nitrogen The default value is <None>.
purging to open air operation in LNG
loading.
[Recirculation valve] With this entity you can configure the Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
output, which is used for the PO-n, or None.
recirculation valve. The default value is <None>.
5.17.2.3 Bay Configuration . Alarms

1. On the System Config . Bay screen, select Alarms.
The System Config . Bay . Alarms screen appears.

 <Disabled>:
The alarm is ignored.
 <Display>:


2. On the System Config . Bay . Alarms screen, select each entity to
configure the alarms.
5.17.2.3.1 System Config . Alarms . Programmable alarms
On the System Config . Bay . Alarms screen, select Programmable

alarms.The following entities are displayed.
The MSC-L contains six bay programmable alarms [Programmable alarm 1],
[Programmable alarm 2], [Programmable alarm 3], [Programmable alarm 4],
[Programmable alarm 5], and Programmable alarm 6].
When any of the device programmable alarm arises, the MSC-L stops
or pauses all the running batches based on the configuration. To clear
the programmable alarm, the programmable input must be connected/
disconnected based on the expected input state configured. Then, the
alarm disappears and the MSC-L resumes again. However, it is not
required to reset the condition with normal alarms.
NOTE: You can configure Emergency Stop as the MSC-L

programmable alarm.
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Response time] With this entity you can set the time in <0> s... <255> s
other.
state is idle when the transactions are
not started for loading process.



complete.

5.17.2.3.2 System Config . Alarms . Weighbridge alarms

1. On the System Config . Bay alarm screen, select Weighbridge
alarms. The System Config . Weighbridge alarms screen
appears.
2. The System Config . Alarms . Weighbridge tolerance screen

appears with following entities.

[Alarm action] This entity defines alarm action for <Disabled>
weighbridge tolerance alarm action. <Display>
<Display shutdown>


[Tolerance limit] This entity defines maximum difference <0.1> ... <100.0>
allowed between mass loaded via (default = <5>)
weighbridge and mass flowmeter.
This is used when weighbridge and
Flowmeter both ae used.
[Tolerance time] This entity defines the duration after <1> s... <255> s
which the tolerance alarm is generated (default = <5> s)
if mass loaded via weighbridge and
mass flowmeter exceed [Tolerance
limit].
3. The System Config . Alarms . Weighbridge Comms screen
appears with following entities

[Loss of weighbridge comms] This entity defines alarm action for <Disabled>
weighbridge communication failure. <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Communication timeout] With this entity you can select the <1> s... <255> s
weighbridge response timeout (default = <60> s)
duration.
5.17.2.4 System Config . Bay . Permissives

1. On the System Config . Bay screen, select Permissives.
The System Config . Bay . Permissives screen appears.

2. On this screen the following entities are displayed.

[Grounding] With this entity you can configure the <Pause> (default)
action taken when the grounding input <Shutdown>
is detached.
<Timeout>
<Manual Reset>
[Overfill] With this entity you can configure the <Pause> (default)
action taken when the overfill input is <Shutdown>
detached.
<Timeout>
<Manual Reset>
[Vapour recovery] With this entity you can configure the <Pause> (default)
action taken when the vapour recovery <Shutdown>
input is detached.
<Timeout>
<Manual Reset>
The various permissive types and the associated actions are described
as follows:
1. Pause: If the physical input associated with the permissive is discon-
nected during loading, all the batches running on this bay are
paused. If the input is reconnected then the alarm is auto cleared
and the batch can be resumed.
2. Shutdown: If the physical input associated with the permissive is
disconnected during loading, all the batches running on the bay are
terminated. The alarm is auto cleared after the transaction is
terminated.
3. Timeout: If the physical input associated with the permissive is
disconnected during loading, all the batches running on this bay are
paused. If the input is reconnected within the timeout configured from
the device configuration, the alarm is auto cleared and the batches
can be resumed. If the input is not reconnected during the timeout,
the transaction running on that bay is terminated and the alarm auto
clears.
4. Manual Reset: If the physical input associated with the permissive is
disconnected during loading, all the batches running on this bay are
paused. If the input is reconnected within the timeout configured from
the device configuration, the alarm is auto cleared and the batches
can be resumed. If the input is not reconnected during the timeout,
the transaction running on that bay is terminated and alarm needs to
reset manually.
The logic of the used overfill system on top-loading might impair the
expected logic of the overfill permissive in the MSC-L.

5.17.2.5 Bay Configuration . Weighbridge

1. On the System Config . Bay screen, select Weighbridge settings.
The System Config . Bay . Weighbridge settings screen appears.
2. On this screen the following entities are displayed.

[Loading type] With this entity you can define the use <None> (default)
of weighbridge for loading. <Primary>
When set to None weighbridge is not
<Secondary>
used.
When set to primary weighbridge data
is used primary measurement for
loading.
When set to secondary weighbridge
data is used along with mass flowmeter
for comparison purposes.
[Steady status time] With this entity you can set the time for (default = <60> s)
which weighbridge needs to be steady
before recording Tare weight.
[Maximum flow rate] This entity sets the maximum flowrate (default = <1900> Kg/min)
for weighbridge based loading.

Operation - Stream Configuration
5.18 Stream Configuration

To perform the Stream Configuration
2. On the Stream Configuration screen, select Product streams or

Additive streams.

5.18.1 Stream Configuration - Product Streams

1. On the Stream Configuration screen, select Product streams.
The Stream Config. Stream Selection screen appears.
2. Select the required stream or all the streams.

The Stream Config . Stream n screen appears.
5.18.1.1 Stream Config. . Stream n . Identification
On the Stream Config . Stream n screen, select Identification.

The Stream Config . Stream n . Identification screen appears with the

following entities.
[Product name] With this entity you can enter the name A text string of maximum 12 characters
of the wild stream product. can be entered.
The Product name appears on the The default value is <Stream n>.
running screens.
[Main product] With this entity you can enable or <Enable>

disable loading the main product. <Disable> (default)
[Vapour return] With this entity you can enable or <Enable>
disable vapour recovery. <Disable> (default)
NOTE: Due to memory considerations, the size of stream

name parameters for product and additive streams is
reduced to 12 in the current release. Any longer
names shall be truncated when a configuration
backed up from a prior release is installed.
5.18.1.2 Stream Config . Stream n . I/O Bindings
On the Stream Config . Stream n screen, select I/O bindings.

The new Flexible I/O Allocation architecture forms the basis of the
Fusion4 product family. The architecture is designed around the
common I/O building blocks that can be arranged in different
configurations to be used in the MSC-L.
I/O allocation can either be performed through the IR controller through
the infrared link or LAD connected to the MSC-L front connector.
To configure Input/Output entities
 On the Main Menu screen, select the Stream Configuration icon.
The Stream Configuration screen appears.
 On the Stream Configuration screen, select Product streams.
The Stream Config. - Stream Selection screen appears.
 On the Stream Config. - Stream Selection screen, select any one
of the stream or all the streams.
The Stream Config . Stream n screen appears.
 On the Stream Config . Stream n screen, select I/O bindings.
 Select Inputs or Outputs and then select OK on the Fusion4 IR
controller, Fusion4 LAD, or the integrated keyboard.
A specific entity, for example [Pump feedback], [Pump demand], and so on
can be selected and linked to a specific I/O function such as <DI AC 1>
(Digital Input AC1, number 1), <DO EMR> (Digital Output Electrome-
chanical Relay), and so on.

5.18.1.2.1 The I/O Bindings . Input Parameters
NOTE: The default value for the Input entities are None.
NOTE: When the temperature and/or pressure correction is

used, link them as below for the W&M compliance.
 Select the I/O binding for the Product Temperature as RTD input (4-wire).
 Select the I/O binding for the Product Pressure as AI (4-20 mA).
 Select the I/O binding for the Product Density as AI (4-20 mA) or use the lab
density.
Entity Description Can be linked to...

[Product stream meter] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused QPI-1A to QPI-6B (for
source for the product stream meter function. product streams 1 to 6).
Any of the unused QPI-7A to QPI-12B (for
product streams 7 to 12).
[Product temperature] With this entity you can select the physical RTD-1, RTD-2, RTD-3, RTD-4, RTD-5, RTD-
source for the product stream temperature 6, AI-1, AI-2, AI-3, AI-4, AI-5, AI-6, AI-7, AI-8,
function. AI-9, AI-10, AI-11, AI-12, AI-13, AI-14, None
[Product pressure] With this entity you can select the physical AI-1, AI-2, AI-3, AI-4, AI-5, AI-6, AI-7, I-8, AI-
source for the product stream pressure 9, AI-10, AI-11, AI-12, AI-13, AI-14, None
function.
[Product density] With this entity you can select the physical AI-1, AI-2, AI-3, AI-4, AI-5, AI-6, AI-7, I-8, AI-
source for the product stream density 9, AI-10, AI-11, AI-12, AI-13, AI-14, None
function.
[Pump feedback] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
source for the pump feedback function. AI-n, or None.
[Tank low level switch] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
physical source for the tank low level AI-n, or None.
function.
[Tank empty switch] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
physical source for the tank empty AI-n, or None.
function.
[Hydraulic pump With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
feedback] source for the hydraulic pump feedback AI-n, or None.
function.
[Block valve feedback] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
source for the block valve feedback function. AI-n, or None.
[Block valve open With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
feedback] source for the block valve open feedback AI-n, or None.
function.
[Block valve closed With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
feedback] source for the block valve closed feedback AI-n, or None.
function.
[Product vapour With this entity you can select the physical AI-1, AI-2, AI-3, AI-4, AI-5, AI-6, AI-7, I-8, AI-
pressure] source for the product stream vapour 9, AI-10, AI-11, AI-12, AI-13, AI-14, None
pressure function.

5.18.1.2.1.1 Pump Feedback

 If the [Pump feedback] I/O binding is defined, then the controller should
generate an error, if the pump indication input is inactive after the
pump demand is active.
 The allowable delay is defined by the [Pump feedback timeout] entity
(defined in the alarm settings submenu for this alarm).
5.18.1.2.1.2 Tank Low Level Switch
Supply-tank level monitoring is useful in applications where a very small

supply tank is used. This is typical in portable or mobile applications
such as truck-mounted systems.
By monitoring a hardware input connected to a level switch in the
supply tank, the controller can detect when the level in the tank is
nearing empty, and take appropriate action. This prevents the pump
from running completely dry, and prevents fueling operations from being
interrupted mid-load.
The tank-level signals used must provide a simple form contact closure
upon detection of a low level (in excess of some low point) in the supply
tank. Consideration must be given to the pump intake position in the
tank and to the amount of blend volume required for a normal fuel
delivery.
The switch-activation level must be positioned so that it is slightly higher
than the level required for normal delivery. If the tank low-level switch
indicates “low” immediately upon the start of the delivery, there is still an
adequate volume in the tank to allow the delivery to complete prior to
the pump inlet drawing air.
If the low-level condition exists, the MSC-L can operate under normal
condition. To clear the tank low-level signal, the tank must be refilled to
a point that closes the level switch. At that time, the alarm disappears.
There is no need to reset the condition as with normal alarms.
5.18.1.2.1.3 Tank Empty Switch
If the tank-empty condition exists, the MSC-L cannot operate under

normal condition. To clear the tank-empty signal, the tank must be
refilled to a point that closes the level switch. At that instance, the alarm
disappears and the MSC-L resumes to normal use. It is not required to
reset the condition with normal alarms.
5.18.1.2.1.4 Hydraulic Pump Feedback

 If the product stream [Hydraulic pump feedback] I/O binding is defined,
then the controller should generate an error if the hydraulic pump
indication input is inactive after the hydraulic pump demand is active.
 The allowable delay is defined by the [Hydraulic pump feedback timeout]
entity (defined in the alarm settings submenu for this alarm).

5.18.1.2.2 The I/O Bindings . Output Parameters
NOTE: The default value for all the Output entities are None.
[NO DCV] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unsed DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
source for the DCV function. PO-n, or None.
[NC DCV] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
source for the DCV function. PO-n, or None.
[Low flow 2SV] With this entity you can select the output Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
used in a two stage value to enable low PO-n, or None.
product flow (output is also enabled in high
flow stage).
[High flow 2SV] With this entity you can select the output Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
used in a two stage value to enable high PO-n, or None.
product flow.
[Pump demand] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
source for the pump demand function. PO-n, or None.
[Block valve control] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
source for the block valve control function. PO-n, or None.
[Hydraulic pump With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
demand] source for the hydraulic pump demand PO-n, or None.
function.
[Factored pulse output] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
source for the factored pulse output. PO-n, or None.
[Recirculation NO DCV] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
source for recirculation NO DCV. PO-n, or None.
[Recirculation NC DCV] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
source for recirculation NO DCV. PO-n, or None.
[Analog control valve] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused AO-n
source for Analog control valve.
[Product Selected With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
(Loadspot 1)] source for Product Selected output. PO-n, or None.
This output is on when the particular product
is selected for loading on Loadspot1.
[Product Selected With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-SSR-n,
(Loadspot 2)] source for Nitrogen purging valve. PO-n, or None.
This output is on when the particular product
is selected for loading on Loadspot2.
[Nitrogen Purging valve] With this entity you can select the physical Any of the unused DO-EMR-n, DO-
source for Nitrogen purging valve. SSR-n, PO-n, or None.
5.18.1.2.2.1 Pump Demand

 Product stream pump demand output should be driven high when
the batch starts (if the [Pump demand] I/O binding is defined).
 The pump is de-activated when the batch stops and [Pump run timeout]
is elapsed.

5.18.1.2.2.2 Block Valve Control

 If the [Block valve] I/O binding is defined, then the block valve output
should be active when the batch starts.
 If the block valve should remain active until the product stream stops
or pauses.
5.18.1.2.2.3 Hydraulic Pump Demand

 Product stream hydraulic pump demand output should be driven
high when the batch starts (if the [Hydraulic pump demand] I/O binding is
defined).
 The hydraulic pump is de-activated when the batch stops and
[Hydraulic pump run timeout] elapses.
5.18.1.3 Stream Config. . Stream n . Control Settings
On the Stream Config . Stream n screen, select Control Settings

The Stream Config . Stream n . Control Settings screen is displayed
with the following entities.
5.18.1.3.1 Product Control
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Control Settings screen, select

Product Control.

The Stream Config . Stream n . Product Control screen is displayed

[Dead band (kdb)] With this entity you can configure the default = <15> liters
allowed flow deviation from the target
flow. When the actual flow is less than
the [Dead band] limit, the control output
from the controller is locked. Changes
are not made to the product stream
control valve. This value effectively
establishes the dead band in which the
product stream flow can deviate
without correction.
The dead band defines this value.
[Feed forward (kff)] This entity is used only for non-DCV <0> sec ... <60> sec
type valves. (default = <10> sec)
The feedforward gain [Kff] is set to
obtain the required control action for a
given flow profile in the MSC-L. Usage
of this parameter cannot be made for
Digital Control Valve [DCV] or 2 Stage
Valve and thus must be set as 0.00.
This parameter controls the Lead-Lag
predictable during the changes in flow
profile from Low to High Flow rates or
vice-versa.
[Integral (ki)] With this entity the Integral part of the <0>L to <999>L
PI controller can be set. (default: <0> L)
It is the accumulation of previous error.
When set to 0.00, it is switched off. Set
some non-zero value if ‘chasing’ is
required.
[Output (kout)] With this entity the collaboration with <0>L/min to <999>L/min
the [-1,1] limiter is used for setting the (default = <150> L/min)
operational range of the controller.
For ACV valve type, set it to expected

product flow at 20.0 mA output in
default units.
Example: If Maximum Full Flow Rate is
1800.0 l/m then set it to 1800.
Note: Setting improper Kout gain value

would eventually damp the Controller
output to Control valve as this
practically scales the final algorithm
output with respect to maximum flow
rate indirectly.


[Proportional (kp)] With this entity the gain of the default = <1.00>
proportional part of the PI controller can
be set.
It is expressed as value of Proportional

Band [PB] percentage in the MSC-L.
PB = 100/Kp.
So, Kp of 1.00 means a PB of 100%.
[Pump run timeout] With this entity you can enter the time <0> min ... <255> mins
in minutes between the last injection (default = <10> mins)
and the additive pump stop.
[Hydr. pump run timeout] With this entity you can enter the time <1> min... <255> minutes
in minutes between stopping the blend (default = <10> mins)
stream flow and closing the hydraulic
pump.
[Factored pulse out] With this entity you can select the <1 Pulse / Unit> (default)
amount of pulses for each unit of the <10 Pulses / Unit>
product volume dispensed. <100 Pulses / Unit>
<1000 Pulses / Unit>
[Block valve activation time] With this entity you can configure the <0> sec ... <999> secs
time that the MSC-L waits after the (default = <0> sec)
activation of block valve before
controlling the DCV. This entity is used
only if the block valve feedback is not
configured.
[Factored pulse width] With this entity you can select the width <1> msec... <500> msec
of the factored pulse output. (default = <1> msec)
[Back pressure control] With this entity you can enable back <Enable>
pressure control. <Disable> (default)
[Vapour pressure margin] With this entity, you can adjust
“Minimum limit point” to provide a (default = <1> Bar)
‘safety’ margin above derived vapour
pressure. Units
<Pascal>
Note: In case of “Externally controlled” <Kilo Pascal>
vapour pressure, this parameter is
used to derive vapour pressure from
observed product pressure. <PSI large>
<Bar>
[Pressure control range factor] With this entity you can adjust Value = <0.20> ... <5.00>
‘Maximum limit point’ to change the (default = <1.00>)
pressure range where ‘back pressure
control’ is active
[Pressure control ramp time] With this entity you can configure a <0> sec ... <60> sec
pressure control ramp time interval that (default = <10> sec)
helps in smoothing out the flow/
pressure dynamics.


[Rest flow quantity] With this quantity you can configure the <0>L to <999> L
volume for which rest flow rate is (default: <0> L)
applied in the end of pre-stop flow
state. This is used to slow the flow rate
for a small quantity just before the
product stream delivery is completed.
[Rest flow rate] With this quantity you can configure the <0>L/min to <999> L/min
Rest flow rate. (default = <150> L/min)
[Pre-Cooling temperature] With this entity you can configure <-200.0> °C to <0> °C
Precooling temperature for LNG (default = <-150> °C)
Loading.
[Recirculation temperature] With this entity you can configure <-200.0> °C to <0> °C
Recirculation temperature for LNG (default = <0.0> °C)
Loading.
With default temperature (0.0) the
Recirculation feature is disabled.
Feed-Forward Proportional-Integral Control Function

The Feed-Forward Proportional-Integral Control algorithm utilized for
controlling of the flow control valve (DCV, ACV) to performed with a set
of configuration parameters and based on the calculation explained in
Calculation Flowchart.
The Configuration parameters used for the Control are:
 Dead Band [Kdb]
 Proportional Gain [Kp]
 Feed-Forward Gain [Kff]
 Integral Gain [Ki]
 Scale output [Kout]
Calculation Flowchart
The below flowchart depicts the Control flow.


Feed Forward PI Fine Tune Examples:

Example 1:
 Deadband (Kbd) = 15
 Feed forward (Kff) = 0
 Integral (Ki) = 0
 Output (Kout) = 2000
 Proportional (Kp) = 1
Example 2:
 Integral (Ki) = 1

Example 3:
 Integral (Ki) = 0.1

Example 4:
 Proportional (Kp) =0.2
Example 5:

Example 6:
 Feed forward (Kff) = 0.5
Example 7:

Example 8:
 Proportional (Kp) = 0.01
Example 9:

Example 10:
5.18.1.3.2 Valve Control
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Control Settings screen, select

Valve Control.
The Stream Config . Stream n . Valve screen is displayed with the
following entities.
[Valve type] With this entity you can select an entity <None> (default)
for configuring the valve type. <DCV>
<Two stage valve>
<ACV>
<Simulated DCV>
[Valve closing quantity] You can use the valve closing entity to default = <0>
over-run the preset value. In the next
batches, the DCV and block values are
closed at the set valve closing quantity.
This is to ensure that the configured
is met. The recommended value of this
parameter is between 0L and 5L.
[DCV period] With this entity you can configure the <100> msec ... <1000> msec
time in between DCV output updates. (default = <300> msec)


[DCV minimum pulse width] With this entity you can configure the <50> msec... <950> msec
minimal time in between solenoid (default = <50> msec)
changes.
[Recirculation Valve mode] With this entity you can configure the <Inverse DCV>
recirculation valve mode <Follow DCV>
[ACV non-linearity factor] With this entity you can configure the <0.2> ... <5.0>
ACV non-linearity factor (default = <1> )
The normalized valve transfer curve
can be represented by:
y = x^k, where x - input {0.0...1.0}; y -
output {0.0...1.0}; k - power factor
{0.3...3.0} (ideally 1.0)
[Low flow 2SV in initial phase] With this entity you can configure the <Active> (default)
digital value of the [Low flow 2SV in <Inactive>
initial phase] output for the selected
product stream in initial flow phase.
[Low flow 2SV in pre-stop With this entity you can configure the <Active> (default)
phase] digital value of the [Low flow 2SV in <Inactive>
pre-stop phase] output for the selected
[Low flow 2SV in full flow With this entity you can configure the <Active> (default)
phase] digital value of the [Low flow 2SV in full <Inactive>
flow phase] output for the selected
[High flow 2SV in initial phase] With this entity you can configure the <Active>
digital value of the [High flow 2SV in <Inactive>(default)
initial phase] output for the selected
[High flow 2SV in pre-stop With this entity you can configure the <Active>
phase] digital value of the [High flow 2SV in <Inactive>(default)
pre-stop phase] output for the selected
[High flow 2SV in full flow With this entity you can configure the <Active> (default)
phase] digital value of the [High flow 2SV in full <Inactive>
flow phase] output for the selected
NOTE: For accurate DCV control performance, it is recom-

mended to configure the Digital Outputs (DO's)
locally. That is, use the SSR's for valve control on the
CAN-ARM-MSC board where the flow meter is
configured to the Pulse Input(s) (PI).

5.18.1.4 Volume Conversion
5.18.1.4.1 Volume Conversion Essential Information
The MSC-L volume conversions are meant for the conversion of the
measured Gross Observed Volume (GOV) to the Gross Standard
Volume (GSV).
The GSV is defined at base (reference) conditions for temperature and
pressure, and hence it is suitable for highly accurate custody transfer of
various products.
NOTE: Configured/observed pressures are gauge

pressures, i.e. pressures above standard atmos-
pheric pressure of 101.325 kPa, so it is important
that gauge (not absolute) pressure transmitters are
used as pressure sensors. Also, in case of NGL and
LPG (TP27-07 commodity group), configured base
pressure is the pressure above product vapour
pressure as it is typically stated for custody transfer
purposes.
Volume conversion
GOV = Gross Observed Volume (volume at observed T, P)
GSV = Gross Standard Volume (volume at baseT, P)
CTL = Correction for the effect of Temperature on Liquid
CPL = Correction for the effect of Pressure on Liquid
GOV
Product volume
Observed Observed
Product temperature
Calculated
Commodity group standard: CTPL = CTL * CPL
Product pressure MSC-L volume corrections
MPMS 11.1 (D1250-04), etc.
Product density GSV = GOV * CTPL
Calculate CTPL
Measured
Thermal expansion factor
Calculated
Product pressure (Lab)
Product density(Lab)
Density input usage

Product temp. (Lab)
GSV
Base temperature
Commodity group
Product volume
Base pressure
Configured Base
The MSC-L implements volume conversions for the product groups

(commodity groups) as follows:
 A = Crude oil
 B = Refined products
 C = Special applications (thermal expansion factor needed)
 D = Lubricating oils

 E = NGL and LPG

 FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters
 Petroleum to CNP6-70
 Ethanol mix to NBR 5992:2008 / 15639:2008
 Ethanol to MPMS 11.3.3
The volume conversion is implemented according to procedures
(calculations) prescribed in various current standards.
Standard Description
API MPMS 11.1 Temperature and Pressure Volume Correction Factors
(2004) for Generalized Crude Oils Refined Products and
Lubricating Oils (Adjunct to: ASTM D 1250-04)
NOTE: designated as "D1250-04" in MSC-L user

interface
API MPMS 11.2.4 Temperature Correction for the Volume of NGL and
(2007) LPG Tables 23E 24E 53E 54E 59E and 60E (GPA
Technical Publication TP-27)
NOTE: designated as "TP27-07" in MSC-L user

interface
EN 14214 Automotive fuels - Fatty acid methyl esters (FAME) for
(2008) diesel engines
NOTE: designated as "EN14214-08" in MSC-L user

interface
API MPMS 11.2.2 Compressibility Factors for Hydrocarbons: 0.350-0.637
Relative Density (60°F/60°F) and -50°F to 140°F
Metering Temperature
API MPMS 11.2.5 Simplified Vapour Pressure Correlation for Commercial
NGLs
CNP Resolution No. 6-70, Conversion of Observed Density to Density at 20 °C
Tables I and II and Volume Correction to 20 °C
NOTE: Designated as "CNP6-70 (Petroleum)" in MSC-L

user interface
NBR 5992:2008 / Ethanol and its mixtures with water
15639:2008
NOTE: Designated as "NBR15639-08 (Ethanol Mix)" in
MSC-L user interface
API MPMS 11.3.3 Ethanol Density and Volume Correction Factors
NOTE: Designated as "MPMS 11.3.3 (Pure/Fuel

Ethanol)" in MSC-L user interface
API MPMS 9.1 / ASTM Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, or
D1298-12b API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum
Products by Hydrometer Method
NOTE: designated as "D1298-12B" in MSC-L user

interface

The following table provides convenient reference to the historical

'Tables' designations in respect to the current standards' procedures.
Procedure Paragraph Historical Table
Standard
in Current Standard Designation
API MPMS 11.1 11.1.6.1 6/24 A, B, C & D
API MPMS 11.1 11.1.6.2 5/23 A, B & D
API MPMS 11.1 11.1.7.1 54/60 A, B, C & D
API MPMS 11.1 11.1.7.2 53/59 A, B & D
API MPMS 11.2.4 5.1 23/24 E
API MPMS 11.2.4 5.2 53/54 E
API MPMS 11.2.4 5.3 59/60 E
Since the procedures from the same standard can be differentiated by

stipulated base (reference) temperature, this allows MSC-L to engage
the appropriate procedure based on the configured base (reference)
temperature without any additional inputs from the end users.
MSC-L directly applies appropriate procedures from standards for
cases where configured base conditions (temperature and pressure)
match the ones referenced in the chosen standard (commodity group),
otherwise a generic 2-step approach is used: procedures from the
chosen standard are used first to convert from observed to referenced
conditions and then from referenced conditions to configured base
conditions.
To cater for various practical scenarios, MSC-L offers efficient and
flexible configuration options (all are individual per product stream,
except "base conditions") including:
 Base (reference) temperature and pressure (these parameters are
'device' based, that is same for all product streams)
 Commodity group (in connection with related standard)
 Compensation type (None, Temperature, or Temperature and
Pressure)
 Density input usage option (determines whether density sensor at
metering conditions or laboratory density data is used)
 Range options (allows for wider range than stipulated by standards)
 Laboratory observation data

Temperature effects are catered for all commodity groups by standards'

procedures (calculations), while pressure effects are catered for
different standardized commodity groups as follows:
 D1250-04 (MPMS 11.1) - by standard itself
 TP27-07 (MPMS 11.2.4) - by additionally applying CPL factor based
on MPMS 11.2.2 and vapour pressure (MPMS 11.2.5 is used if
vapour pressure source is set to ‘Calculated’)
 CNP6-70 - by additionally applying CPL factor based on MPMS
11.2.1M (utilizing D1250-04 procedures)
 Other commodity groups - pressure compensation not supported

If density sensor is not used, then laboratory observation density is

used to derive density at base conditions and, conveniently this
laboratory data can represent conditions different from base conditions.
Laboratory data parameters also include thermal expansion coefficient
which is required for commodity group C (Special Apps.).
The “Density reading correction” parameter can be set for convenient
entering of laboratory observed density as direct reading from a glass
hydrometer (D1298-12B). The “Mixture percentage” and “Mixture calc.
option” parameters allow for mixture percentage (either by mass or by
volume) to be used instead of laboratory observed density in case of
NBR15639-08 commodity group (ethanol mixture with water).
Product mass is determined by multiplying volume and density at

metering conditions.
M = Vm * m

5.18.1.4.2 Volume Conversion Calculation Details
5.18.1.4.2.1 MPMS 11.1 (D1250-04), Commodity Groups A, B, D
Valid ranges for this commodity groups are specified in MPMS 11.1 in
paragraph 11.1.2.3 as follows:
5.18.1.4.2.2 MPMS 11.1 (D1250-04), Commodity Group C (Special Applications)
For volume conversion, this commodity group requires knowledge of

the thermal expansion factor 60. The product density data is not
necessary for volume conversion for cases where compensation for
pressure effects is not required, but the density is still needed for
product mass determination. It is recommended always to configure
appropriate product density (or use the density sensor).
Valid ranges for this commodity group are specified in MPMS 11.1 (see
table above).
5.18.1.4.2.3 MPMS 11.2.4 (TP27-07), Commodity Group E (NLG & LPG)
The calculation of the pressure conversion factor is not included directly

into the MPMS 11.2.4 (TP27-07) procedures, therefore MPMS 11.2.2
and product vapour pressure are used in addition for calculating the
compressibility of the fluid. Iterative process is used in this case to
establish density at reference conditions, which in turn is used to derive
CTPL (VCF).
The product vapour pressure source can be configured as:
 Calculated - using MPMS 11.2.5 standard
 Measured - directly measured by configured pressure sensor

 Externally controlled - in this case the product pressure Pm is

controlled externally to be above equilibrium (vapour) pressure Pe by
fixed safety margin Ps, therefore Pe = Pm - Ps
NOTE: In configurations where compensation for pressure

effects is used together with density input (or labo-
ratory pressure is non-zero) and such compensation
is not an integral part of the commodity group
standard (currently it applies to TP27-07 and CNP6-
70 commodity groups), some combinations of
measured parameters (typically at high pressures)
can have multiple theoretical solutions for the
product density at base conditions. In such case,
MSC-L will resolve to one of these roots ‚Äì typically
such roots would be close to each other having minor
effect on overall CTPL (VCF) calculation results.
Sometimes the containment vessel for the product contains means of
altering the vapour pressure in the vessel to some value other than the
equilibrium pressure (Pe) at the metering temperature (Tm). The
difference between the calculated equilibrium pressure at the observed
temperature and the actual measured pressure (Pm) in the vessel
results in a pressure difference (P) that is then used for calculating the
compressibility factor (Fp) of the product at the observed conditions
using MPMS 11.2.2. Finally, the compressibility factor and the pressure
differential between the observed pressure and the equilibrium vapour
are used for calculating the CPL for blend product.
Table of valid ranges for this commodity group as stipulated in MPMS
11.2.4:
Fluid Property Minimum value Maximum value
Temperature, °F -50.8 +199.4
Temperature, °C -46 +93
60.0°F relative density 0.3500 0.6880
3
Density at 15.0°C, kg/m 351.7 687.8
3
Density at 20.0°C, kg/m 331.7 683.6
CAUTION! Compensation for pressure effects should be used

above 10 bar product pressure.
When density sensor input is used, not all sets of observation values
may result in a proper calculation values bound by stipulated ranges.
This is the expected behavior for these calculations (an exception is
raised if a proper value cannot be calculated).
5.18.1.4.2.4 EN14214 (2008), Commodity Group FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
There is currently no compensation for pressure effects for this

commodity group.

Table of valid ranges for this commodity group:

Temperature, °C +20.0 +60.0
3
Density at 15.0°C, kg/m 860 900
5.18.1.4.2.5 CNP6-70, Commodity Group Petroleum (Brazilian Standard)
The calculation of the pressure conversion factor is not included directly

into the CNP6-70 Tables, therefore MPMS 11.2.1M (utilizing D1250-04
procedures) is used in addition for calculating the compressibility of the
fluid. Iterative process is used in this case to establish density at
reference conditions, which in turn is used to derive CTPL (VCF).
Temperature, °C -50.0 (-60.0 Ext.) +200.0 (+240.0 Ext.)
Density at 20.0°C, kg/L 0.500 (0.450 Ext.) 1.100 (1.250 Ext.)
NOTE: Temperature range depends on density as

determined by CNP6-70 Tables I and II.
5.18.1.4.2.6 NBR15639 (2008), Commodity Group Alcohol (Ethanol Mixture with Water)
There is currently no compensation for pressure effects for this

commodity group.
Temperature, °C -20.0 (-30.0 Ext.) +40.0 (+50.0 Ext.)
Density at 20.0°C, kg/m3 789.23 998.20
5.18.1.4.2.7 MPMS 11.3.3 (2011), Commodity Group Pure and Denatured Fuel Ethanol
For volume conversion, this commodity group is treated as Commodity

Group C (Special Applications) with prescribed thermal expansion
factor for pure and denatured fuel ethanol. The product density data
is not necessary for volume conversion for cases where compensation
for pressure effects is not required, but the density is still needed for
product mass determination. It is recommended always to configure
appropriate product density (or use the density sensor).
Valid ranges for this commodity group are specified in MPMS 11.1 (see
table at figure 5.18.1.4.2.1).
Table of prescribed thermal expansion factors for this commodity group:
Fluid Type SI Units US Units
Pure Ethanol 0.001078 1/°C 0.000599 1/°F
Denatured Fuel Ethanol 0.001085 1/°C 0.000603 1/°F

5.18.1.4.2.8 Volume Conversion Terms
lab product (lab sample) density

Tab product (lab sample) temperature
Plab product (lab sample) pressure
 product thermal expansion factor at 60 °F
m product (metering conditions) density (measured or calculated)

Tm product (metering conditions) temperature
Pm product (metering conditions) pressure
Vm product (metering conditions) volume
b product (base conditions) density

Tb product (base conditions) temperature
Pb product (base conditions) pressure
Vb product (base conditions) volume
M product mass
Pe product equilibrium vapour pressure
Fp product compressibility factor
CTLA-B temperature correction factor from conditions A to conditions B

CPLA-B pressure correction factor from conditions A to conditions B
CTPLA-B temperature and pressure correction factor from conditions A to
conditions B
5.18.1.4.2.9 Calculation of Gross Standard Volume
The calculation of the Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is performed

incrementally by performing a volume-conversion calculation on an
incremental measured product stream volume. The volume-converted
values of these incremental product stream observed volumes are then
added together to generate the running accumulative GSV value.
The gross standard volume after N number of incremental calculation
intervals is provided by the following formula.
N
GSVtransaction  VCFi (GOVi  GOVi 1 )
i1
The GOVi represents the total accumulative gross observed volume

after i calculation intervals. GOV0 is always 0.

5.18.1.4.3 Stream Config. Stream n . Volume Conversion
On the Stream Config . Stream n screen, select Volume Conversion.

The Stream Config . Stream n . Volume Conversion screen appears
5.18.1.4.3.1 Conversion Options
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Volume Conversion screen, select

Conversion Options.
The Stream Config. Stream n . Conversion Options screen is
displayed with the following entities.
[Commodity group] With this entity you can select the <None>
commodity group of the product in <D1250-04 (Crude oil)>
compliance with the specific applicable <D1250-04 (Refined Prod.)> (default)
standard.
<D1250-04 (Special Apps.)>
<D1250-04 (Lub. Oils)>
<TP27-07 (NGL & LPG)>
<EN14214-08 (FAME)>
<CNP6-70> (Petroleum)
<NBR15639-08> (Ethanol Mix)
<MPMS 11.3.3> (Pure Ethanol)
<MPMS 11.3.3> (Fuel Ethanol)
<D4311-15> (dsp halt)
[Compensation used] With this entity you can select the type <None> (default)
of compensation used during the <Temperature>
calculation of GSV and mass (pressure <Temperature & pressure>
compensation is not applicable for the
FAME commodity group).
[Density input used] With this entity you can select whether <False> (default)
the density sensor input at metering <True>
conditions is used for volume
conversion calculations (instead of
laboratory observed density value).
[Range options] With this entity you can select the <None> (default)
options enabled when using the VCF <Extended range>
table.
The extended temperature, pressure
and range give the ability to
do the volume conversion over a
broader range than covered by the
earlier versions of the standard. For
instance at locations where it is very
cold, like Alaska.
When <None> is selected and the

application goes beyond the normal
range, an error occurs.


[Derive manual status] With this entity you can select if the <Enable>
manual status of the density is <Disable> (default)
propagated in the GSV and Mass.
<Disable>: Manual status does not
appear in the status of the GSV and
Mass (default setting).
<Enable>: Manual status appears in
the status of the GSV and Mass.
[Thermal correction] With this entity you can select if the <None> (default)
thermal correction as per Annex A.3 of <NBR15639-08 (A.3)>
NBR15639-08 should apply to VCF
calculation. This setting is applicable
only to NBR15639-08 (Ethanol Mix)
commodity group and can be chosen if/
where required by this standard.
NOTE: this correction is presumably
might be used to compensate for
thermal expansion of stainless steel
meters.
[Vapour pressure source] With this entity you can configure how <Calculated> (default)
the vapour pressure will be derived, i.e. <Measured>
calculated per MPMS 11.2.5, directly <Externally controlled>
measured by dedicated vapour
pressure sensor, or calculated as
“Product pressure” - “Vapour pressure
margin” in case of externally controlled
pressure.
Currently this is only relevant to TP27-
07 (NGL & LPG) commodity group.
5.18.1.4.3.2 Lab Observation Data
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Volume Conversion screen, select

<Lab observation data>.
The Stream Config. Stream n . Lab Data screen is displayed with the
following entities.
[Observed density] With this entity you can enter the <Value>
density of the product stream as it is <Units>
measured in a lab. (default = <1000.0> kg/m3)
[Observed temperature] With this entity you can enter the <Value>
temperature of the lab sample used for <Units>
determining the product stream (default = <15.00> °C)
observed density.
[Observed pressure] With this entity you can enter the <Value>
pressure of the lab sample used for <Units>
determining the product stream (default = <0> kPa)
observed density.


[Thermal expansion coeff.] With this entity you can enter the <Value>
expansion coefficient used during the <Units>
volume conversion. This is only default = <0.00000E+00> 1/°C
applicable for Special application
commodity group.
[Density reading correction] With this entity you can select if the <None> (Default)
density reading correction should apply <D1298-12B>
to [Observed density] parameter. Set
this parameter to <D1298-12B> if
[Observed density] was entered as a
direct reading of glass hydrometer
complying with D1298-12B standard.
[Mixture percentage] With this entity you can enter the <0...100%>
product stream mixture percentage <100%> (Default)
(either by mass or by volume) as it is
measured in a lab.
Currently this is only relevant to
NBR15639-08 (Ethanol Mix)
commodity group, providing that
[Mixture calc. option] parameter set to
either <Percentage (by mass)> or
<Percentage (by volume)>.
[Mixture calc. option] With this entity you can select the lab <Observed density> (Default)
observation data to be used for VCF <Percentage (by mass)>
calculations for mixtures. <Percentage (by volume)>
Currently this is only relevant to
NBR15639-08 (Ethanol Mix)
commodity group.
Entity Range
[Observed density units] <Kilogram per Cubic Meter>
<Degrees API>
<Pounds per Cubic Feet>
<Relative Density at 60 F>
<Kilogram per liter>
[Observed temperature] <Degrees Celsius>
<Degrees Fahrenheit>
[Observed pressure] -> <Pascal>
<Units> <Kilo Pascal>
<PSI large>
<Bar>
NOTE: The pressure should be entered as a gauge

pressure.
5.18.1.5 Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms
On the Stream Config . Stream n screen, select <Alarms>.


 <Disabled>:
 The alarm is ignored.
 <Display>:
5.18.1.5.0.1 Leaking Valve
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Leaking

valve>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Leaking Valve screen is displayed
alarm occurs.
<Display pause>
[Leaking quantity limit] With this entity you can configure the <0.0> L ... <999> L
amount of product volume that needs (default = <5> L)
to be measured within the [Product
Leaking volume timeout period] to raise
an alarm, when the stream is idle.
[Leaking timeout period] With this entity you can configure the <1> s ... <99> s
time within which amount more than (default = <5> s)
[Product Leaking volume limit] needs to
be measured to raise an alarm, when
the stream is idle.
5.18.1.5.0.2 No Product
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <No product>.

The Stream Config. . Stream n . No Product screen is displayed with

the following entities.
alarm occurs.
<Display pause>
[No product timeout] With this entity you can set the time in <1> s ... <255> s
seconds in which product stream (default = <5> s)
pulses should be received when the
device is permitted. After this time no
product pulse stream pulse is received,
an alarm occurs depending on [Alarm
action].
5.18.1.5.0.3 No Pump
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <No pump>.

The Stream Config. . Stream n . No Pump screen is displayed with the
following entities.
alarm occurs.
<Display pause>
[Pump feedback timeout] With this entity you can set the time in <1> s ... <255> s
seconds in which the product stream (default = <15> s)
pump must give feedback to the MSC-
L. If no pump feedback is received in
[Pump feedback timeout], an alarm
occurs depending on [Alarm action].
5.18.1.5.0.4 No Hydraulic Pump
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <No hydraulic

pump>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . No Hydraulic Pump screen is
[Alarm action] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled> (default)
<Display pause>


hydraulic pump must give feedback to
the MSC-L. If no hydraulic pump
feedback is received in [Pump
feedback timeout], an alarm occurs
depending on the [Alarm action].
5.18.1.5.0.5 Block Valve
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Block valve>.

The Stream Config . Stream n . Block valve screen appears.
5.18.1.5.0.5.1 Block Valve fault
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Block valve screen, select <Block

valve fault>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Block Valve fault screen is displayed
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Feedback timeout] With this entity you can set the time in <1> s ... <255> s
block valve must give feedback to the
MSCL. If no feedback is received in
[feedback timeout] an alarm occurs
depending on [Alarm action].

5.18.1.5.0.5.2 Block valve opening fault

valve opening fault>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Block valve opening fault screen is
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
5.18.1.5.0.5.3 Block valve closing fault

valve closing fault>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Block valve closing fault screen is
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Feedback timeout] With this entity you can set the time in
seconds in which the product stream
5.18.1.5.0.5.4 Block valve feedback fault

valve feedback fault>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Block valve feedback fault screen is
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
<Display pause>


5.18.1.5.0.6 Blend Tolerance
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Blend

Tolerance>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Blend Tolerance screen is displayed
<Display pause>
[Tolerance limit] With this entity you can configure the <0> % ... <10> %
blend tolerance percentage that the (default = <5> %)
MSC-L raises.
• blend tolerance low alarm if the
blend ratio between delivered
product quantity with delivered batch
quantity is less than [blend tolerance
limit].
• blend tolerance high alarm if the
blend ratio between delivered
product quantity with delivered batch
quantity is greater than [blend
tolerance limit].
5.18.1.5.0.7 Preset overrun
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Preset

overrun>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Preset overrun screen is displayed
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>


[Overrun volume limit] With this entity you can configure the default = <5> L
overrun volume limit. The MSC-L
raises Exceeds overrun limit alarm if
the product quantity delivered
exceeded the preset quantity by the
configured [overrun volume limit].
5.18.1.5.0.8 Valve Fault
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Valve fault>.

The Stream Config. . Stream n . Valve Fault screen is displayed with
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Valve fault timeout] With this entity you can set the time in <1> s ... <99> s
valve must close after sending the
signals close to the product stream
valve. If product stream valve did not
close within [Valve fault timeout] an
alarm occurs depending on the [Alarm
action].
5.18.1.5.0.9 Volume Conversion
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Volume

conversion>.
The Stream Config. .Stream n . Volume Conversion screen is
[Vcf out of range] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[VCF out of range] alarm behavior in <Display>
case this particular alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Non-convergence] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>

[Non-convergence] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Supercritical fluid] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Supercritical fluid] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>


[No reference fluids] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[No reference fluids] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Memory allocation] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Memory allocation] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Temperature out of range] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Temperature out of range] alarm <Display>
behavior in case this particular alarm
<Display shutdown>
occurs.
[Pressure out of range] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Pressure out of range] alarm behavior <Display>
in case this particular alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Density out of range] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Density out of range] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Alpha60 out of range] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Alpha60 out of range] alarm behavior <Display>
in case this particular alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[No solution] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[No solution] alarm behavior in case <Display>
this particular alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Illegal argument] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Illegal argument] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Pressure comp. not support] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Pressure comp. not support] alarm <Display>
<Display shutdown>
occurs.
[Bad sensor health] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Bad sensor health] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>

5.18.1.5.0.10 Vaporizing
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Vaporizing>.

The Stream Config. . Stream n . Vaporizing screen is displayed with
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Alarm hysteresis] <0...10%>

(default = <5> %)
5.18.1.5.0.11 Vaporizing risk
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Vaporizing

risk>.
The Stream Config. . Stream n . Vaporizing risk screen is displayed
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Alarm hysteresis] <0....10%>

(default = <5> % )
5.18.1.5.0.12 Fixed
On the Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <Fixed>.

The Stream Config. . Stream n . Fixed screen is displayed with the
following entities.
[Pulse hardware] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Pulse hardware] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display pause>
[Pulse phase] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Pulse phase] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display pause>


[Tank low level] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Tank low level] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display pause>
[Tank empty] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Tank empty] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display pause>
[Temperature sensor] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Temperature sensor] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Low temperature] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Low temperature] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[High temperature] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[High temperature] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Pressure sensor] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Pressure sensor] alarm behavior in <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Low pressure] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Low pressure] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[High pressure] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[High pressure] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Density sensor] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Density sensor] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Low density] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Low density] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display shutdown>


[High density] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[High density] alarm behavior in case <Display>
<Display shutdown>
[Meter exceeded max flow] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Flow rate exceed meter limit] alarm <Display>
<Display shutdown>
occurs.
[Factored pulse out] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Factored pulse out] alarm behavior in <Displayed>
<Display pause>
5.18.2 Stream Configuration . Additive streams

1. On the Stream Configuration screen, select Additive streams.
The Stream Config . Additive Stream Selection screen appears.

2. Select any one of the stream or all the streams. The Additive
Stream Config . Stream n screen appears.
5.18.2.1 Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Identification
On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n screen, select

<Identification>.
The Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Identification screen is
[Additive name] With this entity you can enter the name A text string of maximum 12 characters.
of the additive product. Use maximum 7 characters to view the
complete name on the MSC-L display
screen.
NOTE: Due to memory considerations, the size of stream

name parameters for product and additive streams is
reduced to 12 in the current release. Any longer
names shall be truncated when a configuration
backed up from a prior release is installed.
5.18.2.2 Additive Config. Stream n . I/O Bindings
On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n screen, select <I/O binding>.

The new Flexible I/O Allocation architecture forms the basis of the
Fusion4 product family. The architecture is designed around the
common I/O building blocks that can be arranged in different
configurations to be used in the MSC-L.
I/O allocation can either be performed through the IR controller through
the infrared link or the LAD connected to the MSC-L front connector.

NOTE: I/O bindings must be configured for each stream.

Also, following entities must be unique for each
stream.
 Additive stream meter
 Pump feedback
 Additive temperature
 Solenoid control
 Block valve
 Injection feedback
 Pump start
 Factored pulse out
To configure Input/Output entities
 On the Main Menu screen, select the Stream Configuration icon.
The Stream Configuration screen appears.
 On the Stream Configuration screen, select Additive streams.
The Stream Config. . Additive Stream Selection screen appears.
 On the Stream Config. . Additive Stream Selection screen, select
any one of the stream or all the streams.
The Additive Stream Config . Stream n screen appears.
 On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n screen, select <I/O
binding>.
 Select <Inputs> or <Outputs> and then select <OK> on the Fusion4 IR
controller, Fusion4 LAD, or the integrated keyboard.
The following table provides the possible entities and the I/O
functions to which a specific entity can be linked.
5.18.2.2.1 The I/O Bindings . Input Parameters
NOTE: The default value for all the Input entities are None.
[Additive stream meter] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused QPI-1A to QPI-6B (for
physical pulse input for an additive additive streams 1 to 12).
pulse input. Any of the unused QPI-7A to QPI-12B (for
product streams 13 to 24).
[Pump feedback] With this entity you can select physical Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI -
source for the pump feedback function. n, AI-n, or None.
[Tank low level switch] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
physical source for the tank low level AI-n, or None.
function.
[Tank empty switch] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
physical source for the tank empty AI-n, or None.
function.


[Additive temperature] With this entity you can select the RTD-1, RTD-2, RTD-3, RTD-4, RTD-5, RTD-
physical source for the additive stream 6, AI-1, AI-2, AI-3, AI-4, AI-5, AI-6, AI-7, AI-8,
temperature measurement. AI-9, AI-10, AI-11, AI-12, AI-13, AI-14, None
[Block valve feedback] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DI-DC-n, DI-AC-n, QPI-n,
physical source for the block valve feedback AI-n, or None.
function.
5.18.2.2.1.1 Pump Feedback

 If the [Pump feedback] I/O binding is defined, then the controller should
generate an error if the pump indication input is inactive after the
pump demand is active.
 The allowable delay is defined by the [Pump feedback timeout] entity
(defined in the alarm settings submenu for this alarm).
5.18.2.2.1.2 Tank Low Level Switch
Supply-tank level monitoring is useful in applications where a very small

supply tank is used. This is typical in portable or mobile applications
such as truck-mounted systems.
By monitoring a hardware input connected to a level switch in the
supply tank, the controller can detect when the level in the tank is
nearing empty, and take appropriate action. This prevents the pump
from running completely dry, and prevents fueling operations from being
interrupted mid-load.
The tank-level signals used should provide a simple form contact
closure upon the detection of a low level (in excess of some low point)
in the supply tank. Consideration should be given to the pump intake
position in the tank and to the amount of blend volume required for a
normal fuel delivery.
The switch-activation level should be positioned so that it is slightly
higher than the level required for the normal delivery. If the tank low-
level switch indicates “low” immediately upon the start of the delivery,
there is still an adequate volume in the tank to allow the delivery to
complete prior to the pump inlet drawing air.
If the low-level condition exists, the MSC-L can operate under normal
condition. To clear the tank low-level signal, the tank must be refilled to
a point that closes the level switch. At that time, the alarm disappears.
There is no need to reset the condition as with normal alarms.
5.18.2.2.1.3 Tank Empty Switch
If the tank-empty condition exists, the MSC-L cannot operate under

normal condition. To clear the tank-empty signal, the tank must be
refilled to a point that closes the level switch. At that instance, the alarm
disappears and the MSC-L resumes to normal use. It is not required to
reset the condition with normal alarms.

5.18.2.2.2 The I/O Bindings . Output Parameters
[Solenoid control] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DO-SSR-n, DO-EMR-n,
physical source for the additive PO-n, or None.
solenoid control function.
[Block valve control] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DO-SSR-n, DO-EMR-n,
physical source for the block valve PO-n, or None.
control function.
[Injection feedback] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DO-SSR-n, DO-EMR-n,
physical source for the injection PO-n, or None.
feedback function.
[Pump demand] With this entity you can select the Any of the unused DO-SSR-n, DO-EMR-n,
physical source for the pump demand PO-n, or None.
function.
[Factored pulse out] With this entity you can select the PO-1, PO-2, PO-3, PO-4, or None
physical source for the factored pulse
out function.
5.18.2.2.2.1 Solenoid Control
If a running batch contains additives, the particular additive solenoid

must be opened and closed when an additive injection is triggered
(solenoid open/close is signalled).
5.18.2.2.2.2 Block Valve Control

 If the [Block valve] I/O binding is defined, then the block valve output
must be active when the permissive is <True>.
 The block valve must remain active until the stream permissive is
<False>.
5.18.2.2.2.3 Injection Feedback

 This functionality is enabled by defining the additive injector
feedback I/O binding.
 Some injector-feedback modes produce pulses of a fixed length. For
these modes, the length of the pulse is determined by the feedback
pulse duration entity. The modes in which this setting is applicable
are marked as underscored italic.
 The specific behavior of the additive injector feedback is defined by
the entities located in the Solenoid submenu.
 Piston Switch - The injector feedback output is active as long as
the additive injection solenoid is active.
 Inverted piston switch - The injector output is inactive as long as
the additive injector solenoid is active (inverse of previous mode).
 Post injection - A pulse is generated as soon as the additive
injector solenoid becomes inactive.

 Double pulse - A pulse is generated after 25% of the injection

volume is injected during an injection cycle. Another pulse is
generated after 75% of injection volume is injected.
 Last 25% - A pulse is generated after 75% of the injection volume
is injected.
 Extended piston switch - The injector feedback is active for the
complete period during which the additive injection solenoid is
active and some additional time (the time equal to the feedback
pulse duration entity).
 Inverted extended piston switch - The inverse of extended piston
switch mode.
FIGURE 5-43 Injector feedback signals

5.18.2.2.2.4 Factored Pulse Output

 This functionality is enabled by defining the [Factored pulse out] I/O
binding.
 When the functionality is enabled, the output is driven based on the
transaction additive volume and the factored pulse output setting.
 The factored pulse output setting can be one of the following values:
 1 pulse for each unit of additive volume dispensed.
 10 pulses for each unit of additive volume dispensed.
 The unit of volume is defined by the device unit of volume configu-
ration entity and not by the additive volume unit entity.
 The maximum frequency of the pulse output channel is 300 Hz.
5.18.2.3 Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Control Settings
On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n screen, select <Control

settings>.
The Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Control Settings screen is
5.18.2.3.1 Additive Control
On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Control Settings screen,

select <Additive control>.
The Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Additive Control screen is
[Injection queue length] With this entity you can configure the <0> ... <10>
inject queue length. (default = <0>)
You can define the number of injections

that can be queued up (that is,
postponed) if the injection progress is
too slow in relation to the calculated or
configured injection period time or even
the measured wild stream flow.
[Injection volume] Injection volume for additive is <0> ml to <9900> ml

configured in recipe. When a recipe s (default = <20> ml
selected for loading the injection
volume for that recipe is reflected here.
[Factored pulse out] With this entity you can select the <1 Pulse / Unit> (default)
amount of pulses for each unit of <10 Pulses / Unit>
additive volume dispensed. <100 Pulses / Unit>
<1000 Pulses / Unit>
<1 Pulse / 10 Units>


[Feedback mode] With this entity you can select the type <None> (default)
of feedback for each injection. <end sensor piston emul.>
<Piston switch>
<inv.end-sensor piston emul.>
<Inverted piston switch>
<mid-stroke piston emul.>
<Post injection>
<Double pulse>
<Last 25%>
<Ext. piston switch>
<Inv. ext. piston switch>
[Feedback pulse duration] With this entity you can enter the <0> ms ... <1000> ms
duration of the feedback pulse in ms. (default = <500> ms)
[Pump run timeout] With this entity you can enter the time <0> min ... <255> mins
in minutes between the last injection (default = <10> mins)
and the additive pump stop.
[Block valve location] With this entity you can configure the <Upstream from meter> from (default)
physical position of the block valve <Downstream from meter>
pertaining to the additive meter.
[Factored pulse width] With this entity you can select the width <1> ms ... <500> ms
of the factored pulse output. (default = <1> ms)
5.18.2.3.2 Solenoid
On the Additive Stream Config. - Stream n- Control Settings screen,

select <Solenoid>.
The Additive Stream Config. - Stream n - Solenoid screen is
[Number of retries] With this entity you can set the number <0> ... <2>
of retries for opening the solenoid (default = <2>)
again, in case additive pulses are not
received.
[Close delay] With this entity you can set the time in <500> ms ... <10000> ms
ms. The additive pulses must be (default = <500> ms)
stopped after the solenoid is closed.


[Dwell time] With this entity you can set the <0> ms ... <32767> ms
minimum time in ms that the solenoid (default = <0> ms)
opens and closes. The parameter value
is normally set to zero in injectors that
require the solenoid to open and stay
open until the full volume per cycle is
injected. The numeric value represents
the ON time of the solenoid in
milliseconds. The OFF time is equal to
the ON time. When this value is
nonzero, the controller continues to
pulse
the valve control output until the
amount of additive available in the
‘Injection Volume’ setting is dispensed.
The stroke repeat rate is double the
‘Solenoid Dwell Time’.
5.18.2.4 Additive Stream Config. Stream n . Alarms
On the Additive Stream Config. . Stream n screen, select <Alarms>.

The Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen is displayed.
 <Disabled>:
 <Display>:
5.18.2.4.1 Leaking Valve
On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select

<Leaking valve>.

The Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Leaking Valve screen is

alarm occurs. <Display shutdown> (default)
<Display pause>
[Leaking volume limit] With this entity you can set the <0> ml ... <999> ml
maximum amount of additive volume (default = <100.00> ml)
measured [Leaking timeout period]
before a leaking valve alarm is
generated.
If this limit is exceeded, an alarm
occurs depending on the [Alarm
action].
[Leaking timeout period] With this entity you can set the time in <1> s... <99> s
seconds in which the [Leaking volume (default = <60> s)
limit] is checked.
5.18.2.4.2 No Additive
On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <No

additive>.
The Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . No Additive screen is
<Display pause>
[No additive timeout] With this entity you can set the time in <1> s... <9> s
seconds in which additive stream (default = <2> s)
pulses should be received when the
solenoid is opened. The additive
stream pulses are not received after
the configured [number of retries] and
an alarm occurs depending on the
[Alarm action].
5.18.2.4.3 No Pump
On the Additive Stream Config . Stream n . Alarms screen, select <No

pump>.

The Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . No Pump screen is

<Display pause>
seconds in which the additive pump (default = <15> s)
must provide a feedback to the MSC. If
the feedback from the pump is not
received in [Pump feedback timeout],
then an alarm occurs depending on the
[Alarm action].
5.18.2.4.4 Block Valve Fault

<Block valve fault>.
The Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Block Valve Fault screen is
<Display pause>
seconds in which the additive pump (default = <15> s)
must providea feedback to the MSC. If
the feedback from the pump is not
received in [Feedback timeout], then an
alarm occurs depending on the [Alarm
action].
5.18.2.4.5 Deviation

<Deviation>.
The Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Deviation screen is
alarm behavior, in case this particular <Display> (default)
<Display pause>


[Add. volume deviation] With this entity you can set the <1> % ... <100> %
percentage of additive volume that is (default = <10> %)
accepted without resulting in an alarm
situation. If this percentage is
exceeded, an alarm occurs depending
on the [Alarm action]. The alarm is
evaluated after every injection.
[Num. cycles for alarm] With this entity you can set the number <1 ... 99>
of additive injection cycles over which (default = <1>)
the deviation is calculated.
5.18.2.4.6 Fixed

<Fixed>.
The Additive Stream Config. . Stream n . Fixed screen is displayed
[Control fault] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Control fault] alarm in case this <Display> (default)
particular alarm occurs. <Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
[Solenoid fault] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Solenoid fault] alarm in case this <Display> (default)
<Display pause>
[Pulse hardware] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Pulse hardware] alarm in case this <Display>
particular alarm occurs. <Display shutdown> (default)
<Display pause>
[Pulse phase] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Pulse phase] alarm in case this <Display>
<Display pause>
[Factored pulse out] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Factored pulse out] alarm in case this <Display>
<Display pause>
[Temperature sensor] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Temperature sensor] alarm in case this <Display>
<Display pause>


[Tank low level] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Tank low level] alarm in case this <Display> (default)
<Display pause>
[Tank empty] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Tank empty] alarm in case this <Display>
<Display pause>
[Additive MMQ not met] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Additive MMQ not met] alarm in case <Display>
this particular alarm occurs. <Display shutdown> (default)
<Display pause>
[Additive flow rate too low] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
[Additive flow rate too low] alarm in <Display>
case this particular alarm occurs. <Display shutdown> (default)
<Display pause>
5.18.3 Stream Configuration - External Additive streams

To perform the external additive stream configuration

NOTE: The External additive streams function is added in

the Stream Configuration menu.
2. On the Stream Configuration screen, select <External Additive
streams>.
The Stream Config - External additive stream selection additive
screen appears.
NOTE: Twelve streams will be available per Arm board.

Individual streams can be configured.

3. Select any one of the stream or all the streams. The Stream Config
- Ext add n screen appears with the following entities.
 <Identification> - Should be configured individually for each stream.

 <Alarms> - Can be configured either individually or together for all
the streams.
5.18.3.1 Stream Config - Ext add n - Identification

1. On the Stream Config - Ext add n screen, select <Identification>
The Stream Config - Ext add n - Identification screen appears with
the following entities:


<External additive name> With this entity you can enter the name A text string of maximum 12 characters.
of the additive product. Use maximum 7 characters to view the
complete name on the MSC-L display
screen.
<COM port> With this entity you can configure the <COM1>or <COM2> for streams on Arm
<COM port> to be used for board 1 (Streams 1 to 12)
communicating with the external
<COM6>or <COM7> for streams on Arm
additive controller.
board 2 (Streams 13 to 24)
<Stream Address> With this entity you can configure the <0> ... <999>
<Stream Address> for the external
additive streams.
5.18.3.2 Stream Config - Ext add n - Alarms

1. On the Stream Config - Ext add n screen, select <Alarms>. The
Stream Config - Ext add n - Alarms screen appears with the
following entities.
2. On the Stream Config - Ext add n - Alarms screen, select <Fixed>.

The following screen appears with the fixed alarms.

 The fixed alarms can be configured as “Display Pause” or “Display

Shutdown” as per requirement.

[Leaking Valve] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
behavior, in case this particular alarm <Display>
occurs. <Display shutdown> (default)
<Display pause>
[Flush Volume] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[No Activity ] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[No Additive] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[No Pump] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Add Volume Deviation] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>


[Control Fault] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Solenoid Fault] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Pulse Hardware] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Tank Empty] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Ext. add. device With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
Firmware failure] behavior, in case this particular alarm <Display>
<Display pause>
[Ext. add. device With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
Program failure] behavior, in case this particular alarm <Display>
<Display pause>
[Power Failure] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[License Error] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Service due reminder] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
behavior, in case this particular alarm <Display> (default)
occurs. <Display shutdown>
<Display pause>
3. On the Stream Config - Ext add n - Alarms screen, select <Device
offline>. The following screen appears.


[Alarm Action] With this entity you can configure the alarm <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Device offline timeout] With this entity you can configure the alarm <5> s (default)
behavior, in case this particular alarm
occurs.

Operation - Arm Configuration
5.19 Arm Configuration

To perform the Arm Configuration
1. On the Main Menu screen, select the Arm Configuration icon.
The Arm Configuration . Arm Selection screen appears.
2. On the Arm Configuration . Arm Selection screen, select the

required arm. For example, Arm 1.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n screen appears with the following

entities.

5.19.1 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Identification

On the Arm Configuration . Arm1 screen, select <Identification>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm1 . Identification screen is displayed
with the following entity.
[Arm name] With this entity you can enter the name A text string of maximum 20 characters.
of the loading arm. Use maximum 7 characters to view the
The Arm name appears on the running complete name on the MSC-L screen.
screens.
[Arm address] With this entity you can enter and default = <123>
assign a reference number to the arm.
[Arm location] With this entity you can select the <Bay 1>
location of the arm whether in Bay 1 or <Bay 2>
Bay 2 or its a swing arm
<None>
[Arm cluster] This entity defines the logical group to <1> ... <6>
which arm belongs for Rail loading. (default = <123>)
[Arm status] With this entity you can configure the <Enable>
arm to operational/enabled or Disabled <Disable>
[Progress bar color] With this entity you can configure the <Black>
color to be used on a loading arm <White>
progress bar.
<Gray>
Note: The Progress bar color is located
on the loading arm progress tab. <Yellow>
<Mid Blue>
<Light Blue>
<Purple>
<Green> (default)
<Dark Green>
<Brown>
<Red>
<Pink>
<Gold>
[Loadspot 1 name] With this entity you can enter the name A text string of maximum 20 characters.
of the first loadspot. This is used in Rail
Loading application only.
of the second loadspot. This is used in
Rail Loading application only.
of the third loadspot. This is used in
Rail Loading application only.

5.19.2 Arm Configuration . Arm n . I/O Bindings

On the Arm Configuration . Arm1 screen, select <I/O binding>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm1 . I/O Bindings screen is displayed with
5.19.2.1 The I/O Bindings . Input Parameters
NOTE: The default value for all the Input entities are None.
[Alarm reset] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for the alarm reset Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
function. DC-n), Digital Inputs AC (DI-AC-n), or None.
[RIT ack] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for the RIT acknowledgment Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
[RIT start] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for the RIT start Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
[RIT stop] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for the RIT stop Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
[Block valve feedback] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for the block valve Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
feebdackfunction. DC-n), Digital Inputs AC (DI-AC-n), or None.
[Arm Parked] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for Arm parked alarm action Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
DC-n), Digital Inputs AC (DI-AC-n), or None.
[Bay 1 in position] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for the arm for Bay1 Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
[Bay 2 in position] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
physical source for the arm for Bay2 Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
[Stop flow switch] With this entity you can select the physical Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
source for the Stop flow switch function Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
[Low flow switch] With this entity you can select the physical Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
source for the Low flow switch function Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-
[high flow switch] With this entity you can select the physical Any one of unused Pulse Inputs (QPI),
source for the High flow switch function Analog Inputs (AI-n), Digital Inputs DC (DI-

5.19.2.2 The I/O Bindings . Output Parameters
[Block valve control] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DO-
physical output for the block valve SSR-n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (PO-
control function. n), or None.
[Alarm indication] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DO-
physical output for the alarm indication SSR-n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (PO-
function. n), or None.
[Alarm shutdown] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DO-
physical output for the alarm shutdown SSR-n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (PO-
[Loading active] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DO-
physical output for the loading active SSR-n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (PO-
[RIT red lamp] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DO-
physical output for the RIT red lamp SSR-n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (PO-
[RIT green lamp] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DO-
physical output for the RIT green lamp SSR-n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (PO-
[RIT amber lamp] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DO-
physical output for the RIT amber lamp SSR-n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (PO-
[Ready lamp] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DOSSR-
physical output which conveys whether the n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (POn), or
load is ready to start, when all permissive are None.
met.
In 1010RD emulation this reflects the
permissive state.
[Slow flow indication] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DOSSR-
target arm flow rate is in Initial flow region. None.
[High flow indication] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DOSSR-
target arm flow rate is in high flow region. None.
[Prestop indication] With this entity you can select the Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DOSSR-
target arm flow rate is in pre-stop region. None.
[Top loading valve 1010 BJ emulation: Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DOSSR-
(OLSDV 1)] With this entity you can select the n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (POn), or
physical output for Top loading valve None.
Rail loading:
With this entity you can select the
outlet SDV for product 1.


[Bottom loading valve 1010 BJ emulation: Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DOSSR-
(OLSDV 2)] With this entity you can select the n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (POn), or
physical output for bottom loading valve None.
Rail loading:
With this entity you can select the physical
output for
outlet SDV for product 2.
[Outlet SDV 3] Rail loading: Any one of unused Digital Outputs (DOSSR-
With this entity you can select the physical n or DO-EMR-n), Pulse Outputs (POn), or
output for outlet SDV loadspot 3. None.
5.19.3 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Control Settings

1. On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <Control settings>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Control Settings screen
appears.
2. On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <General>.

The Arm Configuration . Arm n . General screen is displayed with
[Batch preset quantity] With this entity the total final required default = <0.00> L
GOV of the blended product is
obtained. This value is either entered
directly by the user or supplied
externally by the TAS.
[Loading type] With this entity you can select the blend <Ratio> (default)
type for the loading process, as well as <Side stream>
use it for unloading purposes. <Unloading>
<Straight with VRU>
<Sequential>


[Batch initial quantity] With this entity you can determine the <0> L to <1000000> L
amount of product that must be (default = <300> L)
delivered into the compartment at the
Initial Flow Rate to ensure that the risk
of static discharge is eliminated.
[Batch pre-stop quantity] With this entity you can determine the <0> L to <1000000> L
volume before the end of the batch at (default = <300> L)
which the flow rate must be adjusted to
dispense the exact quantity requested.
[Batch clean arm quantity] With this entity the amount of the <0> L to <1000000> L
unblended main product at the end of a (default = <300> L)
batch can be determined. The flow rate
to obtain this volume is not defined,
though it is still restricted due to the
limitations mentioned previously.
However, blending during delivering the
clean arm volume is not permitted.
[Minimum preset quantity] With this entity the minimum preset default = <0> L
quantity can be configured.
Presets entered below this value are
not accepted for a valid batch.
[Maximum preset quantity] With this entity the maximum preset default = <30000> L
quantity can be configured.
Presets entered above this value are
not accepted for a valid batch.
[Initial flow rate] With this entity the rate at which the <1> L/min to <1000000> L/min
final product is initially filled into the (default = <300> L/min)
container until the delivered volume is
greater than the Initial Volume is
determined.
[Full flow rate] With this entity the target flow rate of <1> L/min to <1000000> L/min
the final product when it is neither in (default = <1800> L/min)
Initial or pre-stop states is determined.
[Pre-stop flow rate] With this entity the target flow rate of <1> L/min to <1000000> L/min
the final product when the amount of (default = <300> L/min)
delivered product is greater than the
following (Batch Preset Volume - Pre-
stop Volume) is determined.
[Low flow rate] With this entity you can select the low <1> L/min to <1000000> L/min
flow rate for the product to be (default = <300> L/min)
delivered.
[High flow rate] With this entity you can select the high <1> L/min to <1000000> L/min
flow rate for the product to be (default = <1800> L/min)
delivered.
[Batch preset evaluation] With this entity you can enable or <Enable> default
disable batch preset evaluation. When <Disable>
disabled, batch preset can be set to
any quantity of 1 L.


[Batch full flow resume time] With this entity you can configure the <0>s to <99>s
batch full flow resume time. When default: <0>s
which is paused in full flow state is
resumed, full flow rate alarm condition
check is disabled for this duration to
allow for time needed to achieve full
flow.
[Batch lineup time] With this entity you can set the Inter <0>s to <99>s
mini batch lineup time (delay) which is default: <1>s
used for sequential blending. When set
to 0, batch will be paused between mini
batches and has to be resumed
manually
[Initial flow time] When non-zero, with this entity you can <0>s to <99>s
set time for which the initial arm flow default: <0>s
rate is used. This feature is limited to
straight loading.
See more details below.
[Auto high flow time] When non-zero, you can enable <0>s to <99>s
Auto high flow feature. default: <0>s
Here you can set the time in seconds
after which target flow rate is reduced
by dead-band.
[Auto high flow hold time] When non-zero, you can enable the <0>s to <99>s
Auto high flow feature to increase the default: <0>s
flow rate when possible.
If this is non-zero, once the reduced
target is met it is not increased till
Auto high flow hold time.
3. On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <Pre load

sequence>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Pre load sequence screen is
displayed with the following entities

[Pre load sequence] With this entity you can enable the <Enable>
preload sequence. <Disable> default
[Pump demand turn on time] With this entity you can set the time <0>s to <99>s
after which pump will be on. default: <0>s
[Control valve turn on time] With this entity you can set the time <0>s to <99>s
after which DCV is turned on in preload default: <0>s
sequence.
[Loading arm feedback With this entity you can configure the <0>s to <99>s
timeout] time within which a feedback should be default: <0>s
received from Loading arm.
This is used in preload sequence.


[Inlet valve turn on time] With this entity you can set the time <0>s to <99>s
after which inlet valve is turned on in default: <0>s
preload sequence.
[Outlet valve turn on time] With this entity you can set the time <0>s to <99>s
after which outlet valve is turned on in default: <0>s
preload sequence.
4. On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <Straight with VRU>.

The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Straight with VRU screen is

[Vapour line open mode] With this entity you can select block <Direct>
valve control open mode with main line. <Before time>
<After time>
<After quantity>
[Vapour line close mode] With this entity you can select block <Direct>
valve control close mode with main <Before time>
line.
<After time>
<After quantity>
[Vapour line open cond. (time)] With this entity you can configure block <0 s>
valve control open condition time.
[Vapour line open cond. (qty)] With this entity you can configure block <0.00%>
valve control open condition quantity.
[Vapour line close cond. (time)] With this entity you can configure block <0 s>
valve control close condition time.
[Vapour line close cond. (qty)] With this entity you can configure block <0.00%>
valve control close condition quantity.
[Pre-cooling Quantity] With this entity you can set pre-cooling <0>s to <1000>s
quantity used in LNG loading. default = <50>s
When set to non-zero value, product

target flowrate is [Pre-cooling flowrate]
till [Pre-cooling Quantity] is reached.
[Pre-cooling timeout] With this entity you can set pre-cooling <0>s to <999>s
timeout used in LNG loading. default = <60>s
When pre-cooling is enabled, if the

[Pre-cooling temperature] of product or
vapour is not met after precooling
timeout, Pre-cooling temperature not
met alarm is raised.


[Pre-cooling flowrate] With this entity you can set flowrate <0> to <1000>
used in LNG loading precooling state. default = <0>
When set to zero the precooling state is

disabled, and loading starts at initial
flowrate.
[Recirculation timeout] With this entity you can set recirculation <0>min to <255> min
timeout used in LNG loading. default = <10> min
While recirculation is active, if the

recirculation temperature is not met
within [Recirculation timeout] alarm is
raised.
[Recirculation flowrate] With this entity you can set recirculation <0> to <1000>
flowrate used for recirculation batch in default = <100>
LNG loading.
5.19.3.1 Flow Switches
With the [High flow rate] entity a second full flow rate can be configured.
This flow rate is used during the “Full flow” loading phase. This entity
relates to the [High flow switch] in the I/O binding.
When the input is active, the [High flow rate] is used during the “Full flow”
loading phase.
When the input is not active the [Full flow rate] is used during the “Full
flow” loading phase.
When no I/O binding is configured always the [Full flow rate] will be used
during the “Full flow” loading phase.
For a correct configuration the [Full flow rate] must be set to a higher value
than the [High flow rate].
When all three [Stop flow switch] and the [Low flow switch] I/O binding are
configured those three switched will be used for unloading operation
controlling the air eliminator.
Stop flow switch position 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Low flow switch position 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
High flow switch position 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
Flow state Zero Stop Stop Low Invalid Invalid High

position switch switch flow switch switch flow
not not state state
covered covered alarm alarm
alarm alarm
NOTE: When using flow switches, keep Auto high flow

disabled.

5.19.3.2 Preload sequence

 Preload sequence in Rail loading
See section 5.15
 Preload sequence 1010BJ emulation is as below:
1. Turn loading arm valve (Top/Bottom depending upon [Loading type]
selection)
2. Check arm position
3. Start pump on delay
4. Turn on pump
5. Start control valve turn on delay
6. Turn on Control valve (DCV)
5.19.3.3 Initial flow rate in straight loading
When the Initial flow time is set to zero which is default value, [Batch initial
quantity] is used to mark the transition from Initial flow to High flow. This
is quantity-based transition.
When initial flow rate is set to non-zero number, [Batch initial quantity] is not
used and the transition takes place after Initial flow time set.
5.19.3.4 Auto High Flow
This feature is limited to straight loading using DCV. It is enabled only if

the recipe has single product and Auto high flow timer has non-zero
value.
This feature is useful when the supply pressure of a system is not
constant, for example if it is influenced by supply tank level, and or other
arms loading off the same pump, then the flow rate achievable by the
system with a full supply tank will not be maintained as the tank
empties. In these circumstances the digital control valve may not be
able to be set to take advantage of the full flow rate conditions while at
the same time avoiding excessive pulsing of the control valve solenoids
on reduced flow rates. By automatically reducing the target flow rate as
the supply tank empties the digital control valve will always be operating
at its optimum condition.
If the pressure in line is reduced, the target [Full flow rate] will not be
achieved. In this case after [Auto High flow time] the target is reduced by
[Dead band (kdb)] quantity of the product, the reduced target is now is
(target- dead-band) and auto high flow timer is started again. if this new
target is also not achieved, it is further reduced by dead-band. This
goes on till the new target is achieved.
Once the reduced target is achieved (i.e. actual flow rate is within +/-
dead-band of the new target), and is stable for Auto high flow hold time
period, device again tries to increase the target to (achieved target +
dead-band) to check if the pressure is recovered, if the new increased
target is achieved within [Auto High flow time], target is increased once

again. If the new target is not met it is reduced again and device waits
for [Auto high flow hold time] to make another attempt.
FIGURE 5-44 Flow Profile for Auto High flow
FIGURE 5-45 Auto high flow time and Auto high flow Hold time
NOTE:
 The target flow rate is limited to pre-stop flow rate on the lower side
and the original target on the higher side.
 Auto high flow functionality can be disabled by setting [Auto High flow
time] to 0.

 If you do not desire to increase the target flow rate after it is settled to
reduced target, you can set [Auto High flow hold time] to zero.
 Alarm Consideration
In arm full flow alarms the low percentage alarm should be set
considering the expected decrease in target. If not the reduced target
can trigger full flow low percentage alarm.
 Disable Auto high flow feature when using flow switches.
5.19.4 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Product Streams

1. On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <Product stream
selection>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Product Streams screen
appears.
2. Select the required stream and press <OK>. The checkbox is

enabled.
To clear the checkbox, press <OK> again.
NOTE: Streams that are bound to the Arm selected have the
checkbox enabled.
Streams that are bound to another arm are dimmed.
One Arm can have maximum of 7 product streams.

If you try to assign more than 7 streams to an arm,
then an error message appears mentioning that all
product streams are used.
These streams are not physical streams but abstract

placeholders which can configure a stream. Each
stream must also have an associated flow meter.
It is strongly recommended to assign streams to

loading arm on the same arm board in order to

minimize cross board communication. Product
streams 1 to 6 are on Arm board 1 while remaining
streams are on Arm board 2.
See TABLE 6-2 to understand loading ARM to arm

board mapping for different license types.
CAUTION! Be aware that the stream configuration is limited by

the remaining free pulse inputs. In the MSC-L there
are always un-configured and not allocated streams
left.
Licenses CAN-ARM-MSC-1 CAN-ARM-MSC-2

L1/L1D ARM-1 - -
L2/L2D ARM-1 ARM-2
L3/L3D ARM-1 ARM-2 ARM-3
XL1 ARM-1 -
XL2 ARM-1 ARM-2 -
XL3 ARM-1 ARM-2 ARM-3
XL4 ARM-1 ARM-2 ARM-3 ARM-4 -
XL5 ARM-1 ARM-2 ARM-3 ARM-4 ARM-5
XL6 ARM-1 ARM-2 ARM-3 ARM-4 ARM-5 ARM-6
TABLE 6-2 Loading Arm

5.19.5 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Additive Streams

1. On the Arm Configuration . Arm1 screen, select <Additive stream
selection>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm1 . Additive Streams screen
appears.
2. Select the required stream and press <OK>. The checkbox is
enabled.
To clear the checkbox, press <OK> again.
NOTE: Streams that are bound to the Arm have the

checkbox enabled.
One Arm can have maximum of 12 additive streams.

If you try to assign more than 12 streams to an arm,
then an error message appears.
These streams are not physical streams but abstract

placeholders to be able to configure a stream. Each
It is strongly recommended to assign streams to

loading arm on the same arm board in order to
minimize cross board communication. Additive
streams 1 to 12 are on Arm board 1 while remaining
streams are on Arm board 2.
See TABLE 6-2 to understand loading ARM to arm

board mapping for different license types.
CAUTION! Be aware that the stream configuration is limited by

the remaining free pulse inputs. In the MSC-L there
are always un-configured and not allocated streams
left.
5.19.6 Arm Configuration . Arm n . External Additive Streams

1. On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <External Additive
stream selection>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n . External Additive Streams screen
appears.

2. Select the required stream and press OK. The checkbox is enabled.
To clear the checkbox, press OK again.
NOTE: Streams that are bound to the Arm have the

checkbox enabled.
One Arm can have maximum of 12 external additive

streams (internal + external). If you try to assign
more than 12 streams to an arm, then an error
message appears.
These streams are part of an external device

connected to the MSC-L (for example MSC A). The
pulse inputs for these streams should be configured
on the external device.
5.19.7 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Recipes

1. On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <Recipes>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Recipes screen appears with the
configured recipes. 50 recipes can be configured for each arm.
2. Select the required recipe number and press OK to view the recipe.

The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Recipes screen appears.
3. Press OK to change the recipe.
When configuring the recipe, make sure of the following:

 The recipe can contain up to four products and up to six additive
streams (arm can be bound to more streams but a batch running
on the arm can only have upto four products and six additives).
 An Arm can have a maximum of 50 recipes.
 The sum of all product stream blend ratios must be 100%.
 The product and additive streams must be bound to an Arm using
the product stream selection and the additive streams selection
menus.
 The recipe is validated in the following scenarios.
- The product/additive stream selection is changed.
- The recipe is installed.

- The configuration is installed.

4. Enter the recipe name, hazardous material classification, and the
symbol. The information selected appears on the running screen.
 The product symbols available are as follows:
- For the U.S.-related market, select the product name from the
list of API symbols as defined in: API Recommended Practice
1637, Third edition, July 2006.
Description Menu text displayed Symbol
High-grade unleaded gasoline HGU gasoline
Mid-grade unleaded gasoline MGU gasoline
Low grade unleaded gasoline LGU gasoline
Ultra low sulfer diesel ULS diesel
Low sulfer diesel LS diesel
High sulfer diesel HS diesel
Low sulfer no. 1 fuel oil LS no. 1 fuel oil
High sulfer no. 1 fuel oil HS no. 1 fuel oil
Low sulfer no. 2 fuel oil LS no. 2 fuel oil
High sulfer no. 2 fuel oil HS no. 2 fuel oil
Ultra low sulfer kerosene ULS kerosene
Low sulfer kerosene LS kerosene
High sulfer kerosene HS kerosene


E5 (5% Alcohol based fuel) API E5
E5

E10

E20
B5 (5% Bio blended diesel) API B5

B5

B10

B20
Used oil Used Oil
Observation or monitoring well Monitoring well
Vapour recovery Vapour Recovery
- For the E.U.-related market, select from the following list of

symbols as defined in: Code of practice for a product identifi-
cation system for petroleum products (Energy Institute).
Lead Replacement Petrol Lead repl. petrol
Premium unleaded Petrol (95 octane) PU petrol
Super unleaded petrol (97 octane) SU petrol
E5 (5% ethanol, 95% petrol) EU E5

E5

E10


E20
DERV DERV
B5 (5% FAME, 95% diesel) EU B5

B5

B10

B20
Gas oil (marked heating oil) Gas Oil
Marine Gas Oil Marine Gas Oil
Ultra low sulfur gas oil (marked) ULS gas oil

(with less than 10 ppm sulfur)
Marine destilates Marine destilates

Premium kerosine Premium kerosine
Regular kerosine Regular kerosine
Fuel oil: light, medium, heavy Fuel Oil

For example, HFO for heavy fuel oil
Bitumen: penetration, cutback, Bitumen

oxidised
For example,100 PEN for 100
penetration
FAME FAME
Fuel grade ethanol Fuel Grade Ethanol

NOTE: These streams are not physical streams but abstract

placeholders which can configure a stream. Each
5. Enter the product % for main stream.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Recipe n stream selection screen
appears, which allows you to select one of the streams bound to the
arm as the main stream.
6. Enter the product % for remaining streams.

The stream that contains the product % as zero is not used during a
batch when the recipe is selected for loading.
7. Enter the additive value as PPM.
8. Enter the pacing volume.
9. Press <ESC> when all the entities are complete.
10. Check the values entered for all the entities.
 If the values entered are correct, the recipe is validated and
saved.
 If the values entered are incorrect, then a message appears
informing you to correct the recipe.

11. Press OK to correct the recipe or <Cancel> to retain the values

entered.
12. If <Cancel> is selected, then the invalid recipe is dimmed.
NOTE: Invalid recipes are dimmed in the configuration and

cannot be selected for loading.
5.19.8 Arm Configuration . Arm n . Alarms

On the Arm Configuration . Arm n screen, select <Alarms>.
The Arm Configuration . Arm n . Alarms screen is displayed.
 <Disabled>:


 <Display>:

5.19.8.1 Flow Rate
5.19.8.1.1 Initial Flow . Alarms

<Display pause>
[Alarm start delay] With this entity you can configure a <0> s ... <255> s
delay after which the MSC-L starts (default = <5> s)
monitoring the initial flow rate alarm.
[Low percentage] With this entity you can configure the <1.0> % ... <99.99> %
low percentage value for monitoring the (default = <5.0> %)
initial flow rate alarm. The initial flow
rate low alarm is raised if the actual
flow rate during the initial flow stage is
below the configured initial flow rate by
low percentage value.
[High percentage] With this entity you can configure the <1.0> % ... <99.99> %
high percentage value for monitoring (default = <5.0> %)
the initial flow rate alarm. The initial
flow rate high alarm is raised if the
actual flow rate during the initial flow
stage is above the configured initial
flow rate by high percentage value.
5.19.8.1.2 Full Flow . Alarms

alarm behavior, in case this particular <Display >
<Display pause>
monitoring the full flow rate alarm, after
the load profile enters the full flow state.
low percentage value for monitoring full (default = <5.0> %)
flow rate alarm. The full flow rate low
alarm is raised if the actual flow rate
during the full flow stage is below the
configured full flow rate by low
percentage value.
the full flow rate alarm. The full flow
rate high alarm is raised if the actual
flow rate during the full flow stage is
above the configured full flow rate by
high percentage value.

5.19.8.1.3 Pre-stop Flow . Alarms

<Display pause>
monitoring the full flow rate alarm after
the load profile enters from full flow
state to pre stop state.
low percentage value for monitoring the (default = <5.0> %)
prestop flow rate alarm. The Prestop
flow rate low alarm is raised if the
actual flow rate during the prestop
stage is below the configured prestop
flow rate by low percentage value.
the prestop flow rate alarm. The
Prestop flow rate low alarm is raised if
the actual flow rate during the prestop
stage is above the configured prestop
flow rate by high percentage value.
5.19.8.2 Programmable Alarms

alarm behavior, in case this particular <Display >
alarm occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Response time] With this entity you can set the time in <0> s ... <255> s
other.


state is in idle when the transactions
are not started for loading process.

complete.
[Alarm activation (Pause)] With this entity you can set the state of <None> (default)
the input when the arm/batch is in <Active>
pause state for the alarm function. <Deactive>
NOTE: In programmable alarms if a response time of 0sec is

used and the alarm activation (idle) is different from
alarm activation (running), batch start error can
appear when starting a batch if the underlying input
is already in the state defined in alarm activation
(running).
Similarly, if alarm activation (pause) is different form
alarm activation (running) with 0 response time, can
result in batch resume error.

5.19.8.3 Block Valve Fault

[Alarm Action] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
alarm behavior, in case this alarm <Display>
<Display pause>
[Feeback timeout] With this entity you can configure the <1> sec to <999> sec
time within which a feedback should be (default = <10> sec)
received from the block valve.
5.19.8.4 Preset Overrrun

[Preset overrun limit] With this entity you can configure the default = <5.00> L
overrun limit. If the delivered batch
quantity exceeds this quantity, an alarm
is raised.
NOTE: The alarm action for the Preset Overrun alarm for the
loading arms is fixed to Display shutdown.

5.19.8.5 Clean Arm Underrun

[Alarm Action] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
<Display pause>
[Clean arm underrun] The measured clean arm volume is default = <5.00> L
less than the specified clean arm
volume minus the clean arm tolerance.
5.19.8.6 Stop Switch not covered

occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Stop switch timeout] With this entity you can configure the <0-65535s>
time within which a feedback should be <10s> (default)
received from the Stop/Low/High flow
rate switches
[Stop switch auto clear timeout] With this entity you can reset the Stop <0-65535s>
switch not covered alarm and continue <10s> (default)
unloading the truck until its empty.
5.19.8.7 Fixed

[Arm parked alarm action] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
occurs.
<Display shutdown>
[Invalid switch states] With this entity you can configure the <Disabled>
alarm behavior, in case switch states of <Display>
Stop flow switch, Low flow switch and
<Display shutdown>
High flow switch are invalid.

Operation - Logs
5.20 Logs
To perform the Logs functions
 On the Main Menu screen, select the <Logs> icon.
The Logs screen appears, in which the various logs maintained in
the non-volatile memory can be viewed.
FIGURE 5-46 Logs icon
On the Logs screen, you can view the following data logs.
 Transaction logs: Displays the complete information about all the
available transaction records. The storage space for the transaction
logs in the MSC-L is 10,000 records.
 Calibration logs: Displays the product meter factor and additive
meter factor calibrations over time for all the available calibration
records. The storage space for the calibration logs in the MSC-L is
1200 records.
 Alarm logs: Displays a chronological list of the occurrence of the
alarms and the type of alarms for all the available alarm records. The
storage space for the alarm logs in the MSC-L is 2000 records.
 Events logs: Displays a log of important device events. The storage
space for the event logs in the MSC-L is 1000 records.
 Load Profiles: Displays a log containing a list of Load Profile batches
processed over time. The storage space for the Load Profile logs in
the MSC-L is 100 records.
When the log record is full, the oldest one is automatically deleted and
overwritten. Then, the transaction cannot be retrieved through the
Fusion4 Portal or the LAD.

Operation - Logs
NOTE: To view the logs, use the right arrow (>) on the LAD
or IR Controller, to view the previous set of records in
a list of records which spans more than a page and
left arrow (<) on the LAD or IR Controller to view the
next set of records in a list of records, which spans
more than one page.
5.20.1 Transaction
1. On the Logs screen, select <Transaction> and then select <OK> on the
IR controller, the LAD, or the keyboard.
The Logs . All Arms . Transaction Log screen appears, which
displays all the transaction records.
2. Select any one of the transactions and then select <OK> on the IR

Operation - Logs
The Logs . All Arms . Transaction Details screen appears, which

displays the transaction header details.
Balance Icon
Following are the transaction details that appear on the Logs . All
Arms . Transaction Details screen.
 Transaction record version
 Transaction number
 Driver ID
 Vehicle ID
 Contract ID
 Transaction start
 Transaction stop
 Site name
 Device name
 Device type
 W&M intended
 Base temperature
 Base pressure
 Number of batches
 Preset type
 Bay number
 Communication mode
 User language
A Balance icon is displayed on the screens of the MSC-L which are
intended for W&M custody transfer.

Operation - Logs
The Transaction Details screen is a W&M intended screen. It displays

the balance icon as shown in the figure above.
The screen displays the complete transaction data with the multiple
batches and the transaction attributes including GOV, GSV, base
conditions, and mass.
To view transactions from the transaction log, the security level of the
user must be SL2 or higher.
 Press OK to view batches.
The Logs . Transaction Log . Batch Overview screen appears.
 Press OK to view the batch details.

The Logs . Transaction Log . Batch Details screen appears.
Following are the batch details that appear on the Logs . Trans-
action Log . Batch Details screen.

Operation - Logs
 Arm name
 Arm number
 Batch number
 Compartment number
 Product name
 Batch start
 Batch stop
 W&M compliant
 Unintended stop
 Preset volume
 Returned quantity
 Batch GOV
 Batch GSV
 Batch mass
 Blend type
 Press OK to view batches.
The Logs . Transaction Log . Stream Overview screen appears.
 Select the required stream and Press OK to view the stream details.

Operation - Logs
If the selected stream is a product stream, then Logs . Transaction

Log . Stream Details screen appears.
Following are the stream details that appear on the Logs . Trans-
action Log . Stream Details screen for a product stream.
 Product name
 Accumulated start GOV
 Accumulated stop GOV
 Accumulated start GSV
 Accumulated stop GSV
 Accumulated start mass
 Accumulated stop mass
 Stream GOV
 Stream GSV
 Stream mass
 Actual blend percentage
 Average density
 Average temperature
 Average pressure
 Returned quantity
 Commodity Group
 Temperature Compensation

Operation - Logs
 If the selected stream is an additive stream, then Logs . Trans-

action Log . Stream Details screen appears.
Following are the stream details that appear on the Logs . Trans-
action Log . Stream Details screen for an additive stream.
 Additive Name
 Accumulated Start GOV
 Accumulated Stop GOV
 Stream GOV
 Leakage GOV
 PPM
 Deviation
5.20.2 Calibration
1. On the Logs screen, select <Calibration> and then select <OK> on the
IR controller or the LAD.
The Logs . All Streams . Calibration Log screen appears, which
displays the sequence of additive meter factor calibrations over time.

Operation - Logs
2. On the Logs . All Streams . Calibration Log screen, select any one
of the transactions and then select OK on the IR controller or the
LAD.
3. Perform one of the following:

 Select the calibration log for an additive stream.
The Logs . All Streams . Calibration Record screen appears,
which displays the data of the flow meter calibration process. It
contains the current and the new meter factor value so that the
precision of the flow meter can be checked.
 Select the calibration log for a product stream.

The Logs . All Streams . Calibration Record screen appears,
which displays the data of the flow meter calibration process. It

Operation - Logs
contains the current and the new meter factor value so that the
precision of the flow meter can be checked.
5.20.3 Alarm
On the Logs screen, select <Alarm> and then select OK on the IR
The Logs . All Streams . Alarm Log screen appears, which displays all
the activated alarms with the date and time the alarm is recorded in the
device.
5.20.4 Events
 On the Logs screen, select <Events> and then select OK on the IR

Operation - Logs
The Logs . Event Log screen appears, which displays all the event
logs.
5.20.5 Load Profiles

 On the Logs screen, select Load profiles and then select OK on the
IR controller or the LAD.
The Logs Load profiles screen appears, which displays a list of
Load Profile batches.
Use the LAD controller to navigate through the list, select a batch
and then select OK.

Operation - Logs
The Logs Load profile batch screen appears, which displays a

profile graph showing the target and actual flow rates of the currently
selected batch

Operation - Diagnostics
5.21 Diagnostics
To perform Diagnostics functions
 On the Main Menu screen, select the Diagnostics icon.
The Diagnostics screen appears.
FIGURE 5-47 Diagnostics icon
Diagnostics function has the following features.

 Provides a high-level view of the current state of all the device I/O
functions.
 Provides system health overview.
 Provides digital inputs/outputs display for the state as High/Low.
 Provides the values of all output channels (digital and analog), which
can be set explicitly. Outputs can be operated manually to activate,
control, and test the field equipment. This function is extremely
useful for commissioning the device.
 Provides the internal memory usage overview.

On the Diagnostics screen, you can view the diagnostics of the

following features.
 Alarms - Provides the options to reset and acknowledge the alarms.

 Dashboard - Provides an overview of all the I/O functions.
 System health - Provides an overview of the system health.
 Process data - Provides an overview of the process data such as
accumulated totals, flow rate, temperature, and so on for each of the
selected screen.
 Storage info - Provides an overview of the available memory space
for data logs and the total number of available logs.
 Accumulated totals - Provides an overview of the accumulated totals
of the product streams and additive streams.
 Comms info - Provides an overview of the diagnostic information
related to the available serial and ethernet ports in the system.
 Device tasks - Provides an overview of the reset tasks, comms tasks,
and clear tasks.
 Maintenance - Provides an overview of the switch counts, which
maintains the number of times certain output is switched on or off.
 Advanced - Provides the Load profile and W&M info and general
Stream Info from release R340.
5.21.1 Alarms
On the Diagnostics screen, select <Alarms> to reset or acknowledge the
alarms.

The Diagnostics . Alarms screen appears, which displays the alarms

available. The alarms can be reset or acknowledged.
Alarms can be reset or acknowledged individually by scrolling to each of

them. All alarms can be reset or acknowledged together also.
5.21.2 Dashboard
On the Diagnostics screen, select <Dashboard> to view the state or
value of all the available I/O blocks in the MSC-L.
The Diagnostics . Dashboard screen appears, which displays the
following input/output features.
NOTE: You can activate or de-activate the individual output

for testing by selecting the output and then selecting
OK on the IR controller or the LAD.

Activating the output energises the actual field

equipment connected.
NOTE: The content of the following sections may differ

depending on the particular Model that is bought.
NOTE: When entering dashboard pages like Digital Input

and Digital Output which have large number of
parameters, responses to commands sent over
comms. to device may be delayed as device can be
busy in regular updates of parameters in these
screens by fetching them from the various boards in
the device.
5.21.2.0.1 Dashboard I/O Type Symbols
The diagnostic dashboard displays the detailed I/O diagnostics together

with the NAMUR NE-107 compliant icons, which reflect the high level
category of the I/O diagnostics.
The following table lists the icons on the Diagnostics . Dashboard
screen.
Icon Description
Maintenance is required
Out of specification
Check the function
Failure
Diagnostics is active
Diagnostics is passive

5.21.2.0.2 Digital Input
On the Diagnostics . Dashboard screen, select <Digital input>.

The Diagnostics . Dashboard . Digital Inputs screen appears, which
displays the state or value of all the available Digital input blocks.
5.21.2.1 Digital Output
On the Diagnostics . Dashboard screen, select <Digital output>.

The Diagnostics . Dashboard . Digital Outputs screen appears,
which displays the state or value of all the available Digital output
blocks.
5.21.2.2 Pulse Input
On the Diagnostics . Dashboard screen, select <Pulse input>.

The Diagnostics . Dashboard . Pulse Inputs screen appears, which

displays the state or value of all the available Pulse input blocks.
5.21.2.3 Pulse Output
On the Diagnostics . Dashboard screen, select <Pulse output>.

The Diagnostics . Dashboard . Pulse Outputs screen appears, which
displays the state or value of all the available Pulse output blocks.
5.21.2.4 Analog I/O
On the Diagnostics . Dashboard screen, select <Analog I/O>.

The Diagnostics . Dashboard . Analog I/O screen appears, which

displays the state or value of all the available Analog I/O blocks.
5.21.3 System Health
NOTE: The content of the Diagnostics - System Health may

differ depending on the particular Model that is
bought.
On the Diagnostics screen, select <System health>.
The Diagnostics . Module Health screen appears, which displays the
health of the boards available in the MSC-L.
1. On the Diagnostics - Module Health screen, select <FM-ARM-n>.

The Diagnostics . Function Health screen appears, which displays

the details of the ARM board.
2. On the Diagnostics . Module Health screen, select <FM-IN-OUT-n>.

The Diagnostics . Function Health screen appears, which displays
the details of the IN-OUT board.

3. On the Diagnostics . Module Health screen, select <FM-HMI>.The

Diagnostics . Function Health screen appears, which displays the
details of the HMI board.
5.21.4 Process Data

1. On the Diagnostics screen, select <Process data>.
The Arm Selection screen appears.
2. Select one arm to view the process data.
The Arm n . Process Data . Product Stream n screen appears,
which displays the batch related run time data.

5.21.5 Storage Info

On the Diagnostics screen, select <Storage info>.
The Storage Info screen appears, which displays an overview of the
actual stored logs in the internal SD card located on the CAN-HMI-MSC
board.
5.21.6 Accumulated Totals

1. On the Diagnostics screen, select <Accumulated totals>.
The Diagnostics . Accumulated Totals screen appears.
2. Select <Loading Bay>.

The Diagnostics . Accumulated Totals . Loading Bays screen
appears. Select the appropriate bay.

The Accumulated Totals . Bays n screen appears.
3. Select <Loading Arms>.

The Diagnostics . Accumulated totals . Loading arms screen.

appears. Select the appropriate arm.
The Accumulated Totals . Arm n screen appears
4. Select <Recipe>.
The Diagnostics . Accumulated Totals . Loading arms screen
appears. Select the appropriate arm.

The Accumulated Totals . Loading arms. Recipe screen appears.

Select appropriate recipe.
5. Select Product Stream>.

The Diagnostics. Accu totals. Products screen appears. Select
the appropriate stream.

The Accumulated Totals . Product Stream n screen appears
6. Select <Additive streams>.

The Diagnostics. Accu totals. Additives screen appears.
Select the appropriate stream.

The Accumulated Totals . Additive Stream n screen appears.
7. Select <External Additive streams>.

The Diagnostics Accu. Totals . External Additive screen appears.
Select the appropriate external additive stream.

The Accumulated Totals . External Additive n.screen appears.

5.21.7 Comms Info

1. On the Diagnostics screen, select <Comms info> to view the serial
and ethernet details.
2. On the Diagnostics . Comms Info screen, select <Serial>.

The Diagnostics . Comms Info . Serial screen appears, which

displays the serial communication details.
3. On the Diagnostics . Comms Info . Serial screen, select any one of

the serial ports to view the details of the communication settings and
the status.
 The Diagnostics . COM-1 . Settings screen appears, which
displays the details of the communication settings.
 The Diagnostics . COM-1 . Status screen appears, which
displays the errors that have occurred on the port, and also the
number of packets that are received and transmitted.
4. On the Diagnostics . Comms Info screen, select <Ethernet> to view
the ethernet communication details.
The Diagnostics . Comms Info . Ethernet screen appears, which
displays the ethernet communication details.

5. On the Diagnostics . Comms Info . Ethernet screen, select any

one of the ethernet ports to view the details of the ethernet settings
and the status.
 The Diagnostics . ETH-n . Settings screen appears, which
displays the details of the ethernet settings.
 The Diagnostics . ETH-n . Status screen appears, which
displays the number of packets that are received and transmitted.
5.21.8 Device Tasks

1. On the Diagnostics screen, select <Device tasks>.
The Diagnostics . Device Tasks screen appears, which displays the
options to reset tasks, execute tasks, and clear tasks.
5.21.8.1 Reset Tasks

1. On the Diagnostics . Device Tasks screen, select <Reset tasks>.
The Diagnostics . Reset Tasks screen appears, which displays the
following options to reset the device.
 Re-enable device - Allows you to clear all the alarms and re-
enable the MSC-L.
 Reset device - Allows you to reset the MSC-L.
 Reset to factory settings - Allows you to reset to the default config-
uration settings.

 Format all memory - Allows you to reset to the default configu-

ration settings and reset to the default calibration settings. For
example, K-factors and clear/remove logs.
5.21.8.2 Execute Tasks

1. On the Diagnostics . Device Tasks screen, select <Execute tasks>.
The Diagnostics . Execute Task. Arm Selection screen appears.
2. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to select any one of the

stream or all the streams.
The Diagnostics . Arm n . Execute Tasks screen appears, which
simulates the following actions by Comms.
 Select recipe
 Start batch

 Pause batch
 Resume batch
 Stop batch
 End transaction
5.21.8.3 Clear Tasks

1. On the Diagnostics . Device Tasks screen, select <Clear tasks>.
The Diagnostics . Stream n . Clear Tasks screen appears.
2. Select <Product Streams>.

The Diagnostics . Clear Task . Products screen appears. Select

The Diagnostics . Stream n . Clear Tasks screen appears, which

displays the following options to clear the tasks selected for the
stream.
 Clear all alarms - Clears all the alarms on all the streams and
device level alarms.
 Clear all totals - Clears all the totals.
 Clear wild stream totals only - Clears the wild stream totals.
 Clear additive stream totals only - Clears the additive stream
totals.
3. Select <Additive Streams>.

The Diagnostics . Clear Task . Additives screen appears. Select

The Diagnostics . Stream n . Clear Tasks screen appears, which

displays the following options to clear the tasks selected for the
stream.
 Clear all alarms - Clears all the alarms on all the streams and
device level alarms.
 Clear all totals - Clears all the totals.
 Clear wild stream totals only - Clears the wild stream totals.
Clear additive stream totals only - Clears the additive stream
totals.
5.21.9 Maintenance
1. On the Diagnostics screen, select <Maintenance>.

The Diagnostics . Maintenance screen appears, which displays the

option to view the switch counts.
2. On the Diagnostics . Maintenance screen, select <Switch count>.

The Diagnostics . Maintenance . Switch Count screen appears,
which displays the switch count that maintains the number of times
the digital output is switched ON or OFF.
DO-SSR switch count provides an indication for the duration of an
external connected device for example, solenoid. It can also provide
indication for the duration of an Electro Mechanical Relay (EMR).
3. On the Diagnostics . Maintenance screen, select <Power supply info>.

The Diagnostics Power Supply screen appears which status the

power supply status of the arm boards.
5.21.10 Advanced
1. On the Diagnostics screen, select <Advanced>.
The Diagnostics . Advanced screen appears.
2. Select <Load profile>.

The Diagnostics. Load Profile . Arm Selection screen appears.

Select the appropriate arm.
The Load profile diagnostic screen appears, which displays the

target and actual flow rates of a currently active batch.
3. Select <W&M info>.

The Diagnostics . W&M Info . Stream Selection screen appears.
Select the required stream.

The W&M Information . Product Stream n screen appears., which

displays the intermediate volume conversion calculations values.
4. Select <General Stream Info>

The Diagnostics. General stream info. Stream selection screen
appears.
Select the required screen.

The Diagnostics. Product. n. General stream info. screen
appears.

Operation - Calibration
The pulse phase parameter on the screen provides the phase

difference between the quadrature pulse inputs used for the product.
It can be used to determine if phase relationship is forward, reverse
or inverse.
5.22 Calibration
5.22.1 Why Calibrate?

A flow meter provides a number of pulses per amount of fuel that
passes the meter. The number of pulses per unit of volume the meter
provides is called K-factor. This K-factor is specified per delivered flow
meter, by the manufacturer.
To increase the accuracy of the flow meter, a calibration process can be
performed. This process is performed by comparing the actual resulting
fuel volume received in a calibrated vessel (see FIGURE 5-48) with the

displayed value on the MSC-L display, which is the result of the value
returned from the flow meter.
MSC-L
High-
frequency
pulses
Product
Stream
Control Valve Flow meter
Calibrated vessel
FIGURE 5-48 Calibrating the flow meter for the Product Stream

FIGURE 5-49 Calibrating the flow meter for an Additive Stream
With the flow meter and the K-factor value, a correction factor can be
calculated, which is used for (re-)calibrating the flow meter.
This correction factor is called the meter factor.
The resulting injection volume (V) is then calculated as follows:
V = Number of pulses/(K-factor * meter factor).

5.22.2 Calibration Menu Choice

1. On the Main Menu screen, select the Calibration icon to perform
the calibration process.
FIGURE 5-50 Calibration icon
2. On the Calibration screen, select either <Wizard> calibration method

or the <Manual> calibration method.
 In the <Wizard> calibration method, the meter factor is calculated
by comparing the measured volume with the device dispensed
volume.
 In the <Manual> calibration method, you must enter the meter
factor.
The default meter factor for the <Wizard> calibration method and the
<Manual> calibration method is 1. The range which can be specified
for the meter factor is between 0.5 and 1.5.

FIGURE 5-51 Calibration menu choices
5.22.3 Manual Calibration

1. On the Calibration screen, select <Manual> calibration.
The Calibration. Arm Selection screen appears.
2. Select any one of the arms. For example, Arm1.

The Calibration . Arm n . Stream Type Selection screen appears.
3. On the Calibration . Arm n . Stream Type Selection screen, select

<Product stream selection> or <Additive stream selection>, to calibrate the
product stream or additive stream accordingly.
See the following sections for more information.
5.22.3.1 Product Stream Selection

<Product stream selection>.
The Calibration . Arm n . Product Streams screen appears.
2. Select any one of the streams. For example, Stream 1.

The Calibration . Stream n . Meter Profile . Manual screen

appears.
3. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to select the calibration point.

The Calibration . Stream n . Edit Meter Profile . Manual screen
appears.
The following functions can be performed for the calibration.

 Add - Adds a new calibration point to the meter profile.
 Delete - Deletes the selected calibration point.
 Update - Updates the selected calibration point.
 Saves - Saves the meter profile (generates Calibration Log
record).

4. If the Add function is selected, then the Calibration . Arm n . Stream

n . Manual screen appears, on which the flow rate must be entered.
5. Enter the flow rate and then select <Confirm>.

The Calibration. Arm n. Stream n - Manual screen appears, on
which the meter factor must be entered.
6. Enter the meter factor and then select <Confirm>.

The Calibration . Stream n . Meter Profile . Manual screen

appears, which displays the Calibration No, Meter Factor, and the
Flow rate.
7. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to save the calibration point.

The Calibration . Stream n . Edit Meter Profile . Manual screen
appears.
8. Select <Save> and then select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD.

The Calibration . Stream n . Manual screen appears, which

displays the Meter Factor(old), Flow rate(old), Meter Factor, and
Flow rate.
9. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to commit the calibration or

<ESC> to terminate the calibration.
If <OK> is pressed then the Calibration . Stream n . Overview
screen appears, which displays the calibration details.
10. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to exit to the Main Menu.
NOTE: Select <ESC> to restore the old meter factor.
5.22.3.2 Additive Stream Selection

<Additive stream selection>.

The Calibration . Arm n . Additive Streams screen appears.

The Calibration . Stream n . Manual 1/3 screen appears, on which
the new meter factor must be entered.
3. On the Calibration . Stream n . Manual 1/3 screen, enter the new

meter factor and then select <Confirm>.
The Calibration . Stream n . Manual 2/3 screen appears, which
displays the new meter factor.

4. On the Calibration . Stream n . Manual 2/3 screen, select <OK> on

the IR controller or LAD, to accept the new meter factor and view the
calibration details.
The Calibration . Stream n . Manual 3/3 screen appears, which
displays the calibration details.

5.22.4 Wizard Calibration

The built-in calibration wizard makes it easy to (re-)calibrate the flow
meter.
WARNING! Do all the necessary preparations (calibrated vessel

in place, and so on), before starting the actual cali-
bration.
1. On the Calibration screen, select <Wizard> calibration and then
select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD.
The Calibration . Arm Selection screen appears.
2. Select any one of the arms. For example, Arm1.

The Calibration . Arm n . Stream Type Selection screen appears.


<Product stream selection> or <Additive stream selection>, to calibrate the
product stream or additive stream accordingly.
See the following sections for more information.
5.22.4.1 Product Stream Selection

<Product stream selection>.
The Calibration . Arm n . Product Streams screen appears.

The Calibration . Stream n . Meter Profile . Wizard screen
appears, which displays the Calibration No, Meter Factor, and the
Flow rate.

3. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to select the calibration point.

The Calibration . Stream n . Edit Meter Profile . Wizard screen
appears when a calibration record is selected.
The following functions can be performed.

 Add - Adds a new calibration point to the meter profile.
 Delete - Deletes the selected calibration point.
 Calibrate - Re-calibrates the selected calibration point.
 Saves - Saves the meter profile (generates Calibration Log
record).
NOTE: While adding a new calibration point, the initial meter

factor is considered to be 1.

4. If the Add function is selected, then the Calibration . Arm n . Stream

n . Wizard screen appears, on which the preset volume must be
entered.
5. Enter the preset volume and then select <Confirm>.

The Calibration . Arm n . Stream n . Wizard screen appears,
on which the flow rate must be entered.
6. Enter the flow rate and then select <Confirm>.

The Calibration . Arm n . Stream n . Wizard screen appears,
on which the start delay time in seconds must be entered. A suitable
delay time must be entered so that you can move to another

place (for example, to observe the result) until the process

continues.
7. Enter the start delay in seconds and then select <Confirm>.

The Calibration . Arm n . Stream n. Wizard screen appears with
the Preset volume, Flow rate, Start delay time in seconds, and
the Metered Volume.
8. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to start the calibration.

The countdown of the delay time starts. After the expiration of
the delay time, the calibration process starts.

9. When the preset volume is loaded completely the Calibration . Arm

n . Stream n . Wizard screen appears, on which the actual volume
must be entered.
10. Enter the actual volume and then select <Confirm>.

The Calibration. Arm n . Stream n . Wizard screen appears, on
which the new calculated meter factor appears.

11. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to accept the new meter
factor or <ESC> to reject the meter factor.
If <OK> is selected, then a message appears informing if you want to
repeat the calibration runs.
12. Following options can be performed.

 Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to repeat calibration on the
same flow rate.
NOTE: Maximum of 5 calibrations can be performed for a

single flow rate.
 Select <Cancel> to terminate the operation.

The Calibration . Stream n . Meter Profile Wizard screen appears,

which displays the latest calibrated point with the new meter factor.
13. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD.

The Calibration . Stream n . Edit Meter Profile Wizard screen
appears, on which the options to save or delete the calibration point
are available.
14. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD to save the calibration point.
The Calibration . Stream n . Wizard screen appears, which
displays the Meter Factor(old), Flow rate(old), Meter Factor, and
Flow rate.

15. Select <OK> to commit the calibration point.

The Calibration . Stream n. Overview screen appears.
NOTE: Select <ESC> to restore the old values.

16. Select <OK> to go back to the Main Menu.
5.22.4.2 Additive Stream Selection

<Additive stream selection>.

The Calibration . Arm n . Additive Streams screen appears.

The Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 1/6 screen appears, on which
the preset volume must be entered.
3. On the Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 1/6 screen, enter the preset

volume that the MSC-L must inject for the calibration process and
then select <Confirm>.
The Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 2/6 screen appears, on which
the delay time must be entered.

4. On the Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 2/6 screen, enter the start

delay time in seconds and then select <Confirm>.
A suitable delay time should be entered so that you can move to
another place (for example, to observe the result) until the process
continues.
The Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 3/6 screen appears with the
preset volume, delay time in seconds, and the progress status.
5. Check the Progress bar to monitor the calibration progress.

6. Select <OK> on the IR controller or LAD.
The countdown of the delay time starts. After the expiration of the
delay time, the injection process starts.

The following screen appears, which displays the progress of the

injection process on the progress bar.
7. After the process is completed, the Calibration . Stream n . Wizard

4/6 screen appears, on which the actual measured volume must be
entered.
8. On the Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 4/6 screen, enter the actual

measured volume (calibrated vessel) and then select <Confirm>.
With the actual value and the value of the MSC-L measured, a new
meter factor is calculated.
The Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 5/6 screen appears, which
displays the new meter factor.

9. On the Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 5/6 screen, select <OK> on

the IR controller or LAD, to accept the new meter factor and view the
calibration details.
The Calibration . Stream n . Wizard 6/6 screen appears, which
displays the calibration details.
A new calibration record is created and stored in the system. Each
calibration is saved in a non-volatile memory, with date, time, old and
new values.

Operation - Info (Device Information)
5.23 Info (Device Information)
5.23.1 Device Information

To view the Device Information
 On the Main Menu screen, select the Info icon to view the device
and the module information.
The Device Info screen appears, which displays the Device infor-
mation and the Module information.
FIGURE 5-52 Info icon
The Device Info section displays the important information about the
device, which includes the following:
 Device serial number
 Production date
 Sales code
 License
NOTE: All the above device information is programmed by

Honeywell Enraf factory, as per the order received.
The Module Info section provides the identification information about
the individual boards and the firmware modules available in the device.
The module information includes the following:
 Module name
 Bootloader version
 Application firmware version
 Application build version
 Serial number

FIGURE 5-53 Device Info/Module Info screen
 Select FM-ARM-n.
The following FM-ARM-n Info appears.
 Select FM-HMI-n.

The following FM-HMI-n Info appears.
 Select FM-IN-OUT-n.
The following FM-IN-OUT-n Info appears.

The MSC-L software version format is explained in the following figure.
FIGURE 5-54 Software version format
To have W&M compliant MSC-L, check that the firmware versions are
the certified software versions as mentioned in the following table.
The version can be checked in the Info. Device Info screen.
Board Firmware Software version
CAN-HMI-MSC FM-HMI A<N><N>xx
CAN-ARM-MSC FM-ARM A<N><N>xx
CAN-ARM-MSC FM-PI A<N><N>xx
CAN-IN-OUT-MSC FM-IN-OUT Not legally relevant
NOTE: NN is the version mentioned in the W&M certificate.
5.23.2 Status Legend

The Status Legend displays the overview of the status characters that
are displayed along with the PV data. Following table explains when the
status character are displayed. See the following figure for more
information.
Status Character Category
# Data is not W&M approved
Space Data is actual
S Data is stored
? Data has reduced accuracy
K Data is killed
v Data is under range
& Data is manually overwritten
O Data is old
^ Data is over range
U Data is uninitialized

Operation - Transfer
Status Character Category

F Data is in Fail
5.24 Transfer
NOTE: The Transfer functions are available only when LAD

is connected to the MSC-L.
FIGURE 5-55 Transfer icon
Using the Transfer menu, the following types of records can be

transferred between the MSC-L and the LAD.

 Transaction records
 Configurations
 Events / Logs
 Calibration records
 Recipes
 Language packs
5.24.1 General
 On the Main Menu screen, select the Transfer icon.
The Transfer screen appears, which displays the various data sets
that can be transferred between the MSC-L and the LAD.

The following figure describes the data-transfer directions.
FIGURE 5-56 Data-transfer directions
5.24.2 Retrieving Transaction Records

The MSC-L provides an interface to read the transaction records
through the FlexConn entities. These entities are used for transferring
transactional data to the Fusion4 Portal through a serial link.
On the Transfer screen, select <Transaction records> to transfer
transactional data.

The Transfer . Transaction Records screen appears, which displays

the various transaction record activities.
NOTE: The <Single record> command cannot be used

through Fusion4 Portal. The <Single record> screen is
only used for copying a transaction record to the
LAD.
Maximum 10, 000 transactions can reside in the

transaction memory of the MSC-L. The oldest trans-
action is overwritten after 10,000 transactions.You
must settle all transactions before the oldest one is
automatically deleted and overwritten. You are
responsible for the settlement of the transactions
within 3 months. Once the transactions are over-
written, then these transactions cannot be retrieved
by the Fusion4 Portal or the LAD.
The transaction and batch details explained in the

following sections are retrieved as a single record.

5.24.2.1 Transaction Details
Transaction Record
Description
Parameter
MSC-L Transaction Header
Transaction Record Version The version of this transaction record.
Transaction Number The number of this transaction record.
Device Type This describes the type of Fusion4 device the
transaction record comes from.
Number of Batches The number of batches in this transaction.
W&M Intended Transaction If the device is configured as W&M intended during
the complete transaction.
Base Temperature Reference temperature that a user defines for
volume correction.
Base Pressure Reference pressure that a user defines for volume
correction.
Units of Temperature The engineering units associated with all
temperature measurements in this record.
Units of Density The engineering units associated with all density
measurements in this record.
Units of Pressure The engineering units associated with all pressure
measurements in this record.
Site Name The name of the site where the transaction
happened.
Transaction Start Time The time at which the transaction began (sampled
from RTC entity).
Transaction Start Date The date when the transaction began (sampled
from RTC entity).
Transaction Stop Time The time at which the transaction ended (sampled
from RTC entity).
Transaction Stop Date The date when the transaction ended (sampled
from RTC entity).
Preset Type This specifies if the preset value is expressed as
volume or mass value.
Bay Number The number of the bay the device is installed in.
Communications Mode It expresses if the transaction is done in Local (No
Communications) or Remote (Communications to
TAS) Mode.
User Language The language used by operator during transaction.
Contract ID A string that represents the Contract or Order
Number
Vehicle ID A string that uniquely identifies the vehicle used in
the transaction.

Transaction Record
Description
Parameter
Batch Details
Batch Number The batch number associated with the current batch
record.
Batch Start Time The time at which the batch began (sampled from
RTC entity).
Batch Start Date The date when the batch began (sampled from
RTC).
Batch Stop Time The time at which the batch ended (sampled from
RTC entity).
Batch Stop Date The date when the batch ended (sampled from
RTC).
Arm Name The name of ARM used for dispensing the blended
product.
Arm Number The number of the arm used for bringing the batch.
Blend Type Specifies the type of blend (none, ratio, or side
stream).
Batch Recipe Definition The recipe used during the batch (name, blend %,
API symbol).
W&M Compliant Batch If the device was W&M compliant during the
complete batch.
Unintended Stop if the batch stopped unexpectedly during the load.
Compartment Number The trailer compartment associated with this batch.
Returned Quantity The amount of product in the compartment at the
start of the batch.
Preset Volume When used with a preset, this value defines the
preset quantity for the batch. If not used in preset
mode, then this value is 0.
Product Stream Details
Batch Product Name The name of product.
Batch Product Calibration A counter incremented each time flow meter
Number calibration is performed.
Batch Product Gross The total observed volume of the product dispensed
Observed Volume during the batch.
Batch Product Gross Standard The total gross standard volume (net) of the product
Volume dispensed during the batch.
Batch Product Mass The total mass of the product stream for the batch.
Actual Blend Percentage The actual percentage of the product in the finished
product.
Batch Product Start The gross observed accumulated volume at the
Accumulated Gross Observed start of the batch for the stream.
Volume

Transaction Record
Description
Parameter
Batch Product Stop The gross observed accumulated volume at the end
Accumulated Gross Observed of the batch for the stream.
Volume
Batch Product Start The gross standard (net) accumulated volume at
Accumulated Gross Standard the start of the batch for the stream.
Volume
Batch Product Stop The gross standard (net) accumulated volume at
Accumulated Gross Standard the end of the batch for the stream.
Volume
Batch Product Start The arm accumulated mass at the start of the batch.
Accumulated Mass
Batch Product Stop The arm accumulated mass at the end of the batch.
Accumulated Mass
Batch Product Average The average or observed stream temperature
Temperature during the batch.
Batch Product Average The average or observed stream pressure during
Pressure the batch.
Batch Product Average The average or observed stream density during the
Density batch.
Commodity Group The commodity group of the product.
Temperature Compensation Expresses if the temperature compensation is used
Used for calculating the batch product gross standard
volume.
Batch Product Pressure Expresses if the pressure compensation is used for
Compensation Used calculating the batch product gross standard
volume.
Additive Stream Details
Batch Additive Name The name of additive injected into the load stream.
Batch Additive Calibration A counter incremented each time the flow meter
Number calibration is performed.
Batch Additive Gross The total additive observed volume dispensed
Observed Volume during the batch.
Batch Additive The total additive observed leakage volume that
Gross Observed Leakage occurred during the batch.
Volume
Batch Start Additive The additive gross accumulated volume at the start
Accumulated Gross Observed of the batch.
Volume
Batch Stop Additive The additive gross accumulated volume at the end
Accumulated Gross Observed of the batch.
Volume
Additive PPM The actual calculated parts per million of additive in
the final product.

Transaction Record
Description
Parameter
Additive Percent Deviation The percentage additive deviation from the
accumulative target additive injection volume
5.24.3 Configurations
On the Transfer screen, select <Configurations> to install or retrieve the
configuration on the SD card.
The Transfer . Configurations screen appears, which displays the
options to install and retrieve configuration on the SD card.
The following entities are available on the Transfer . Configurations

screen.
 <Install configuration> - Select this option to install the configuration
present on the SD card.
 <Retrieve configuration> - Select this option to save the present configu-
ration on the SD card.
 <Retrieve configuration & darabases> - Select this option to save the
present configuration along with the authorization database on the
SD card.
 <Retrieve device info> - Select this option to save the preset configu-
ration information on the SD card.
NOTE: A warning message appears when the device is

W&M sealed and a configuration file is installed.
5.24.4 Events / Logs

On the Transfer screen, select <Events / Logs> to retrieve the events and
logs from the MSC-L.

The Transfer . Events / Logs screen appears, which displays the

options to retrieve the events and logs from the MSC-L.
The following entities are available on the Transfer . Events / Logs

screen.
 <Retrieve alarm logs> - Select this option to retrieve the alarm logs.
 <Retrieve event logs> - Select this option to retrieve the event logs.
These logs are saved on the SD card inside the LAD device.
5.24.5 Calibration Records

On the Transfer screen, select <Calibration records> to view the calibration
record details.
The Transfer . Calibration Records screen appears, which displays
the options to view the calibration records.

The following entities are available on the Transfer . Calibration

Records screen.
 All records - This option retrieves all the calibration records available
on the device.
 Range of records - This option allows you to select the required
range of calibration logs from the available records.
 Single record - This option allows you to retrieve the calibration of a
single record available on the device.
5.24.6 Recipes
On the Transfer screen, select <Recipes> to install and save the recipes
available on the SD card.
The Transfer . Recipes screen appears, which displays the options to
install and save recipes available on the SD card.
The following entities are available on the Transfer . Recipes screen.

 <Install recipe> - Select this option to install a recipe present on the SD
card.
 <Retrieve recipes> - Select this option to save the current recipes on the
SD card.
5.24.7 Language Packs

The language packs contain the local translations of the parameters
and entities displayed on the screen of the MSC-L.
 Copy the language pack xml file to ‘Honeywell\MSC-
L\Generic\Language packs’ path located in the SD card of the LAD.
 On the Transfer screen, select <Language packs> to install the
language file stored in the LAD.

The Select File screen appears.
 Browse and select the language pack

 The Transfer Progress screen appears, displaying the language
pack installation progress.

To select language preferences, go to System Configuration,

Device, General, Display, General Settings, and then select the
required language from <User display language>

Operation - LAD Functions
NOTE: The language settings are applicable at a workflow

level and are available for use after restarting the
MSC-L device.
5.25 LAD Functions
NOTE: The LAD functions are available only when the LAD
is connected to the MSC-L.
FIGURE 5-57 LAD icon
The LAD functions provide the following functionalities.

 Facility to download the firmware in the MSC-L and the LAD.
 Facility to navigate the screen.
 Configuration of the Test LED.
 Configuration of the LAD’s special function key.
 Information about the LAD.
 Facility to format the SD card.
5.25.1 General
 On the Main Menu screen, select the LAD icon.

The LAD function screen appears, which displays the various LAD
functions and their activities.
FIGURE 5-58 LAD functions
5.25.2 Firmware Update
NOTE: Remove the old files that are available in

Honeywell\MSC-L\Generic\Firmware\
directory from previous upgrades before updating the
files.
To update the firmware using the LAD
1. Migration Consideration: It is highly recommended that a backup of
the configuration and device info file is created before upgrading to a
new firmware version. This can be created using the Fusion4 LAD
and - will be stored on its SD card. Go to Main Menu | Transfer |
Configurations menu) and select Retrieve configuration to store the
Configuration file on LAD’s SD card, and select Retrieve device info
the store the Device information on LAD’s SD card.
2. Replace the following updated firmware files in the
Honeywell\MSC-L\Generic\Firmware\ directory.
 FM-HMI-FC-FPGA.bin
 FM-HMI-FC-IMG.bin
 FM-IN-OUT-APP.bin (optional)
 FM-ARM-FC-APP.bin
 FM-HMI-FC-MSCL-APP.bin
The FM-IN-OUT-APP.bin file is only required if the CAN-IN-OUT-MSC
card is installed in the device.

Place the workflow file (msc-l_default.xml or applicable workflow files in

case of 1010 emulation / Rail loading in the following location on the SD
card: Honeywell\MSC-L\Generic\Configurations
3. Connect the LAD to the MSC-L and make sure that the SD card is
inserted in the LAD before connecting.
A green status light on LAD indicates that the SD card is inserted
correctly and a red status light indicates that the SD card is missing.
NOTE:
 Update the firmware only when the device is not being used.
 Do not insert or remove the SD card when the LAD is connected to
the device and do not remove the LAD when an upgrade file is down-
loading.
 Do not perform the update procedure during a power outage, as this
can cause problems and/or make the device unusable.
4. On the LAD screen, select <Firmware update> to either update the
firmware of the MSC boards or LAD firmware itself.
The LAD . Firmware Upgrade screen appears.
5. Select <Fusion4 device> to update the files.

The Select File screen appears.
6. On the Select File screen, select the firmware files in the following
order, to update the files.
The Transfer Progress screen appears for the particular file
selected, displaying the progress of the file download and the status
of the installation in the LAD.
a) FM-ARM-FC-APP.bin
- The total time for the firmware update file is 2 minutes approxi-
mately.
- If there are more than one CAN-ARM-MSC boards, firmware
on all those boards are updated simultaneously.
NOTE: The Arm board will reboot at the end of firmware

installation.
b) FM-IN-OUT-APP.bin (if required)
- The total time for the firmware update file is 35 seconds
approximately.
- If there are more than one CAN-IN-OUT-MSC boards, firmware
on all those boards gets updated simultaneously.
- Update the file only if it is available.
NOTE: The IN-OUT board will reboot at the end of firmware

installation.
c) FM-HMI-FC-APP.MSCL.bin
- The total time for the firmware update file is 3.5 minutes
approximately.
NOTE: The HMI will reboot at the end of firmware installation

d) FM-HMI-FC-FPGA.bin

mately.

e) FM-HMI-FC-IMG.bin
mately.

f) Install applicable workflow file
(Main Menu | Transfer | Configurations | Install configuration)
NOTE: Using 1010 Emulation or Rail loading on the MSC,

requires appropriate workflow file to be installed
instead of the default one.
g) Power cycle device
NOTE: Update the files in the above sequence, unless

mentioned in the release notes.
NOTE: Sometimes it is observed that after new firmware

upgrade or license changed, the workflow behaves
incorrectly. If this happens, the device has to be
formatted for complete memory and install workflow
again.
NOTE: Make sure that format memory clear all configurtion

data and all logs.
NOTE: After the system has cleared all the configurations,

the device will soft reset. After this, power cycle the
device. Ensure the health of all modules is now good.
If this is the case, the saved configuration file can be
uploaded to the device to restore the original
settings.
5.25.2.1 Verify the Firmware Update
Verify the following to make sure that the files are updated.
1. On the Module Info screen, make sure that the latest version is
available in the column App. version, as shown on the Device/
Module Info screen.
In case one of the versions is different, repeat the installation
instructions section for only those files which failed to update
correctly.
2. Verify the parameter settings to check if they are the same as they
were in the previous old firmware.

3. On the Diagnostic screen, select <System health> on any one of the

boards and then select <OK> on the IR controller or the LAD. The test
"Good/No Error" must appear on the screen, as shown in the Diag-
nostic - Module Health screen.
In case one of the boards shows a bad health, (which could result in
Device health fault alarm shown on unit) a format operation
followed by restoring of configuration file is necessary. Format of all-
configuration memory can be executed by Main Menu | Diagnostics |
Device tasks | Reset tasks | Format NOVRAM.
NOTE: After the system has cleared all the configurations,

the device will soft reset. After this, power cycle the
device. Ensure the health of all modules is now good.
If this is the case, the saved configuration file can be
uploaded to the device to restore the original
settings.
In case one or more loading arms are not visible after
installation of configuration, firmware upgrade or on
formatting memory, a device reboot can be
performed to make them available. In case recipes
are not restored, Please reinstall the configuration
file. In case a re-installation of license is necessary,
please contact Honeywell TAC and share the device
information file.
5.25.3 Test LED and LAD Information Submenus

On the LAD screen, select <Test LED> to view the diagnostics or the I/O
tests on the “Test” LED of LAD.

The LAD . Test LED screen appears, which displays the I/O tests
available on the MSC-L.
NOTE: The Test LED on the LAD displays the status of the
health of the selected I/O.
Select the status of the I/O, which is displayed on the
Test LED of LAD, and then select <OK>. The Test
LED is red if the health of the assigned I/O is bad,
and is green if the health of the assigned I/O is good.
5.25.4 Function Key

On the LAD screen, select <Function key> to specify the functions that
can be programmed to the function “F” key on the LAD. This helps you
to achieve a quicker operation of the MSC-L.
The LAD . Function Key screen appears, which specifies the functions
that can be programmed.

The configuration is saved on the LAD. Changes made to the function

key is applicable for other Fusion4 devices also.
5.25.5 LAD Information

On the LAD screen, select <LAD information>.
The LAD . LAD Information screen appears which displays the
relevant LAD information and diagnostics of LAD.

Operation - Truck Driver Operations
5.25.6 Format SD Card

1. On the LAD screen, select <Format SD card> to format the SD card of
the LAD. The confirmation dialog box appears.
CAUTION! All content is erased if you select OK.

2. Perform any one of the following.
 Click OK to erase all the content available in the SD card.
The LAD . Format SD Card screen appears, which provides the
status of the format.
or
 Click Cancel to terminate the operation.
5.26 Truck Driver Operations
5.26.1 Overview
A truck driver can perform loading operations by navigating through the
various screens designed for truck loading. FIGURE 5-59 provides an
overview of the truck loading operations.
NOTE: The screens displayed in grey are optional.

The vehicle authorization prompts can be enabled or disabled from the
workflow options on the device configuration menus. The permissive
connect screens appear only if the respective I/O bindings are
configured on the Bay I/O Bindings menu.

NOTE: This navigation is the factory default navigation,

which is available when using the MSC-L is stan-
dalone and is not controlled by the TAS. The data
entered on a few screens are validated and the
invalid entry can result in errors.
Enter Contract
number
Yes
No
FIGURE 5-59 Sequence of Truck driver operations
5.26.2 Default standalone MSC-L workflow
NOTE: This procedure is applicable in standalone mode and

is not controlled by the TAS.

1. When the MSC-L displays the Welcome! screen, press OK on the

keyboard.
If permissives are configured, then permissive connect screen

appears for each of the permissive similar to the grounding.
The Enter Pin screen appears only if the permissives are connected.
2. On the Enter Pin screen, enter the truck driver password using the
keyboard.
Press OK on the keyboard to confirm the password.
NOTE: The password is validated against the local database

or the remote database based on the configuration.

If the password entered is not valid, then an error

message is displayed.
NOTE: Asterisks (*) appear as you type each character of

your password.
If the vehicle/carrier/trailer/contract identification is enabled, then you
can enter the respective IDs. These IDs are validated against the local
or the remote database based upon your device authorization settings.
3. Enter the ID on the vehicle ID screen.
4. Enter the following attributes using the keyboard to perform the

transaction setup.
NOTE: Press the ESC key on the keyboard to return to the

previous screen.

5. If the load number prompt is enabled, enter the load number when
prompted.
6. Select the Arm in which you want to perform the batch. For example
ARM 1.

7. Select the recipe from the list of configured recipes.
8. If compartment prompt is enabled, enter the appropriate

compartment number.

9. If return quantity prompt is enabled, enter the return quantity.
10. If prompt is enabled, enter the preset as per the configured preset
type (liters, gallons, kilograms, and so on).

If the batch is executable to load, then the batch details screen

appears with the recipe name, compartment, arm name, and
preset value. If not, an error message appears.
11. Select <Confirm> to perform the batch or select <Cancel> to cancel the
batch.
12. If confirmed, press the Start button on the keyboard to commence
the batch.
The load another compartment prompt appears only if another batch

can begin (that is, there is an idle arm and the maximum number of
simultaneous batches has not been reached.) If a new batch cannot
be planned then the running screen appears.

A message appears prompting you if another batch needs to be

loaded.
13. Perform any one of the following:

 Select <Yes> if you want to load another compartment.
The selected arm screen appears. After entering all the details,
another batch can be started.
 Select <No> to go back to one of the following screens.
 Running screen (if there are batches still in progress).
 Transaction Overview screen (if there are no batches in
progress).

Balance Icon
A Balance icon is displayed on the screens of the MSC-L which are

intended for W&M custody transfer.
The Transaction details screen is a W&M intended screen. It displays
the balance icon as displayed in the figure above.
The screen displays all the batches in the GOV when the preset type is
configured as the Load control on the GOV. The Transaction details
screen can be viewed by the truck driver or the operator having security
level SL1 or higher.
14. Perform any one of the following:
 Select <No> to load another batch.
 Select <Yes> if you want to end the transaction.

A Disconnect screen appears where it is expected to disconnect the

permissives like grounding, overfill, and so on.
5.26.3 STOP Key Operations

When the arm is loading the STOP key on the keyboard can be used to
pause the running batches.
After the STOP key is pressed, all the running batches are in a paused
state as seen in the following figure.

To stop or resume the batches, press the OK key, which displays a

prompt as follows.
Perform one of the following on the Stop all batches screen.

 Select <Yes> if you want to stop all the batches. All the batches are
stopped and a prompt is displayed to load another compartment.
Perform one of the following on the load compartment screen.
 Select <Yes> to start a batch on another arm.
 Select <No> to end the transaction.
A transaction details screen is displayed and the transaction is
ended.

 Select <No> if you want to resume the batches. A screen is displayed

with a list of paused arms. You must first pick a paused arm before
choosing the action to perform on it..
Select the arm that needs to resumed and press OK. A screen is
displayed that allows you to select the desired action.
Perform one of the following:

 Select <Resume> to restart the arm and a screen is displayed with a
list to select the remaining paused arms. Choose the action for the
other arms.
 Select <Stop> to stop the selected paused arm if there are no more
paused arms then the Load another compartment screen appears.

5.26.4 Error Scenarios
5.26.4.1 Invalid Pin
If the entered pin is not available in the database, then an invalid PIN
message is displayed.
5.26.4.2 Invalid Preset
If a valid preset is not entered, then an error message is displayed.

5.26.4.3 Batch not Feasible
If the batch validation fails, for example, if the meter configuration and
stream configuration do not match, then after the Batch details screen
batch not feasible message appears.
5.26.4.4 Batch stopped due to an Alarm
If an alarm with action display pause or display shutdown occurs on the

device, the bay, the arm, or the stream, then the loading batch is
paused/stopped, with the display listing the alarms that have occurred.
An SL2 user or higher can clear the alarms so that new batches can be
started on that arm.

Operation - Service Technician Operations
5.27 Service Technician Operations

A service technician generally performs the service activities (for
example, Configuration and Monitoring the Alarms). The advanced
service activities (for example, Upgrade Firmware and Add the users)
are also sometimes performed by the service technician.
A user must be created in the user database with service level SL2 or
SL3 based on the activities that need to be performed.
Holding the <ESC> key on the keyboard anytime during the operation,
displays the log on screen. If the correct password or PIN is entered,
then the Main Menu is displayed.
NOTE: You are automatically logged out in the following

scenarios:
If the time-out is reached and there are no trans-

actions running.
The LAD is not connected.
Session time-out can be configured from Device

Configuration. General Settings.
5.27.1 Configuration Options

A service technician has various options that can be used for
configuring the MSC-L as follows:
 User Interface: Fusion4 LAD, Fusion4 IR interface or keyboard.
 Configuration file: Fusion4 LAD can be used for downloading the
configuration file.
 Fusion4 Portal: The MSC-L can be interfaced to Fusion4 Portal on
the RS-485 or the Ethernet ports.

5.27.2 Configuration Order

When the MSC-L is configured for a specific application, it is important
to follow a particular order. This is to ensure that the MSC-L can perform
the loading activities as required.
A loading arm can have product streams and additive streams. Each of
the logical streams contain a flow meter and a control valve/solenoid to
control the flow of the product or the additive. The arm is physically on a
bay and both the arms and the bays are logically part of the MSC-L.
See FIGURE 5-60 for the configuration order.
FIGURE 5-60 Configuration order
1. Device Configuration: Includes configuration of the MSC-L level

permissive like ESD, device level alarms, I/O settings for various I/
Os including the pulse inputs, and so on.
See 5.17.1 - Device Configuration, for more information regarding
the configuration of the parameters and the entities.
2. Stream Configuration: Includes the configuration of I/O bindings for
flow meter, actuator (DCV), solenoid and various control settings for
the streams. For example, the maximum flow rates, minimum flow
rates, stream level alarms, and so on.
See 5.18 - Stream Configuration, for more information regarding the
configuration of the parameters and the entities.
3. Arm Configuration: Includes assigning streams to an arm,
configuring recipe, arm level control parameters, arm alarms, and so
on.
See 5.19 - Arm Configuration, for more information regarding the

4. Bay Configuration: Includes configuring bay permissive. For

example, overfill, bay alarms, and so on.
See 5.17.2 - Bay Configuration, for more information regarding the
5.27.3 Configuration File

You can configure the MSC-L using user interface; but it can be time
consuming.
Retrieving and installing the configuration file using the Fusion4 LAD is
a time saving option that can be used effectively in situations where
there are multiple MSC-L devices with similar configurations.
Following are the XML based configuration file features.
 Retrieved and installed through the Fusion4 LAD.
 Prepared/modified offline (safe area).
 Contains all the configuration entities in the device except for the
following:
 The workflow
 The authorization databases
 Recipes
See FIGURE 5-61 for the contents of the configuration file.
FIGURE 5-61 Configuration file
The following table provides the description of the fields in the

configuration file.
Field Description
Name The name of the entity as it appears on the MSC-L.
Content The description of the enumeration options, otherwise empty.
Value The value of the entity.

Operation - Running Screens
For details regarding the installation or retrieving a configuration, refer

to the section Transfer 5.24.3 - Configurations.
5.27.4 Recipe Transfer using the Fusion4 LAD

The recipes are an important part of the MSC-L configuration.
The recipes can be retrieved or installed using the Fusion4 LAD.
 The recipes are saved with the configured recipe name on the
Fusion4 LAD.
 The recipe is validated after installation.
 The sum of all product stream blend ratios must be 100 %.
 The product and additive streams must be bound to the ARM.
 The Fusion4 LAD provides an easy mechanism to transfer the
recipes between the devices.
5.28 Running Screens
5.28.1 Loading Progress

During an active transaction with batches running on the arms, the Arm
n . Load Progress screen appears.
See FIGURE 5-62 for a sample of a loading progress, when the default
language selected in the <User display language> is <English UK> and the
Progress bar is green.
FIGURE 5-62 Loading progress for the default language

language selected in the <User display language> is <English UK> and the
Progress bar color is white.
FIGURE 5-63 Loading progress for the default language with progress bar color white
language selected in the <User display language> is <English UK> and
different colors are selected for the arms.
FIGURE 5-64 Loading progress for the default language with different colors for the arms

The following table describes the operational data on the Load Progress
screen.
Acronym used on
the Load Progress Description
screen
Compartment Displays the Compartment ID entered.
Arm name Displays the name of the Arm that is selected.
Recipe name Displays the name of the Recipe that is selected.
Load GOV Displays the GOV of the finished product being loaded.
Remaining qty Displays the remaining quality of the finished product that
is yet to be loaded.
Flow rate Displays the actual flow rate.
The Load GOV, the Remaining qty, and the Flow rate are the default
labels. These labels can be configured to display some other
parameters from the 5.17.1.1.3.2 - System Config . Display. Operational
Screen menu.
Following is a sample screen where the operational label 2 and 3 are
configured as Additive ppm 1 and Preset.

Operation - Recovery Mode
5.28.2 Left Arm Pane

The left pane displays the status of the arms. Based on the license
used, the number of arms displayed in the left pane varies.
The state of the arm is also indicated by the running, stop, or the pause
symbol.
Following is a sample screen, which shows the paused batch.
5.29 Recovery Mode

Sometimes, MSC-L does not start up properly after incomplete firmware
upgrade and remains in initialization state.
MSC-L can be recovered from this stage by loading firmware again
using Recovery mode.

Operation - W&M Compliance
1. Press key “ESC” , “8” , “STOP” together (i.e., key “ESC” + key “8” +
key “STOP”) while powering up MSC-L.
2. After few seconds, MSC-L will go into recovery stage and Recovery
menu will be displayed with options for Firmware Upgrade, Reset
options and Device Info. User can select required option from the
menu using LAD.
3. The device can be rebooted using Reset Options submenu.
NOTE: This is not available on the MSC-A as it does not

have a physical keyboard
5.30 W&M Compliance

W&M compliance of the MSC-L is based on the following criteria.
 Configuration of the W&M Intended entity
 Sealing
 Device Health
Following sections explain the criteria in more details.
5.30.1 W&M Intended

For the MSC-L to be intended for W&M custody transfer, the
configuration entity W&M intended should be set to <True>.
See section 5.17.1.1.1 - System Config . General Identification for more
information.
This setting can be changed by a user who has SL2 or higher access
(typically a service technician or a notified body engineer).
5.30.2 W&M Sealing

The MSC-L can be W&M sealed in the following two ways.
1. Using a board jumper/switch on every Flexconn board in the MSC-L.
The MSC-L W&M relevant configuration and the MSC-L relevant
firmware is sealed when the jumper is set to ON.
firmware is not sealed when the jumper is set to OFF.
NOTE: The W&M board jumper/switches are daisy chained

(logical OR-ed) hence only one board needs to have
the W&M board jumper/switch in the ON position to
seal all boards. Consequently, multiple W&M board
jumper/switches placed in the ON position must be
removed before the device is unsealed.

Operation - W&M Compliance
2. Using a switch on the keyboard of the MSC-L.
Switch
FIGURE 5-65 Keyboard of MSC-L

firmware is sealed when this switch is activated.
When the switch is deactivated, the MSC-L W&M relevant configu-
ration and the relevant firmware is not sealed.
NOTE: In case the W&M keyboard switch is used for

sealing, the board W&M jumpers/switches must be
set to OFF. The device can be sealed by the service
technician or the notified body engineer.
The MSC-L can be physically sealed as shown in the following figure.
FIGURE 5-66 Sealing Bolt

Operation - Contacting Honeywell TAC
5.30.3 Device Health

For the MSC-L to be W&M compliant the device health should be good.
The device health is good in the following scenarios:
 All the hardware is available and functional.
 All memory and interface checks are passed.
 All boards are in valid temperature range.
 All board voltages are in valid range.
If any of the board has bad or uncertain health the device health is bad.
NOTE: CAN-IN-OUT-MSC board is not taken into account

because of non relevance for W&M.
5.30.4 MSC-L W&M compliance

The MSC-L is compliant for W&M custody transfer if all the following
criteria are met.
 The W&M Intended is set to <True>.
 The MSC-L is W&M sealed - either the jumper in ON or the switch is
activated.
 The device health is good.
5.31 Contacting Honeywell TAC

When contacting Honeywell Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for
support, it is helpful to supply the following information to aid in
troubleshooting
 Description of the query/issue with relevant steps, screenshots and
any other applicable information.
 Description of troubleshooting steps (if any) that have been tried to
resolve the issue.
 Device serial number, production date and sales code or Device Info
file retrieved from the device.
 License type used on the Device.
 A copy of the device configuration retrieved from the device.
 Alarm and event logs retrieved from the device.
 Transaction records If the issue is related to particular transactions.
 If the issue is related to interface with an external system, please
include details of external system being used, protocol used for
communication and any available host/communication logs.

Alarm Handling - General
CHAPTER 6 ALARM HANDLING
6.1 General
You can set various alarm configurations using the MSC-L menu. Also,
the active alarms and alarm logs can be viewed through the MSC-L
menu.
6.2 Basic Concepts

An alarm is an indication that an undesired situation has occurred. In
MSC-L, the following collection of information is associated with an
alarm.
 Name
 Scope
 State
 Action
 Date
 Time
6.2.1 Alarm Name

The alarm name is used for describing the situation in which the alarm
has occurred.
6.2.2 Alarm Scope

Conceptually, an MSC-L device has loading bays. A bay has multiple
loading arms and loading arms have zero or more streams associated
with them. They are referred to as scope type.
There are five scope types in the MSC-L as follows:
 Device
 Bay (or transaction)
 Loading arm (or batch)
 Product stream
 Additive stream
On the alarm log screen, the emphasized first character of the alarm
chapter is used for indicating the chapter to which the alarm belongs to.
Consider the example of an Tank empty alarm on product stream 3. The
scope type is a Product stream. But this information is not enough to
uniquely identify the source of the alarm. The index of the product
stream, 3 in this case is missing.

Alarm Handling - Basic Concepts
In general, the scope of an alarm is the scope type together with the
index within that scope type. The index for each scope type always
starts from one.
6.2.3 Alarm State

An alarm can be in one of following possible states.
 Inactive
 Asserted
 Acknowledged
In the MSC-L, an alarm is either active or inactive.
An inactive alarm is in the inactive state. An active alarm is either in the
asserted state or the acknowledged state. The difference between the
asserted and acknowledged state is only in the way alarm outputs are
driven.
6.2.4 Alarm Action

The way the system responds to an activated alarm depends on the
Alarm Action of that alarm.
There are four possible alarm actions.
 Disabled
 Display
 Pause & Display
 Shutdown & Display
An alarm with Disabled alarm action is ignored. It is a way to tell the
system that all alarming for that particular alarm is disabled.
A Display only alarm is an alarm that does not affect the loading
operations that are happening using the MSC-L. The alarms are only
displayed on the alarm screens and included in the alarm log.
Unlike a Display alarm, both Pause & Display and Shutdown & Display
are considered a critical alarm. A critical alarm affects the loading of the
batch it applies to. A batch is affected by an alarm in the following
scenarios:
 If the alarm is a loading arm alarm of the arm that serves that batch.
 If it is a stream (product or additive) alarm that is associated with the
loading arm that serves the batch.
 If it is a bay alarm of the bay that serves the batch.
 If it is a device alarm.
The difference between a Shutdown & Display alarm and a Pause &
Display alarm is that the Shutdown & Display alarm terminates the
affected batch(es) and that the Pause & Display alarm pauses the
affected batch(es).

Alarm Handling - Alarm Severity
NOTE: Active stream alarms that are not associated with

any arm have no effect on batches and do not drive
alarm indication and/or alarm shutdown outputs.
6.2.5 Date & Time

The Date and Time associated with an alarm indicates the most recent
date and time at which the alarm is activated. In the alarm log it is the
date and time at which the state of the alarm is changed.
6.3 Alarm Severity

The alarm severity is a concept that applies to loading arms. The alarm
severity of a loading arm is the highest severity of the active alarms that
affects the loading arm. The alarm severity is further explained in the
following example.
6.3.1 Setup
Consider the MSC-L that is set-up as follows:
 Three product streams P1, P2, and P3.
 Three loading arms L1, L2, and L3.
 One Device alarm D
 Two product stream alarms PS1 and PS2.
6.3.2 Configuration
The streams are configured as follows:
 P1 is associated to L1
 P2 is associated to L2
 P3 is not being associated to any arm
The alarms are configured as follows:
 D, a Device alarm with alarm action Display.
 PS1, a Product stream alarm on product stream 1 with alarm action
Display.
 PS3, a Product stream alarm on product stream 3 with alarm action
Pause & Display.
6.3.3 Scenario
For the above set-up and configuration, assume a sequence of alarm
state changes and observe how it affects the severity is for each of the
loading arms. The initial alarm state of each of the alarms is inactive.
Alarm Change Severity
L1 L2 L3

Alarm Handling - Alarm Severity
Alarm Change Severity

1. Initial None None None
2. D is activated Display Display Display
3. PS1 is activated Display Display Display
4. D is deactivated Display None None
5. PS3 is activated Display None None
6. PS1 action changed to Display None None
shutdown
7. PS1 is deactivated None None None
8. PS1 is activated Shutdown None None
9. PS3 is associated to L3 This is not allowed in the MCL.
Deactivate first or reboot after.
1. Initially there are no active alarms available, hence the severity is

None for all the loading arms.
2. A device alarm applies to all arms. Hence, when D is activated, the
alarm action of D - Display, applies to all the loading arms.
3. Then PS1 is activated, which brings L1 to Display severity. The
difference is not seen, because the arm already was at the Display
severity.
4. If the Device alarm D is deactivated, then it is removed from all the
loading arms. But, since there is still one active alarm Display
severity on the product stream 1, it affects the loading arm L1.
Hence, L1 will have Display severity.
5. Now if PS3 is activated, it does not affect any loading arm as stream
P3 is not associated to any loading arm. However, this alarm
appears in the alarm screens and in the alarm log.
6. If the alarm action for PS1 is changed from Display to Shutdown &
Display, there is no effect at this point. This is because, the alarm
action used in the MSC-L is only sampled at the time the alarm is
activated.
7. If PS1 is deactivated, it removes the last activated Display alarm for
L1 and hence L1 changes to Alarm severity None.
8. If PS1 is activated, then it uses the configured Shutdown & Display
alarm action, and brings the alarm severity of L1 to Shutdown &
Display.
9. If a stream has an active alarm then it is not allowed to associate the
stream to a loading arm or to dissociate from a loading arm. You
need to try and clear the alarms first or reboot the MSC-L after the
faulty (re) configuration is made.
The loading progress bars at the left side of the screen display an icon
which indicates the state of the loading arms. The state of the loading

Alarm Handling - Alarm Output Configuration
arm is a combination of the loading state (idle, running, and so on) and
the alarm severity of the loading arm. From that icon the highest
severity among the active alarms associated with the loading arm can
be read.
6.4 Alarm Output Configuration

In the MSC-L two different alarm output bindings per loading arm can
be configured. These are:
 The alarm-indication output can be set with [Alarm indication] I/O
binding entity.
 The alarm-shutdown output can be set with [Alarm shutdown] I/O
binding entity.
The alarm shutdown output of a loading arm activates when the alarm
severity of that loading arm becomes critical. A critical severity is a
severity that is equal to either Pause & Display or Shutdown & Display.
The reverse is also possible. If the alarm severity of the loading arm
becomes non-critical then the alarm shutdown for that loading arm is
deactivated. The severity is non-critical when it is not critical, so it is
either None or Display.
The (de)activation of the alarm indication output is dependent on the
number of unacknowledged active alarms that affect the loading arm.
When the number changes from zero to a number larger than zero, the
alarm indication output is activated. When the number changes from a
number larger than zero to zero, then the alarm indication output is
deactivated.

Alarm Handling - Operations on alarms
6.5 Operations on alarms

A number of operations can be performed on alarms. Not all operations
are directly accessible. However, they are explained in the following
sections to give a clear understanding of the way alarms work.
6.5.1 Raising
For each alarm, a specific raise conditions is periodically checked. If the
raise condition is met, then a RaiseAlarm operation is performed. A
RaiseAlarm operation activates the alarm if the alarm is not active yet.
6.5.2 Clearing
Clearing is performed through user interaction. On the alarm screen (or
through external interfaces), an individual alarm is selected and a
ClearAlarm operation may be requested for that alarm. The ClearAlarm
operation causes the alarm to be deactivated. However, if the raise
conditions for that alarm are still met, the effect of the ClearAlarm
operation is immediately overwritten by the RaiseAlarm operation.
Some alarms, such as the Tank Low Level alarm, perform automatic
clearing. For such alarms, there is a raise condition and a clear
condition that is periodically checked. When the clear condition is met a
ClearAlarm operation is performed and the alarm is deactivated. In case
of the Tank Low Level alarm, the clear condition is the complement of
the raise condition, but this is not so in general.
6.5.3 Resetting
Resetting an alarm is a user operation. An individual alarm is selected
and a ResetAlarm operation is requested to reset the alarm. For most of
the alarms the ResetAlarm directly translates to performing a
ClearAlarm operation. But this is not true in general.
An alarm may have some state associated with it. When the raise
condition is based on this state, then only clearing the alarm causes the
alarm to be raised immediately again, even if the situation is such that
you do not expect that alarm to come back again. For example, the
'Pulse hardware error' alarm maintains a counter that counts the
number of erroneous pulses. If the ResetAlarm operation does not clear
that counter but only clears the alarm, then the value of the counter
causes a new RaiseAlarm operation, even if there are no new pulse
errors detected.
6.5.4 Acknowledging
Acknowledging an alarm is a user operation. An individual alarm is
selected and an AcknowledgeAlarm operation is requested to
acknowledge an alarm. This operation has no effect on clearing/raising

Alarm Handling - Operations on alarms
alarms but only moves an alarm from the Asserted state to the
Acknowledged state. This affects only on the alarm indication output.
6.5.5 Resetting all alarms

Resetting all alarms performs a ResetAlarm operation on all currently
active (asserted and acknowledged) alarms.
6.5.6 Acknowledging all alarms

Acknowledging all alarms performs an AcknowledgeAlarm operation on
all currently asserted alarms.
NOTE: The Service Due Reminder alarm has a different

'Reset' operation implemented. In the MSC-L user
interface the Reset button for this alarm is replaced
by an Off button. Press the Off button to switch off
the alarm. Switching off the alarm brings the Alarm
Action temporarily to the Disabled alarm state. When
the system is rebooted or when the alarm is recon-
figured, the Alarm Action is set back to the
configured Alarm Action.
To avoid accidently disabling of this alarm, resetting

all the alarms performs an ordinary reset on the
Service Due Reminder alarm, causing it to become
asserted immediately after again.

Alarm Handling - Active Alarms
6.6 Active Alarms

The Active alarms screen displays all active and acknowledged alarms.
See FIGURE 6-1.
FIGURE 6-1 Active Alarms
To change the state of the alarm to <ACKNOWLEDGED>, on the Active

alarm screen, perform the following:
• Scroll to the particular alarm, select <Ack> and then press <OK> on
the IR controller, the LAD, or the keyboard to acknowledge the
alarm. The state of the alarm changes to <ACKNOWLEDGED> and a
new alarm log item is created.
OR
• Scroll to All alarms, select <Ack> and then press <OK> on the IR
controller, the LAD, or keyboard to acknowledge all the alarms.
The state of all the active alarms changes to <ACKNOWLEDGED>
and new alarm log items are created.
To change the state of the alarm to <ALARM_INACTIVE>, on the Active
alarm screen, perform the following:
• Scroll to the particular alarm, select <Reset> and then press <OK>
on the IR controller, the LAD, or the keyboard to reset the alarm.
The state of all the alarms changes to <ALARM_INACTIVE> and a
new alarm log item is created.
OR
• Scroll to the top, to all the alarms, select <Reset> and then press
<OK> on the IR controller, the LAD, or keyboard to reset the

Alarm Handling - Alarm Logs
alarms. The state of all the active alarms changes to <ALARM_IN-

ACTIVE> and a new alarm log item is created.
To reset all alarms through hardware, the entity [I/O binding alarm reset input]
must be configured accordingly. This allows you to reset all alarms on a
particular arm.
A special function key can be assigned to the “F” key on the LAD to re-
enable the device. This function <Re-enable device> clears all the alarms
on the device.
6.7 Alarm Logs

Any alarm-state change that occurs is logged with a timestamp.
Alarms can have the following three states.
 Inactive (default)
 Active
 Acknowledged
On the Alarm log screen, all the alarm states that are changed can be
examined.
6.8 List of all alarms

This section lists the alarms and their cause for the Device, Bay, Arm,
Product stream, and Additive stream alarms.
6.8.1 Device Alarms

Alarm Cause
Service due reminder The [Next scheduled service] date has expired.
Programmable input The programmable input state (active/de-active) does not
1.4 match with the expected input state.
Deadman The operator does not press any key or the deadman
refresh switch in the deadman callout time and the timer
expires.
Power failure This transaction is not completed due to a power failure.
Emergency stop The emergency stop signal is active.
NEDAP communica- The communication with the Nedap Reader is lost.
tion failure
NEDAP battery Low The Nedap reader reports a low battery status.
Nexwatch communi- The communication with the Nexwatch reader is lost.
cation failure
A task called Block- An internal software error occurred inside the device. A
Task() reboot is required

Alarm Handling - List of all alarms
6.8.2 Bay Alarms
Alarm Cause
1..6 match with the expected input state.
Transaction start error The new transaction could not be started due to an internal
error in the device. Please contact Honeywell TAC.
Transaction stop error The running transaction cannot be stopped due to an
internal error in the device. Please contact Honeywell TAC.
Max. #batches No new batch can be started because the maximum
exceeded number of batches within a transaction is reached.
Grounding [Pause] The grounding permissive is detached.
Grounding [Shutdown] The grounding permissive is detached.
Overfill [Pause] The overfill protection permissive is detached.
Overfill [Shutdown] The overfill protection permissive is detached.
Vapor Recovery The vapor recovery permissive is detached.
[Pause]
Vapor Recovery [Shut- The vapor recovery permissive is detached.
down]
NOTE: The Grounding [Pause], Grounding [Shutdown], Overfill

[Pause], Overfill [Shutdown], Vapor Recovery [Pause], and
Vapor Recovery [Shutdown] alarms come in pairs and
each pair is used to implement a single permissive.

6.8.3 Arm Alarms
Alarm Cause
Initial flow rate low The flow rate during the initial flow stage is below the arm
initial flow rate by the [Low percentage] after the [Alarm start
delay] elapsed.
Initial flow rate high The flow rate exceeds the arm initial flow rate by the [High
percentage] and the [Alarm start delay] elapsed.
Full flow rate low The full flow rate is below the arm full flow rate by the [Low
percentage] and the [Alarm start delay] elapses.
Full flow rate high The flow rate exceeds the arm full flow rate by the [High
percentage] and the [Alarm start delay] elapses.
Pre-stop flow rate low The flow rate during the pre-stop flow stage is below the arm
pre-stop flow rate by the [Low percentage] and the [Alarm
start delay] elapses.
Pre-stop flow rate high The flow rate during the pre-stop flow rate exceeds the arm
pre-stop flow rate by the [High percentage] and the [Alarm
start delay] elapses.
1..6 match with the expected input state.
Block valve fault No valve feedback is detected.
Arm exceeds overrun The measured volume exceeds the preset and the
limit configured overrun limit.
Clean arm volume not The measured clean arm volume is less than the specified
reached clean arm volume minus the clean arm tolerance.
Arm parked The arm parked input is detached.
Batch initialization Batch could not be initialized due to an internal error in the
error device. Please contact Honeywell TAC.
Calibration batch ini- Calibration batch could not be initialized due to an internal
tialization error error in the device. Please contact Honeywell TAC .
Batch start error Batch could not be started due to an internal error in the
device. Please contact Honeywell TAC.
NOTE: This error can occur if a programmable alarm is

configured at the batch level with alarm activation (idle)
different from alarm activation (running) and a response
time of 0 seconds if the IO is already in the activation
(running) while batch is being started. To resolve this,
increase the response time of the alarm to 1 second or
more.
Calibration batch start Calibration batch could not be started due to an internal
error error in the device. Please contact Honeywell TAC.
Batch stop error Batch could not be stopped due to an internal error in the
Calibration batch stop Calibration batch could not be stopped due to an internal
error error in the device. Please contact Honeywell TAC.
Batch pause error Batch could not be paused due to an internal error in the

Alarm Cause
Batch resume error Batch could not be resumed due to an internal error in the
NOTE: This error can occur if a programmable alarm is

configured at the batch level with alarm activation(pause)
different from alarm activation(running) and a response time
of 0 seconds if the IO is already in the activation(running)
while batch is being resumed. To resolve this, increase the
response time of the alarm to 1 second or more .
6.8.4 Product Stream Alarms

Alarm Cause
Leaking valve The volume accumulated on the product stream meter
exceeds the [Leaking Volume Limit] entity within the
[Leaking Timeout period] when the stream is idle.
No product No product flow is detected from the product stream meter
within the [no product timeout] period.
No pump The pump feedback signal is not detected within the [Pump
feedback timeout]. It is only possible if the I/O binding for the
pump is ON/OFF and the pump indications are configured.
No hydraulic pump The feedback signal is not detected within the [Hydraulic
pump feedback timeout].
It is only possible if the I/O binding for hydraulic pump is ON/
OFF and the hydraulic pump indication is configured.
Block valve fault The block valve feedback signal is not detected within the
[Block valve feedback timeout].
It is only possible if the I/O binding for the block valve is ON/
OFF and the block valve indications are configured.
Blend tolerance low The blend ratio between the delivered product quantity with
the delivered batch quantity is less than the blend ratio
specified in the recipe by [Blend tolerance limit].
Blend tolerance high The blend ratio between the delivered product quantity with
the delivered batch quantity is more than the blend ratio
specified in the recipe by [Blend tolerance limit].
Stream exceeds over- The product quantity delivered exceeds the preset quantity
run limit by the configured [Overrun volume limit].
Valve fault The product stream valve is not closed in the [Valve fault
timeout] entity after sending the signal to close the product
stream valve.
VCF out of range The calculated VCF is out of range during the volume
correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF non convergence The Non convergence error occurs during the volume
VCF supercritical fluid The Superficial fluid error occurs during the volume
VCF no reference fluid No reference fluid error occurs during the volume correction
calculation used in the MSC-L.

Alarm Cause
VCF memory Memory Allocation error occurs during the volume
allocation correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF temperature out The temperature sensor output is out of range during the
of range volume correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF pressure out of The pressure sensor output is out of range during the
range volume correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF density out of The density sensor output is out of range during the volume
range correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF alpha60 out of The Alpha60 out of Range error occurs during the volume
range correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF no solution The No Solution error occurs during the volume correction
VCF illegal argument The Illegal argument error occurs during the volume
VCF pressure com- The Pressure Compensation not supported error occurs
pensation not sup- during the volume correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
ported
VCF bad sensor The Bad sensor health error occurs during the volume
health correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
Pulse hardware fault The pulse input module detects the following error
conditions.
• Reading information from the Pulse Input processor.
• Pulse overflow errors.
• BAD health of the pulse input function.
Pulse phase fault The dual pulse inputs are out of phase.
It is only possible if the MSC-L is configured for quad pulse.
Tank low level A Tank low level signal is received. This signal is received
only when the I/O binding input (DI, PI, and so on) are not
active for the Tank low level input.
Tank empty A Tank empty signal is received. This signal is received only
when the I/O binding input (DI, PI, and so on) are not active
for the Tank empty input.
Temperature sensor Temperature sensor fault is detected on the temperature
fault sensor on the product stream.
Low temperature The instantaneous temperature is less than the configured
limits.
High temperature The instantaneous temperature is greater than the
configured limits.
Pressure sensor The pressure sensor fault is detected on the pressure
sensor on the product stream.
Low pressure The instantaneous pressure is less than the configured
limits.
High pressure The instantaneous pressure is greater than the configured
limits.

Alarm Cause
Density sensor fault The density sensor fault is detected on the density sensor
on the product stream.
Low density The instantaneous density is less than the configured limits.
High density The instantaneous density is greater than the configured
limits.
Flowrate exceeded The flow rate exceeds the configured meter limits.
meter limit
VCF invalid reference Invalid reference condition error occurs during the volume
condition correction calculation used in the MSC-L
VCF invalid tempera- Invalid temperature scale error occurs during the volume
ture scale correction calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF invalid commod- Invalid commodity group error occurs during the volume cor-
ity group rection calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF invalid table Invalid table error occurs during the volume correction cal-
culation used in the MSC-L
VCF invalid flow meter Invalid flow meter health error occurs during the volume cor-
health rection calculation used in the MSC-L.
VCF rounding error Invalid rounding error occurs during the volume correction
Factored pulse out The configured number of pulses cannot be generated on
fault the pulse output.

6.8.5 Additive Stream Alarms
Alarm Cause
Leaking valve Volume accumulated on the additive stream meter within
the [Leaking timeout period] is more than the [Leaking
Volume limit] (when the stream is idle or in between
injections.)
No additive The [Number of retries] * [No additive timeout] is elapsed
after the additive pulses stop during a batch.
As soon as the additive solenoid opens, the timer [No
additive timeout] starts.
No pump The pump feedback signal is not detected within the [Pump
feedback timeout]. It is only possible if the I/O binding for the
pump is ON/OFF and the pump indications are configured.
Block valve fault The block valve feedback signal is not detected within the
[Block valve feedback timeout].
It is only possible if the I/O binding for the block valve is ON/
OFF and the block valve indications are configured.
Low volume deviation The average of the additive injection volume calculated over
the configured number of cycles is lower than the additive
deviation percentage. The
alarm is evaluated after every injection.
With the entity [Additive volume deviation], the acceptable
deviation can be set.
With the entity [Number of cycles before deviation alarm
evaluation], the number of additive injection cycles that are
used for calculating the average of the injection volume for
the deviation calculations can be set.
High volume deviation The average of the additive injection volume calculated over
configured number of cycles exceeds the additive deviation
percentage. The alarm is evaluated after every injection.
With the entity [Additive volume deviation], the acceptable
deviation can be set.
With the entity [Number of cycles before deviation alarm
evaluation], the number of additive injection cycles that are
used for calculating the average of the injection volume for
the deviation calculations can be set.
Control fault The MSC-L is not configured appropriately and does not
have sufficient time to handle all the inject triggers.
NOTE: The maximum number of triggers that can be stored
inside the buffer is 10.
Solenoid fault The system cannot activate or deactivate the solenoid. (This
is an internal firmware control failure).
Pulse hardware fault The pulse input module detects the following error
conditions.
• Reading information from the Pulse Input processor.
Pulse phase fault The dual pulse input are out of phase.
It is only possible if the MSC-L is configured for quad pulse.

Alarm Cause
Factored pulse out The configured number of pulses cannot be generated on
fault the pulse output.
Temperature error The temperature sensor fault is detected on the temperature
sensor on the product stream.
Tank low level The Tank low level signal is received. This signal is received
active for the Tank low level input.
Tank empty The Tank empty signal is received. This signal is received
active for the Tank empty input.

6.8.6 External Additive Stream Alarms
Alarm Cause
Batch additive vol- Batch deviation alarm is generated only at the end of the
ume deviation batch. The alarm is generated if there is a deviation of more
than half of injection volume between the actual additive
quantity delivered and the expected additive quantity to be
delivered for the entire batch.
Injector command When external additive controller does not recognize the
rejected command sent by MSC-L or is not in correct state to
execute the command, it rejects the command with an error
code resulting in injector command rejected alarm on the
MSC-L.
Device offline The device offline alarm occurs if the external additive does
not respond to any commands sent for that stream for the
configured timeout. This alarm will not be generated if the
external additive is not associated with any of the arms.
Leaking Valve [*] when the [leaking timeout period] is more than the [leaking
volume limit] measured at the pulse input of that particular
stream. It is also generated in between injections (during a
transaction) if the [leaking volume limit] is measured inside
the [leaking timeout period].
Flush Volume [*] This alarm is generated when the wild stream between
entering the slow flow state and closing the transaction is
less than the configured [Flush Volume] - [Flush Volume
deviation] . The [Flush Volume deviation] is entered as the
percentage of the [Flush Volume] .
No Activity [*] This alarm is generated when Inject now command is not
received in the [No activity timeout], either after enabling
permissive command or after a previous inject now
command.
No Additive [*] This alarm is generated when the [number of retries] * [no
additive timeout] is elapsed and during an injection process
when the additive pulses stop. As soon as the additive
solenoid opens, the timer [no additive timeout] starts.
No Pump [*] This alarm is generated when the pump does not receive a
feedback signal within the [pump feedback timeout]. It is
only possible if the I/O binding for the pump is ON/OFF and
the pump indications are configured.
Add Volume Devia- Injection volume calculated over configured number of
tion [*] cycles exceeds the additive deviation percentage.
Control Fault [*] This alarm is generated when the MSC-A is not configured
appropriately and does not have sufficient time to handle all
the inject triggers.
Solenoid Fault [*] This alarm is generated when the system cannot activate or
deactivate the solenoid.

Alarm Cause
Pulse Hardware [*] This alarm is generated when the pulse input module
detects the following error conditions.
• Not able to read the information from the PIC controller.
Or
• The dual pulse input are out of phase (only if configured
for quad pulse).
Tank Empty [*] This alarm is generated when a Tank empty signal is
received. This signal is received only when the I/O Binding
input (DI, PI, and so on) are not active for the Tank empty
input.
Ext. add. Device Firm- General fail alarm/ any other alarm not listed here.
ware failure [*]
Ext. add. Device This alarm is generated when external additive detects HMI
Program failure [*] error, Arm board missing, batch permissive failure or stream
start failure.
Power Failure [*] External additive controller sees a power failure.
License Error [*] Incorrect license on external additive controller.
Service due reminder This alarm is generated when the [Next schedule service]
[*] date expires.
NOTE: * Please note that the corresponding parameters

need to be configured on External additive controller.
The parameter names used here are specific to
MSC-A but similar parameters will be available on
other devices.
6.8.7 Dual Bay Alarms

Alarm Cause
Swing arm invalid Both [Bay 1 in position] and [Bay 2in position] read an active
position signal.
Swing arm invalid The arm changes its position while the arm is not idle. This
transition alarm is not configurable and always terminates the batch.

)RU0RUH,QIRUPDWLRQ
Fusion4 MSC-L,
visit www.honeywellprocess.com
Or contact your Honeywell A M "
$PHULFDV $VLD3DFLILF
$! (GB
1 50West Sam Houston Pkwy S FI# "J (;I
Houston,TX77042 ' ": K>= F<
&'$ (# )*=E=<EE > >
(# )* (480)293-2042 ) "/#
) /#
(XURSH0LGGOH(DVWDQG$IULFD

6#:;<
= >?@6
#A# B
(# )*< C D E F 9 11
) /# March 21
21
Fusion4 MSC-L

Fusion4 MSCL Installation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fusion4 MSCL Installation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fusion4 MSCL Installation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fusion4 MSC-L

Installation & Operation Manual

© 2021 - Honeywell International Inc.

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

CHAPTER 2 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

2.3.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

3.2.4 System-level Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

3.8.4 Dual-Pulse Input (Quad PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

3.11.2 Network and Security Control Recommendations . . . . . . . . .3-66

CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

4.7.6.6 Analog Cable 1 (Gland 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

CHAPTER 5 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

5.3.4.1 Basic Navigation (Fusion4 IR Controller + Fusion4 LAD) . . . . .5-8

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

5.7 Loading Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

5.13.2.3.4 Stream Configuration - Stream n - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-122

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

5.17.1 Device Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-155

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

5.17.2.3.2 System Config . Alarms . Weighbridge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-202

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

5.19.3.1 Flow Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-272

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

5.21.8 Device Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-320

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

5.26.2 Default standalone MSC-L workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-379

CHAPTER 6 ALARM HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

6.5 Operations on alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

1.1 Product Overview

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

FIGURE 1-1 Basic MSC-L principle of operation (example)

NOTE: The MSC-L can control up to six loading arms simultaneously.

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

1.2 Functionality Overview

1.3 Target Audience for this Manual

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

FIGURE 1-2 Fusion4 Multi Stream Controller - Loading (MSC-L)

Fusion4 MSC-L Part No.: 4418309_Rev11

2.1 Safety Conventions

ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive device

Part No.: 4418309_Rev11 Fusion4 MSC-L

2.2 Safety Instructions for the MSC-L

WARNING! You must strictly follow all the safety instructions

Class 1, WARNING! Zone 2 WARNING! Zone 2 WARNING!

Safe Area - Safe - Safe -

2.2.1.1 EC Declaration of Conformity (for EU)

Refer to the EC declaration of conformity and ATEX certificate(s),

2.2.1.2 Control Drawings for FM & CSA